Panasonic | KXTD816SL | Operating instructions | Panasonic KXTD1232SL Operating Instructions

Panasonic KXTD1232SL Operating Instructions
Digital Super Hybrid System
U
M
SER
ANUAL
Please read this manual before using
the Digital Super Hybrid System.
MODEL
KX-TD816SL / KX-TD1232SL
Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Telephone Systems.
System Components
Model No.
Service Unit
KX-TD816SL
KX-TD1232SL
Digital Super Hybrid System (Main Unit)
Digital Super Hybrid System (Main Unit)
Telephone
KX-T7230SL
KX-T7235SL
KX-T7250SL
Digital proprietary telephone with display
Digital proprietary telephone with large display
Digital proprietary telephone with monitor
Optional
Equipment
KX-T7240SL
Digital DSS Console
User-supplied
Equipment
Single Line Telephone
NOTICE:
2
Description
In this User Manual, the suffix “SL” of each model number is omitted.
Attention
• If there is any trouble, unplug the extension line and connect a known working phone. If the
known working phone operates properly, have the defective phone repaired by one of the
specified Panasonic Factory Service Centers. If the known working phone does not operate
properly, check the Digital Super Hybrid System and the Internal extension wiring.
• Keep the unit away from heating appliances and electrical noise generating devices such as
fluorescent lamps and motors.
• The unit should be kept free of dust, moisture and vibration, and should not be exposed to direct
sunlight.
• Do not use benzine, thinner, or the like, or any abrasive powder to clean the cabinet. Wipe it with
a soft cloth.
• Do not use any handset other than a Panasonic handset.
WARNING:
TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS
PRODUCT TO RAIN OR ANY TYPE OF MOISTURE.
For your future reference
SERIAL NO.
DATE OF PURCHASE
(found on the bottom of the unit)
NAME OF DEALER
DEALER’S ADDRESS
3
Introduction
Who Should Use This Manual
This manual is designed for users of the Digital Super Hybrid System, model number KXTD816 and KX-TD1232. It is to be used after the system is installed and System
Programming is completed. The focus is Proprietary Telephones (PTs); KX-T7230/KXT7235/KX-T7250 digital DSS Console; KX-T7240, Single Line Telephones (SLTs); ISDN.
Telephones (for KX-TD1232 users only), and their features. The step-by-step procedures
required to activate each feature are discussed in detail. Information on the illustration of the
KX-TD816 and the KX-TD1232 systems and the required System Programming are
provided under separate cover in the Installation Manual.
How to Use This Manual
This manual consists of the following sections:
(Section 1) PT Overview
Provides configuration information on PTs. It provides an illustration of each telephone,
identifies their feature buttons, supplies background information on these feature buttons,
and provides initial setting.
(Section 2) Station Programming
Provides the steps required to assign features to PT flexible buttons and to the DPT system.
(Section 3) User Programming
Provides the steps required to assign some features to the system.
(Section 4) PT Features
Lists the DPT features. Background information is given for each feature as are the steps
required to activate each feature. Lists the Operator Service features. The extension assigned
as an operator has the ability to perform the special features.
(Section 5) DSS Console Features
Provides configuration information on the DSS Console. It gives background information on
the DSS Console features and provides the steps required to activate each feature.
(Section 6) SLT and ISDN telephone features
Provides background information on the SLT and ISDN telephone features and lists the steps
required to activate each features.
(Section 7) Quick Reference
Simply describes operating instructions for the features within the system.
(Section 8) Appendix
Provides Display Examples, Feature Number List, LED Indication, Tone List, and several
information are explained in this section.
4
Introduction
Features and Capabilities
KX-TD816 and KX-TD1232 are sophisticated and powerful system that satisfy just what
you expect of an office communications system. We list some remarkable features below.
The features marked “*” are available only for KX-T7235.
■ Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On) allows you to call a busy extension/CO line and wait
until it becomes free.
■ Caller ID and Call Log, Incoming provides the external calling party’s phone number, name,
day and time on the display when you does not answer the call. And allows you to see,
modify and call back the memorized ID number. Up to 15 calls can be memorized.
■ Call Log, Outgoing* redials by selecting one of the last CO calls you have made, according to
the number information on the display. Your KX-T7235 is capable of automatic storing
system.
■ Change Fee Reference allows you to see, print out and clear changes. Charges are displayed per
extension, CO line, account code of each can be referred to.
■ Doorphone and Door Opener ( — Option) enables the conversation between you and a
visitor at door. You can also unlock the door a few seconds without going to the door.
■ Executive Busy Override allows you to enter into an existing extension/CO line in conversation.
■ Full One-Touch Dialing allows you to have an easy access to a desired party or a system feature
by pressing just one button.
■ Hotel Application* allows the operator to handle the front/operator service such as check-in /
check-out, timed reminder (wake-up call).
■ Message Waiting allows you to leave a message for another extension. If the destination
extension is provided with a message waiting lamp, it will be lit. Even if a lamp is not
provided, the extension will provide a special ringing and dial tone (dial tone 4*) to indicate
that a message has been received.
■ Paralleled Telephone Connection allows you to connect your DPT in parallel with a SLT.
Each telephone can have the same extension number so that you can use either telephone. If
the eXtra Device Port (XDP) feature is available through System Programming, each
telephone can be connected to the same extension jack but have different extension numbers
so that they can act as completely different extensions.
■ System Feature Access Menu* allows you to access various features by an easy operation with
viewing the display.
■ Voice Mail Integration ( — Option) enables forwarding any incoming calls to the Voice Mail.
Recording or Playing back the message(s) are also available. For getting these Voice Mail
services, installing the Voice Processing System (VPS) is required.
5
Introduction
Expressions in the Descriptions
Feature Numbers
Feature number is an access code for various functions when programming or execution
features using proprietary telephones, single line telephones or ISDN telephones connected
to the system. You can access possible features by dialing the corresponding feature number
(and additional number, if required).
There are two types of feature numbers as follows:
• Flexible feature number
• Fixed feature number
While fixed feature numbers cannot be changed, flexible feature numbers can be changed.
Refer to the Installation Manual for details. In this manual, the default numbers are used to
describe each operation and illustration. Use newly programmed number if you have
changed the flexible feature number. The lists of the fixed numbers and default flexible
feature numbers are shown in the Appendix (Section 8).
If you use dial pulse (DP) type single line telephone (SLT);
It is not possible to have access to the features that have “ ” or “#” in their feature
numbers.
Illustration
The KX-T7235 is modeled for the illustration of operating instructions with the DPT use.
Tones
Various tone types, such as Confirmation tone, Dial tone, Call Waiting tone, etc, are
explained in the Appendix.
Display
The display examples are put in each operation step, if required. The display information list
is in the Appendix for your convenience.
Programming References
The related and required programming titles are noted for your reference.
System Programming should be done by the extension which is connected to the Jack
number 01 or System Manager. KX-T7230 and KX-T7235 can be used for this
programming. Station Programming is individual programming at your own proprietary
telephone (PT). You can customize the extension to your needs using any type of proprietary
telephone.
Feature References
The related feature titles are noted for your reference.
6
Section 1
DPT Overview
Contents
1.1
Configuration.......................................................................1-2
Location of Controls .............................................................1-3
Feature Buttons ....................................................................1-9
Initial Setting ......................................................................1-15
Indication Patterns .............................................................1-17
<Note>
All illustrations used in the initial setting are KX-T7235’s.
1.1
Configuration
Panasonic Digital Proprietary Telephones (DPT) are provided to utilize the various features
of the KX-TD816 and the KX-TD1232 systems, in addition to supporting basic telephone
service (making and receiving calls).
There are three models of DPT.
KX-T7230
KX-T7235
KX-T7250
16 charac./line,
2-line LCD,
3 Soft Buttons
Tilt-up,
24 charac./line,
6-line LCD,
3 Soft Buttons
none
Speakerphone
Yes
Yes
Monitor only
CO Buttons
24
12
6
Display
Fixed Feature
Buttons
1-2
DPT Overview
Refer to the “Fixed Buttons”
(1.1/Configuration) section.
1.1
Configuration
Location of Controls
■ KX-T7230 (display PT)
Display (Liquid Crystal Display)
with 16-character/2-line readout:
Shows the date, time, dialed number
or name, call duration time, etc. In
Programming mode, it shows the
Programming messages.
PROGRAM Button
Soft Buttons (S1 through S3)
PR
OG
.
A 1
A 3
A 8
A 1
3
A 5
A 6
A 1
1
A 1
6
A 2
1
A 1
2
A 1
7
A 2
2
INTERCOM Button
.
A 1
0
A 1
5
A 2
0
ALT
A 4
A 9
A 1
4
A 1
9
INT
SHIFT Button
A 2
A 7
A 1
8
A 2
3
A 2
4
CONF Button
FWD/DND Button
Flexible CO Buttons
(CO 01 through CO 24)
MESSAGE Button
PAUSE Button
HOLD Button
DPT Overview
1-3
1.1
Configuration
■ KX-T7230 (display PT)
(Back View)
— See diagram below.
PR
OG
.
A 1
A 2
A 7
A 3
A 8
A 1
3
A 2
4
2
3
5
7
6
8
0
A 1
8
A 2
3
4
A 1
2
A 1
7
A 2
2
A 6
A 1
1
A 1
6
A 2
1
1
.
A 5
A 1
0
A 1
5
A 2
0
INT
ALT
A 4
A 9
A 1
4
A 1
9
9
VOLUME Button
AUTO DIAL/STORE Button
REDIAL Button
AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button
FLASH Button
TRANSFER Button
SP-PHONE Button
Microphone
<Back View>
TO
EMSS
TO
TEL
Used for XDP* or parallel connections with a Single Line
Telephone, a Telephone Answering Machine, or a FAX.
Used to connect with the KX-TD816 and the KX-TD1232 System.
* XDP (eXtra Device Port) expands the number of telephones available in the system by allowing an extension
port to contain two telephones. Refer to the Installation Manual.
1-4
DPT Overview
1.1
Configuration
■ KX-T7235 (display PT)
Function Buttons
(F1 through F5)
Display (Liquid Crystal Display)
with 24-character/6-line readout:
Shows the date, time, dialed number
or name, call duration time, etc. In
Programming mode, it shows the
Programming messages.
PROGRAM
Button
.
G
O
PR
A
1
A
A
7
2
A
8
A
T
IN
3
A
AL
A
9
T.
4
A
A
10
5
INTERCOM Button
A
A
11
6
12
FWD/DND Button
A
CONF Button
Function Buttons
(F6 through F10)
SHIFT Button
MESSAGE Button
PAUSE Button
HOLD Button
Soft Buttons (S1 through S3)
Flexible CO Buttons
(CO 01 through CO 12)
DPT Overview
1-5
1.1
Configuration
■ KX-T7235 (display PT)
(Back View)
— See diagram below.
.
G
O
PR
A
1
A
A
7
2
8
A
T
A
IN
3
A
AL
A
9
T.
4
A
1
A
10
5
A
4
A
11
2
6
7
A
12
5
3
8
6
0
9
VOLUME Button
REDIAL Button
FLASH Button
AUTO DIAL/STORE Button
TRANSFER Button
AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button
Microphone
SP-PHONE Button
1-6
DPT Overview
1.1
Configuration
<Back View>
ZUR
ZENTRALE
ZUM
TELEFON
Used for XDP* or parallel connections with a Single Line
Telephone, a Telephone Answering Machine, or a FAX.
Used to connect with the KX-TD816 and the KX-TD1232 System.
* XDP (eXtra Device Port) expands the number of telephones available in the system by allowing an extension
port to contain two telephones. Refer to the Installation Manual.
To tilt-up or take down the display:
<Back View>
ZUR
ZENTRALE
ZUM
TELEFON
Press this button.
Raise or lower
DPT Overview
1-7
1.1
Configuration
■ KX-T7250
Memory Card
Pull out the card and write down the
names or phone numbers associated
with automatic dialing numbers.
Flexible CO Buttons
(CO 01 through CO 06)
INTERCOM Button
(Back View)
— See diagram below.
Nr
.
NA
ME
Nr.
1
A
NA
ME
2
A
T
IN
Nr.
NA
A
ME
3
4
A
1
2
T
A
S
6
T
U
A
L
F
U
R
G
O
R
P
3
.
8
FLASH Button
E
K
R
Ä
5
0
REDIAL Button
5
A
4
7
6
9
RINGER Volume Selector
Used to adjust the ringer
volume.
PROGRAM Button
TRANSFER Button
VOLUME Control Button
MONITOR Button
AUTO DIAL/STORE Button
HOLD Button
<Back View>
ZUR
ZENTRALE
ZUM
TELEFON
Used for XDP* or parallel connections with a Single Line
Telephone, a Telephone Answering Machine, or a FAX.
Used to connect with the KX-TD816 and the KX-TD1232 System.
* XDP (eXtra Device Port) expands the number of telephones available in the system by allowing an extension
port to contain two telephones. Refer to the Installation Manual.
1-8
DPT Overview
1.1
Configuration
Feature Buttons
DPTs have the following types of Feature Buttons:
• Fixed Buttons
• Flexible Buttons
Fixed Buttons
Fixed buttons have specific functions permanently assigned to them. These default function
assignments cannot be changed. The following table lists the fixed buttons located on each
DPT model.
Feature Buttons
T7230
T7235
AUTO ANSWER/MUTE
✔
✔
AUTO DIAL/STORE
✔
✔
CONF
✔
✔
FLASH
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Function
T7250
✔†
FWD/DND
✔
✔
HOLD
✔
✔
✔
INTERCOM
✔
✔
✔
MESSAGE
✔
✔
✔
MONITOR
PAUSE
✔
✔
PROGRAM
✔
✔
✔
REDIAL
✔
✔
✔
SHIFT
✔
✔
Soft
✔
✔
SP-PHONE
✔
✔
TRANSFER
✔
✔
✔
VOLUME
✔
✔
✔
In the list, “✔” indicates the button is located on each telephone.
†: The button is not provided with an LED (Light Emitting Diode).
DPT Overview
1-9
1.1
Configuration
Usage
AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button
Used for extension auto answer; it turns the microphone off during a conversation.
AUTO DIAL/STORE Button
Used for System Speed Dialing and for storing program changes.
CONF (Conference) Button
Used to establish a three-party conference.
FLASH Button
Sends an External Feature Access signal to the central office or to a host PBX to access the
services.
Function (F1 through F10) Button
Used to perform the corresponding displayed function or operation.
FWD/DND (Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb) Button
Used to program the Call Forwarding feature or set the Do Not Disturb (DND) feature.
HOLD Button
Used to place a call on hold.
INTERCOM Button
Used to make or receive extension calls.
MESSAGE Button
Used to call back the message sender.
MONITOR Button
Used for handsfree dialing operation.
PAUSE Button
Inserts a pause in speed dial numbers or in other numbers.
PROGRAM Button
Used to enter into Station Programming mode and to exit Station Programming mode.
REDIAL Button
Used for Last Number or Automatic Redialing.
1-10
DPT Overview
1.1
Configuration
SHIFT Button
Used to access the second level of Soft Button functions.
Soft (S1 through S3) Button
Used to perform the function or operation that appears on the bottom line of the display.
SP-PHONE (Speakerphone) Button
Used for handsfree speakerphone operation.
TRANSFER Button
Transfers a call to another extension or to an external destination.
VOLUME Control Button
Used to adjust the volume of the ringer and speaker; it also adjusts the display contrast.
Refer to “Initial Setting” (Section 1.1/Configuration).
DPT Overview
1-11
1.1
Configuration
Flexible Buttons
Flexible Buttons do not have specific features permanently assigned to them; features are
assigned to Flexible Buttons through System or Station Programming. “Flexible Button
Assignment” is addressed in Station Programming (Section 2). The three types of Flexible
Buttons are as follows:
• Flexible CO buttons (located on PT only)
• Flexible DSS buttons (located on DSS Console only)
• Programmable Feature (PF) (located on DSS Console only)
The following table outlines the features that can be assigned to the Flexible Buttons:
Feature (Buttons)
CO
DSS
PF
Single-CO (S-CO)
✔
—
—
Group-CO (G-CO)
✔
—
—
Loop-CO (L-CO)
✔
—
—
Alert
✔
—
—
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
✔
✔
—
Live Call Screening (LCS)†
✔
✔
—
LCS Cancel†
✔
✔
—
Message Waiting (MESSAGE)
✔
✔
—
Two-Way Record†
✔
✔
—
Two-Way Transfer†
✔
✔
—
Account
✔
✔
✔
Conference (CONF)
✔
✔
✔
FWD/DND
✔
✔
✔
One-Touch Dialing
✔
✔
✔
SAVE
✔
✔
✔
Terminate
✔
✔
✔
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer
✔
✔
✔
In the list, “✔” indicates that the feature can be assigned to the button.
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Proprietary
Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports proprietary
telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100).
1-12
DPT Overview
1.1
Configuration
Line Access Buttons
The following three types of CO button must be used to seize a CO line when making a call.
• Group-CO (G-CO) button
• Loop-CO (L-CO) button
• Single-CO (S-CO) button
Conditions
• A flexible CO button can be assigned as a Line Access Button (G-CO, L-CO or S-CO) in
either System/Station Programming. Once a flexible CO button is assigned as a Line
Access Button, it provides a line status condition in the form of a lighting pattern and color
indication. Please refer to “Indication Patterns” in this section and “LED Indication” in the
Appendix (Section 8).
• It is possible to have multiple appearances of the same G-CO or L-CO buttons on the same
telephone. Incoming and outgoing calls on the line are shown on the button in the
following priority.
S-CO > G-CO > L-CO
Group-CO (G-CO) button
To support efficient utilization of CO lines, a group of CO lines (CO line group) can be
assigned to a CO button. This button is referred to as Group-CO (G-CO) button. Any
incoming calls from any CO line in the CO line group arrive at the G-CO button. To make a
CO call, you can access an idle CO line in the group by simply pressing the assigned G-CO
button.
Conditions
• It is possible to assign the same line to an S-CO button, a G-CO button, and an L-CO
button.
• It is needed to program the extension for making and/or receiving calls on CO line groups.
• When your extension is assigned as an incoming call destination for a CO line, you cannot
receive any incoming CO calls unless a G-CO, L-CO or S-CO button associated with the
line is assigned.
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment — Group-CO (G-CO) Button
(System Programming — [005] (Installation Manual) can be used for this assignment.)
Feature References
Flexible Buttons (Section 1.1/Configuration)
Outward Dialing, Line Access — Line Access, CO Line Group
DPT Overview
1-13
1.1
Configuration
Loop-CO (L-CO) button
All CO lines can be assigned to a flexible CO button on a proprietary telephone. The
assigned button serves as an L-CO button. An incoming call on any CO line arrives at the LCO button, unless there are S-CO or G-CO buttons associated with the line or unless the
button is already in use. To make a CO call, you can simply press the assigned L-CO button.
Pressing the L-CO button offers the same operation as dialing the automatic line access
code.
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment — Loop-CO (L-CO) Button
(System Programming — [005] (Installation Manual) can be used for this assignment.)
Feature References
Flexible Buttons (Section 1.1/Configuration)
Outward Dialing, Line Access — Line Access, Automatic
Single-CO (S-CO) button
An S-CO button is a CO line access button. This allows you to access a specific line by
pressing an S-CO button. An incoming call can be directed to an S-CO button.
Conditions
• Only one S-CO button can be assigned to a CO line.
• It is possible to assign one CO line to an S-CO button, a G-CO button, and an L-CO
button.
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment — Single-CO (S-CO) Button
(System Programming — [005] (Installation Manual) can be used for this assignment.)
Feature References
Flexible Buttons (Section 1.1/Configuration)
Outward Dialing, Line Access — Line Access, Individual
1-14
DPT Overview
1.1
Configuration
Initial Setting
Display Contrast Adjustment (KX-T7230 and KX-T7235 only)
A Soft button and the VOLUME button are used to adjust the display contrast. The contrast
level is indicated on the display. You can adjust the volume level in the following conditions:
1.) When on-hook status.
2.) While having a CO/intercom call in progress.
1. Press the CONT (S1) button.
1
CONT
S1
S2
S3
2
2. Press the VOLUME (UP
• The display shows:
<Example>
/ DOWN
) button.
Contrast: 3
When using the headset
Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System supports the use of a headset on a proprietary
telephone (PT). When you use the headset (optional), you should switch the selection mode
first. Selection is also explained in the “Handset/Headset Selection” in Station Programming
(Section 2).
To change to the headset mode
Press: [PROGRAM] [9] [9] [8] [2] [STORE] [PROGRAM]
When changing the ringing tone of a CO button
There are eight ringer frequencies available for each CO (Group-CO, Loop-CO, Single-CO)
button. If you wish to change them, refer to “Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons” in
Station Programming (Section 2).
DPT Overview
1-15
1.1
Configuration
Volume Control — Ringer/Speaker
Allows you to adjust the following volumes as desired:
— Ringer volume (level 0 through 3)
— Speaker volume (level 1 through 12)
If your DPT is provided with the display (display DPT), the volume level is indicated on the
display. For ringer volume adjustment, three levels (OFF/LOW/HIGH) are available with the
KX-T7250.
To adjust the ringer volume
— KX-T7230 and KX-T7235
When the telephone is ringing;
1. Press the VOLUME (UP
• The display shows:
<Example>
1
Ringer: 3
Ring
S2
) button.
(— volume level 3)
When the telephone is idle and on-hook;
1. Press the Ring (S2) button.
• The telephone will ring.
1
S1
/ DOWN
S3
2
2. Press the VOLUME (UP / DOWN ) button.
• When the volume level is 0, the display shows ”RINGOFF.”
— KX-T7250
1. Slide the lever of the RINGER Volume Selector as desired
(OFF/LOW/HIGH).
: OFF
: LOW
: HIGH
1
To adjust the speaker volume
1. Press the SP-PHONE or MONITOR button.
1
or
2
2. Press the VOLUME (UP
• The display shows:
<Example>
SP: 12
/ DOWN
) button.
(— volume level 12)
• You may also adjust the speaker volume while listening to the
BGM (BGM On mode), receiving a voice call or receiving a page.
1-16
DPT Overview
1.1
Configuration
Indication Patterns
Line conditions are indicated by the lighting pattern and color of the indicators on the
buttons of your DPT or DSS console. Green lights indicate activity at your extension, while
red lights indicate activity at other extensions.
The patterns are shown below.
• On
A steadily lit indicator shows busy status. When the light is green, your extension is busy on
that line. When the light is red, another extension is busy on that line.
• Off
Light off indicates idle status.
• Slow Flash
(60 flash/min.)
• Moderate Flash
(120 flash/min.)
• Rapid Flash
(240 flash/min.)
1 sec.
DPT Overview
1-17
1-18
DPT Overview
Section 2
Station Programming
Contents
2.1
2.2
Programming Instructions ..................................................2-2
Programming (A - Z) ...........................................................2-6
<Note>
All illustrations used in these operating instructions are KX-T7235’s.
2.1
Programming Instructions
Station Programming allows you, the proprietary telephone (PT) user, to program certain
features from your telephone individually. To program, you need to switch your telephone to
the Station Programming mode. And during the programming mode, your telephone is put in
a busy condition to outside caller. If you want to make a normal call handling operation, you
should finish the programming mode.
Programming Mode Display
When you enter the Station Programming mode, the display shows the following message as
the initial programming mode;
PT-PGM Mode
And the display gives you the helpful or stored data information relating to your
programming steps. In this section, we note the display example at the programming steps if
required. You can also refer to “Display Examples” in the Appendix (Section 8).
To enter the Station Programming mode
1
PROGRAM
Be sure the telephone is idle and on-hook.
1. Press the PROGRAM button.
2
9
9
2. Dial 99.
• If 99 is not dialed within 5 seconds of pressing the PROGRAM
button, the Station Programming mode is cancelled.
• The display shows:
PT-PGM Mode
(— initial programming display)
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• If there is no operational entry for 1 minute, the Station
Programming mode is cancelled. Normal call handling resumes.
To exit the Station Programming mode
1
PROGRAM or
2-2
Station Programming
When the display shows the initial programming mode;
1. Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
• Programming is completed and normal call handling resumes.
• If you go off-hook while programming, the mode is cancelled and
normal call handling resumes.
2.1
Programming Instructions
To confirm the assigned function data
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1
access number
2
1. Enter the programming access number* (0 through 9, 01 through
03, 1 and #).
• Each number corresponds to the data as follows:
- 01 : Remote Station Lock Control (— Operator only)
- 1 : Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing
- 2 : Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming
- 3 : Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment
- 4 : Intercom Alerting Assignment
- 5 : Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment
- 6 : Self-Extension Number Confirmation
- 7 : Key Click Tone On/Off Assignment
- 8 : Handset/Headset Selection
- 9 : Charge Fee Reference
- 02 : Call Log Lock Control, Incoming (— Operator only)
- 03 : Live Call Screening Password Control† (— Operator only)
- # : Station Programming Data Default Set
- 1: Live Call Screening Mode Setting†
• The display shows the programmed data.
<Example>
When you press [5], the display shows:
C.W. Tone 1
(— Call Waiting tone is now programmed to Tone 1)
2. Press the HOLD (END) button.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
— If you wish to change the data, follow the programming procedure explained in this section.
* A programming access number is required to program/confirm the function data by Station Programming.
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
Station Programming
2-3
2.1
Programming Instructions
To confirm the assigned data on the Flexible button
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button.
• The display shows the current status.
1
2
2. Press the HOLD (END) button.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
— If you wish to change the data, follow the programming procedure explained in this section.
To clear the data on the Flexible button
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button that you wish to
clear.
1
2
2
2. Dial 2.
3
...
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
— The following list is the buttons and programming access numbers used for the Station Programming.
Detailed operating instructions are explained on each page in this section.
2-4
Station Programming
2.1
Programming Instructions
(Station Programming)
Station Programming Outline
PROGRAM
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
9
0
9
CO
DSS
PF
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Button
One-Touch Dialing Button
Massage Waiting (MESSAGE) Button
FWD/DND Button
SAVE Button
Account Button
Conference (CONF) Button
Log-In / Log-Out Button
Hurry-Up Button
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button
Two-Way Record Button†
Two-Way Transfer Button†
Live Call Screening (LCS) Button†
Live Call Screening (LCS) Cancel Button†
Alert Button
Terminate Button
Single-CO (S-CO) Button
Loop-CO (L-CO) Button
#
CO
CO
Function
†: Available when the Digital
Super Hybrid System is
connected to a Proprietary
Telephone capable
Panasonic Voice Processing
System (one that supports
proprietary telephone
integration; e.g. KXTVP100)
(F1 - F10)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
0
2
0
3
#
1
Group-CO (G-CO) Button
(Ringing Tone Selection for CO Button)
(Station Speed Dialing Number / Name Assignment)
(Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing)
(Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming)
(Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment)
(Intercom Alerting Assignment)
(Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment)
(Self-Extension Number Confirmation)
(Key Click Tone On / Off Assignment)
(Handset / Headset Selection)
(Charge Fee Reference)
(Remote Station Lock Control)
— see “Operator Service Features” (Section 4.3)
(Call Log Lock Control, Incoming)
— see “Operator Service Features” (Section 4.3)
(Live Call Screening Password Control)†
— see “Operator Service Features” (Section 4.3)
(Station Programming Data Default Set)
(Live Call Screening Mode Setting)†
PROGRAM (Exit)
Station Programming
2-5
2.2
Programming
Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment
Allows you to select the call waiting tone type (Tone 1 or Tone 2).
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Dial 5.
• The display shows the current tone type.
1
5
2
1
or
2
3
2. Dial 1 or 2.
- 1 : for selecting Call Waiting Tone 1
- 2 : for selecting Call Waiting Tone 2
...
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• The tone type patterns are described in the Appendix (Section 8).
• Default is “Tone 1” mode.
2-6
Station Programming
2.2
Programming
Charge Fee Reference
Allows you to see, print out and clear charges. Charges are displayed per extension, CO line,
account code, department code, or the total of each can be referred to. There are twelve
corresponding features as follows:
1.) Extension Charge Fee Reference
2.) Extension Charge Fee Meter Clear
3.) CO Line Charge Fee Reference
4.) Total Charge Fee Reference
5.) Account Code Charge Fee Reference
6.) Account Code Charge Fee Meter Clear
7.) New Rate Set
8.) All Clear
9.) Print the Charge
10.) Account Code Set
11.) Department Code Charge Fee Reference
12.) Department Code Charge Fee Meter Clear
Conditions
• System Programming determines the extension that can see charges.
• An identification code (ID code), set by System Programming, is required to see charges.
• The first display format – METER or CHARGE – is selected by System Programming. This
can be switched manually at each extension.
• The currency denomination is programmable by System Programming.
• If the amount exceeds the maximum displayable charge, then only the highest possible
charge will be displayed (e.g. 99999.99FR).
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[117] Charge Display Selection
[118] Charge Verification Assignment
[119] Charge Verification ID Code Set
[125] Assignment of Denomination
Station Programming
2-7
2.2
Programming
Extension Charge Fee Reference
Provides you with the display of each extension charge (telephone rate).
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Dial 9.
1
9
2. Enter the ID Code (4 digits).
• The display shows:
2
Charge Meter
ID Code
• To erase an incorrect entry, press the CLR (S2) button.
3
3. Dial 1.
1
4
extension number
4. Dial the extension number or press the NEXT (S3) button until the
extension number will be designated.
• The display shows the meter.
<Example> If you assign the extension number 201.
201: 00005
SEL
CLR
5
SEL
S1
S2
S3
6
or
NEXT
5. Press the SEL (S1) button.
• The display shows the charge.
<Example>
201: 00001.15FR
SEL
CLR
NEXT
• If you press the NEXT (S3) button, the extension number that is
assigned at the next jack number will be displayed to advance.
6. Press the PREV (
) button or END (
) button.
• PREV (
) — return to step 4.
• END (
) — return to the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• You must assign the ID code through System Programming.
2-8
Station Programming
2.2
Programming
Extension Charge Fee Meter Clear
Each extension charge (telephone rate) can be cleared.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Dial 9.
1
9
2. Enter the ID Code (4 digits).
• The display shows:
2
Charge Meter
ID Code
• To erase an incorrect entry, press the CLR (S2) button.
3
3. Dial 1.
1
4
extension number
4. Dial the extension number or press the NEXT (S3) button until the
extension number will be designated.
• The display shows the meter.
<Example> If you assign the extension number 2013.
2013 : 00005
SEL
CLR
NEXT
5
CLR
S1
S2
S3
5. Press the CLR (S2) button.
• The display of the meter disappears.
6
...
6. Press the STORE button.
• If you press the NEXT (S3) button, the extension number that is
assigned at the next jack number will be displayed to advance.
7
or
7. Press the PREV (
) button or END (
) button.
• PREV (
) — return to step 4.
• END (
) — return to the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• You must assign the ID code through System Programming.
Station Programming
2-9
2.2
Programming
CO Line Charge Fee Reference
Provides you with the display of each CO line charge (telephone rate).
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Dial 9.
1
9
2. Enter the ID Code (4 digits).
• The display shows:
2
Charge Meter
• To erase an incorrect entry, press the CLR (S2) button.
ID Code
3. Dial 2.
3
4. Dial the CO line number (01 through 08) or (01 through 24) or press
the NEXT (S3) button until the CO line number will be designated.
- 01 through 08 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 01 through 24 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
• The display shows the meter.
<Example> If you assign the CO line number 08.
2
4
CO line number
Al08:00005
SEL
5
SEL
S1
S2
S3
6
or
NEXT
5. Press the SEL (S1) button.
• The display shows the Charge.
<Example>
Al08:00001.15FR
SEL
NEXT
• If you press the NEXT (S3) button, the next CO line number will
be displayed to advance.
6. Press the PREV (
) button or END (
) button.
• PREV (
) — return to step 4.
• END (
) — return to the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• You must assign the ID code through System Programming.
2-10
Station Programming
2.2
Programming
Total Charge Fee Reference
Provides you with the display of the total charge (telephone rate).
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Dial 9.
1
9
2. Enter the ID Code (4 digits).
• The display shows:
2
Charge Meter
ID Code
• To erase an incorrect entry, press the CLR (S2) button.
3
3. Dial 3.
• The display shows the total meter.
<Example>
3
4
Sum :00450
SEL
SEL
S1
S2
5
or
S3
4. Press the SEL (S1) button.
• The display shows the total charge.
<Example>
Sum :00099.99FR
SEL
5. Press the PREV (
) button or END (
) button.
• PREV (
) — return to step 3.
• END (
) — return to the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• You must assign the ID code through System Programming.
Station Programming
2-11
2.2
Programming
Account Code Charge Fee Reference
Provides you with the display of each account code charge (telephone rate).
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Dial 9.
1
9
2. Enter the ID Code (4 digits).
• The display shows:
2
Charge Meter
ID Code
• To erase an incorrect entry, press the CLR (S2) button.
3
3. Dial 4.
4
4
account table number
4. Dial the account table number (01 through 40) or press the NEXT
(S3) button until the account table number will be designated.
• The display shows the meter.
<Example>
(— aaaaa: account code)
aaaaa:00005
SEL
CLR
NEXT
5
SEL
S1
S2
S3
6
or
5. Press the SEL (S1) button.
• The display shows the charge.
<Example>
aaaaa:00001.15FR (— aaaaa: account code)
SEL
CLR
NEXT
• If you press the NEXT (S3) button, the next account table number
will be displayed to advance.
6. Press the PREV (
) button or END (
) button.
• PREV (
) — return to step 4.
• END (
) — return to the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• You must assign the ID code through System Programming.
2-12
Station Programming
2.2
Programming
Account Code Charge Fee Meter Clear
Each account code charge (telephone rate) can be cleared.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Dial 9.
1
9
2. Enter the ID Code (4 digits).
• The display shows:
2
Charge Meter
ID Code
• To erase an incorrect entry, press the CLR (S2) button.
3
3. Dial 4.
4
4
account table number
4. Dial the account table number (01 through 40) or press the NEXT
(S3) button until the account table number will be designated.
• The display shows the meter.
<Example>
(— aaaaa: account code)
aaaaa: 00005
SEL
CLR
NEXT
5
CLR
S1
S2
S3
5. Press the CLR (S2) button.
• The display of the Meter disappears.
6
...
6. Press the STORE button.
• If you press the NEXT (S3) button, the next account table number
will be displayed to advance.
7
or
7. Press the PREV (
) button or END (
) button.
• PREV (
) — return to step 4.
• END (
) — return to the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• You must assign the ID code through System Programming.
Station Programming
2-13
2.2
Programming
New Rate Set
Allows you to assign how many CHARGE are equal to a unit of METER when calculating.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Dial 9.
1
9
2. Enter the ID Code (4 digits).
• The display shows:
2
Charge Meter
ID Code
3
5
• To erase an incorrect entry, press the CLR (S2) button.
3. Dial 5.
• The display shows;
Rate: 0.1
(— xx: will be blinking)
4
new rate
5
4. Enter the new rate with 2 digits.
• The display shows the new call rate.
<Example>
Rate: 0.2 5
...
5. Press the STORE button.
6
or
6. Press the PREV (
) button or END (
) button.
• PREV (
) — return to step 3.
• END (
) — return to the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• You must assign the ID code through System Programming.
2-14
Station Programming
2.2
Programming
All Clear
Allows you to clear all recorded charge and set the new starting time for recording.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Dial 9.
1
9
2. Enter the ID Code (4 digits).
• The display shows:
2
Charge Meter
• To erase an incorrect entry, press the CLR (S2) button.
ID Code
3
3. Dial 6.
• The display shows;
6
Meter Sum Clear? (— Sum: CO line, Total, Account code
CLR
NEXT and Department code Charge Fee)
4
NEXT
S1
S2
S3
or
Meter EXT Clear? (— Ext: Extension Charge Fee)
CLR
NEXT
CLR
S1
S2
5
...
4. Press the NEXT (S3) button or the CLR (S2) button.
— NEXT: displays the message of the extension meter clearing.
S3
— CLR: displays the last time of the specific information clearing.
5. Press the STORE button.
• Recorded charge will be all cleared and the present time will be
displayed.
<Example>
1 Jan, 16:50
6
or
6. Press the PREV (
) button or END (
) button.
• PREV (
) — return to step 4.
• END (
) — return to the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• You must assign the ID code through System Programming.
Station Programming
2-15
2.2
Programming
Print the Charge
Allows you to print the charge of total telephone charge (total CO charge, each account
code, each department code), total extensions charge or each extensions charge by SMDR.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Dial 9.
1
9
2. Enter the ID Code (4 digits).
• The display shows:
2
Charge Meter
ID Code
• To erase an incorrect entry, press the CLR (S2) button.
3
3. Dial 7.
7
4
1
2
or
or
3
5
4. Dial the number (1 through 3).
• Each number corresponds to the data as follows;
— 1: for printing total telephone charge (total CO charge, each
account code charge, each department code charge)
Total CHG Print
or
— 2: for printing all extension charge
EXT CHG Print
— 3 + the extension number: for printing each extension charge
1232: CHG Print
( xxxx: extension number)
5. Press the PREV (
) button or END (
) button.
• PREV (
) — return to step 4.
• END (
) — return to the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• You must assign the ID code through System Programming.
2-16
Station Programming
2.2
Programming
Account Code Set
Allows you to assign the account code.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Dial 9.
1
9
2. Enter the ID Code (4 digits).
• The display shows:
2
Charge Meter
ID Code
• To erase an incorrect entry, press the CLR (S2) button.
3
3. Dial 8.
8
4
account table number
5
4. Dial the account table number (01 through 40) or press the NEXT
(S3) button until the account table number will be designated.
• If the account code has not been assigned, the display shows “Not
Stored.”
5. Press the CLR (S2) button.
• The message of the display disappears.
CLR
S1
S2
6
S3
6. Dial the new account code.
• Enter the new account code with 5 digits.
(— xx: account table number)
NEXT (— aaaaa: account code number)
• To erase an incorrect entry, press the CLR (S2) button.
xx : aaaaa
CLR
account code
7
...
8
or
7. Press the STORE button.
• The display shows the new account code.
8. Press the PREV (
) button or END (
) button.
• PREV (
) — return to step 4.
• END (
) — return to the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• The Account Code of the account table number (01) is used for the Private call.
• Using this account code cannot print out the dialed telephone number by SMDR.
• You must assign the ID code through System Programming.
Station Programming
2-17
2.2
Programming
Department Code Charge Fee Reference
Provides you with the display of each department code charge (telephone rate).
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Dial 9.
1
9
2. Enter the ID Code (4 digits).
• The display shows:
2
Charge Meter
ID Code
• To erase an incorrect entry, press the CLR (S2) button.
3
3. Dial 9.
9
4
4. Dial the department code or press the NEXT (S3) button until the
department code will be designated.
• The display shows the meter.
<Example>
ddddd:00005
(— ddddd: department code)
SEL
CLR
NEXT
department code
5
SEL
S1
S2
S3
5. Press the SEL (S1) button.
• The display shows the charge.
<Example>
ddddd:00001.15FR (— ddddd: department code)
SEL
CLR
NEXT
6
or
• If you press the NEXT (S3) button, the next department code will
be displayed to advance.
6. Press the PREV (
) button or END (
) button.
• PREV (
) — return to step 4.
• END (
) — return to the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• You must assign the department code and ID code through System Programming.
2-18
Station Programming
2.2
Programming
Department Code Charge Fee Meter Clear
Each department code charge (telephone rate) can be cleared.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Dial 9.
1
9
2. Enter the ID Code (4 digits).
• The display shows:
2
Charge Meter
ID Code
• To erase an incorrect entry, press the CLR (S2) button.
3
3. Dial 9.
9
4
4. Dial the department code or press the NEXT (S3) button until the
department code will be designated.
• The display shows the meter.
<Example>
department code
(— ddddd: department code)
ddddd: 00005
SEL
CLR
NEXT
5
CLR
S1
S2
6
...
7
or
S3
5. Press the CLR (S2) button.
• The display of the Meter disappears.
6. Press the STORE button.
• If you press the NEXT (S3) button, the next department code will
be displayed to advance.
7. Press the PREV (
) button or END (
) button.
• PREV (
) — return to step 4.
• END (
) — return to the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• You must assign the department code and ID code through System Programming.
Station Programming
2-19
2.2
Programming
Flexible Button Assignment
Each Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button on your telephone and on the console can be assigned as
various feature buttons such as an Account Button, DSS Button, or FWD/DND Button, etc..
The features assignable are limited by the button type. Please refer to “Flexible Buttons” in
Section 1.1, “Feature Buttons.” “Flexible CO Button Assignment” in System Programming
(program address [005]) can be used for this assignment.
Account Button (Assignment)
Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button as an Account button.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1
1. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button which you wish to
assign as the Account button.
2
2. Dial 6.
• The display shows:
6
Account
3
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
...
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Alert Button (Assignment)
Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO) button as an Alert button.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1
1. Press the desired Flexible (CO) button which you wish to assign as
an Alert button.
2
2. Dial 87.
7
8
3
...
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
2-20
Station Programming
2.2
Programming
Conference (CONF) Button (Assignment)
Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button as a Conference (CONF) button.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1
1. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button which you wish to
assign as the Conference button.
2
2. Dial 7.
• The display shows:
7
Conference
3
...
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Station Programming
2-21
2.2
Programming
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Button (Assignment)
Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS) button as a DSS button.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1
1. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS) button which you wish to
assign as the DSS button.
2
2. Dial 1.
• The display shows:
1
EXT-NO?→
CLR
3
3. Dial the extension number.
• The display shows:
extension number
EXT–xxxx
CLR
(xxxx: extension number)
• To erase an incorrect, press the CLR (S2) button or the
TRANSFER (CLEAR) button.
4
...
(The TRANSFER (
) button becomes the CLEAR button when using the
overlay.)
4. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• DSS buttons are provided on the DSS Console or the proprietary telephone (PT) with a
default setting. You can change the setting from a paired telephone.
• You cannot enter non-existent extension numbers.
2-22
Station Programming
2.2
Programming
FWD/DND Button (Assignment)
Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button as the FWD/DND button.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1
1. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button which you wish to
assign as the FWD/DND button.
2
2. Dial 4.
• The display shows:
4
FWD/DND
3
...
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Group-CO (G-CO) Button (Assignment)
Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO) button as a Group-CO button.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1
1. Press the Flexible (CO) button which you wish to assign as a G-CO
button.
2
2. Dial #.
• The display shows:
TRK GRP-1
CLR
3
3. Enter the CO line group number (1 through 8).
• To erase an incorrect entry, press the CLR (S2) button or the
TRANSFER (CLEAR) button.
CO line group number
(The TRANSFER (
) button becomes the CLEAR button when using the
overlay.)
4
...
4. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Station Programming
2-23
2.2
Programming
Hurry-Up Button (Assignment)
Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO) button as the Hurry-Up button.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1
1. Press the Flexible (CO) button which you wish to assign as the
Hurry-Up button.
2
2. Dial 81.
• The display shows:
1
8
3
Hurry up toCLR
3. Enter the extension number (2 digits through 4 digits).
• The display shows:
extension number
4
Hurry up to-xxxx
(— xxxx: extension number)
4. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
...
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• You cannot enter a non-existent extension numbers.
• Hurry-Up button can be used only by the operator.
Live Call Screening (LCS) Button (Assignment)†
Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS) button as a Live Call Screening button.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1
1. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS) button which you wish to
assign as a Live Call Screening button.
2
2. Dial 85.
• The display shows:
5
8
LCS
3
...
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
2-24
Station Programming
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
2.2
Programming
Live Call Screening (LCS) Cancel Button (Assignment)†
Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS) button as a Live Call Screening Cancel button.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS) button which you wish to
assign as a Live Call Screening Cancel button.
1
2
6
8
2. Dial 86.
• The display shows:
LCS Cancel
3
...
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Log-In / Log-Out Button (Assignment)
Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO) button as the Log-In / Log-Out button.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Press the Flexible (CO) button which you wish to assign as the LogIn / Log-Out button.
1
2
0
8
3
2. Dial 80.
• The display shows:
Login/Logout
...
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
Station Programming
2-25
2.2
Programming
Loop-CO (L-CO) Button (Assignment)
Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO) button as a Loop-CO button.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Press the Flexible (CO) button which you wish to assign as the
L-CO button.
1
2
2. Dial .
• The display shows:
3
Loop-CO
...
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Message Waiting (MESSAGE) Button (Assignment)
Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS) button as the Message Waiting (MESSAGE)
button.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS) button which you wish to
assign as the Message Waiting button.
1
2
3
3
2. Dial 3.
• The display shows:
Message Waiting
...
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
2-26
Station Programming
2.2
Programming
One-Touch Dialing Button (Assignment)
Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button as a One-Touch Dialing button.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1
1. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button which you wish to
assign as a One-Touch Dialing button.
2
2. Dial 2.
• The display shows:
2
CLR
3
desired number
4
3. Enter the desired number (an extension number or a phone number,
etc.).
• Up to 16 digits can be stored.
• To erase an incorrect entry, press the CLR (S2) button or the
TRANSFER (CLEAR) button.
(The TRANSFER (
...
) button becomes the CLEAR button when using the
overlay.)
4. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• The number can be an extension number, a telephone number, or a feature number. Up to
sixteen digits can be stored on a One-Touch Dialing button.
• To store the telephone number of an outside party, the line access code (0, or 81 through 88)
must be stored as the leading digit.
• You can store a number consisting of seventeen digits or more by dividing it and assigning it
in two One-Touch Dialing buttons. In this case, the line access code should not be stored on
the second button.
• You can use 0 through 9, , #, PAUSE ( ), FLASH ( ), CONF ( ) and INTERCOM
(INT) for storing:
#: change the dialing mode (Pulse to Tone)
FLASH ( ): Flash
PAUSE ( ): pause
CONF ( ): — (hyphen)
INTERCOM (INT): for secret dialing
Station Programming
2-27
2.2
Programming
Save Button (Assignment)
Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button as the SAVE button.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1
1. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button which you wish to
assign as the SAVE button.
2
2. Dial 5.
• The display shows:
5
Save
3
...
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Single-CO (S-CO) Button (Assignment)
Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO) button as a Single-CO button.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Press the Flexible (CO) button which you wish to assign as an S-CO
button.
2. Dial 0.
• The display shows:
1
2
0
CO—
CLR
3
CO line number
3. Enter the CO line number (01 through 08) or (01 through 24).
- 01 through 08: if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 01 through 24: if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
• The display shows:
(— xx: CO line number)
CO—xx
CLR
4
...
• To erase an incorrect entry, press the CLR (S2) button or the
TRANSFER (CLEAR) button.
(The TRANSFER (
) button becomes the CLEAR button when using the
overlay.)
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
2-28
Station Programming
2.2
Programming
Conditions
• You cannot assign the same CO line to more than one S-CO button on a proprietary
telephone.
• You can assign a CO line to a S-CO and a G-CO button.
Terminate Button (Assignment)
Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button as the Terminate button.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button which you wish to
assign as the Terminate button.
1
2
9
3
2. Dial 9.
• The display shows:
Terminate
...
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Station Programming
2-29
2.2
Programming
Two-Way Record Button (Assignment)†
Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS) button as a Two-Way Record button.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1
1. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS) button which you wish to
assign as a Two-Way Record button.
2
2. Dial 83.
• The display shows:
8
3
3
2 WAY-REC:
CLR
3. Enter the extension number of the Voice Mail.
• The display shows:
VM extension number
2 WAY-REC:xxxx
CLR
(— xxxx: VM extension number)
• To erase the entry, press the CLR (S2) button or the TRANSFER
(CLEAR) button.
4
...
(The TRANSFER (
) button becomes the CLEAR button when using the
overlay.)
4. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• You cannot enter a non-existent extension or a floating number.*
• The voice mail extension number is acceptable, if the number is assigned in program [126].
* Floating Number (FN) is a virtual extension number for resources to make it appear to be an extension.
Refer to the Installation Manual.
2-30
Station Programming
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
2.2
Programming
Two-Way Transfer Button (Assignment)†
Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS) button as a Two-Way Transfer button.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1
1. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS) button which you wish to
assign as the Two-Way Transfer button.
2
2. Dial 84.
• The display shows:
4
8
3
2 WAY-TRANS:
CLR
3. Enter the extension number of the Voice Mail.
• The display shows:
VM extension number
2 WAY-TRANS:xxxx
CLR
(— xxxx: VM extension number)
• To erase the entry, press the CLR (S2) button or the TRANSFER
(CLEAR) button.
4
...
(The TRANSFER (
) button becomes the CLEAR button when using the
overlay.)
4. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• You cannot enter a non-existent extension or a floating number.*
• The voice mail extension number is acceptable, if the number is assigned in program [126].
* Floating Number (FN) is a virtual extension number for resources to make it appear to be an extension.
Refer to the Installation Manual.
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
Station Programming
2-31
2.2
Programming
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button (Assignment)†
Allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button as the VM Transfer button.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1
1. Press the desired Flexible (CO, DSS, PF) button which you wish to
assign as the VM Transfer button.
2
2. Dial 82.
• The display shows:
2
8
VTRCLR
3
3. Dial the extension number of the Voice Mail.
• The display shows:
VM extension number
VTR-xxxx
CLR
(— xxxx: extension number)
• To erase an incorrect entry, press the CLR (S2) button or the
TRANSFER (CLEAR) button.
4
...
(The TRANSFER (
) button becomes the CLEAR button when using the
overlay.)
4. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• You cannot enter a non-existent extension numbers and the floating number.*
• Through System Programming, “VM command DTMF set” and “Station Hunting Type”
must be programmed to match the operation of your Voice Processing System.
* Floating Number (FN) is a virtual extension number for resources to make it appear to be an extension.
Refer to the Installation Manual.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[106] Station Hunting Type
[114] VM Command DTMF Set
2-32
Station Programming
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
2.2
Programming
Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment
Allows you to enable or disable the “Full One-Touch Dialing” function. “Handsfree
Operation” mode is activated by pressing a One-Touch Dialing button, a DSS button, a
REDIAL button or a SAVE button.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Dial 3.
• The STORE indicator light turns off.
• The display shows the current status.
<Example>
1
3
2
or
1
Hands-free:Off
2
(— When disabled)
2. Dial 1 or 2.
- 1 : for selecting the off mode
- 2 : for selecting the on mode
3
...
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• Default is “On” mode.
Handset / Headset Selection
Allows you to select the handset mode or headset mode.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Dial 8.
• The display shows the current status.
1
8
2
or
1
2
2. Dial 1 or 2.
- 1 : for selecting Handset mode
- 2 : for selecting Headset mode
3
...
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• Default is “Handset” mode.
Station Programming
2-33
2.2
Programming
Intercom Alerting Assignment
Allows you to select the alerting mode (tone / voice) when receiving an intercom (extension)
call.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Dial 4.
• The display shows the current status.
1
4
Tone Call
2
or
1
(— When Voice-Calling mode is
selected)
2
Voice Call
3
...
(— When Ring-Calling (Tone Call)
mode is selected)
2. Dial 1 or 2.
- 1 : for selecting Ring-Calling (Tone Call) mode
- 2 : for selecting Voice-Calling mode
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• Default is “Ring-Calling (Tone Call)” mode.
2-34
Station Programming
2.2
Programming
Key Click Tone On / Off Assignment (for KX-T7230 and KX-T7235 only)
Allows you to select the condition (On/Off) of the key click tone when operating any keys.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Dial 7.
• The STORE indicator light turns off.
• The display shows the current status.
1
7
2
Click Tone on
or
1
2
2. Dial 1 or 2.
- 1 : for selecting key click tone OFF mode.
- 2 : for selecting key click tone ON mode.
3
...
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• Default is “Key Click Tone On” mode.
Live Call Screening Mode Setting†
Assign whether an alert tone is sent (Private mode) or the recording message is monitored
through the built-in speaker (Hands-free mode), while incoming callers are leaving a message.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Dial 1.
• The display shows the current status.
1
1
2
or
1
2
2. Dial 1 or 2.
- 1 : for selecting Hands-free mode
- 2 : for selecting Private mode
3
...
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• Default is “Hands-free” mode.
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
Station Programming
2-35
2.2
Programming
Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming
Allows you to select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following three line
preferences:
1.) No Line Preference
2.) Ringing Line Preference (— default)
3.) Prime Line (CO Line) Preference
Follow the appropriate programming procedure for your selection.
No Line Preference — Incoming (Assignment)
No line is selected when you go off-hook. You must select a line to answer.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1
2
2
1
1. Dial 2.
• The display shows the current status.
2. Dial 1.
• The display shows:
Pref. In: No
3
...
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Ringing Line Preference — Incoming (Assignment)
When you go off-hook, you answer any call ringing at your telephone.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1
2
2
2
1. Dial 2.
• The display shows the current status.
2. Dial 2.
• The display shows:
Pref. In: Ring
3
...
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
2-36
Station Programming
2.2
Programming
Prime Line (CO Line) Preference — Incoming (Assignment)
When you go off-hook, you answer a call on the line which is assigned as the prime line.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1
2
2
3
1. Dial 2.
• The display shows the current status.
2. Dial 3.
3
CO line number
3. Dial the CO line number (01 through 08) or (01 through 24).
- 01 through 08 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 01 through 24 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
• The display shows:
Pref. In: CO-xx
4
...
(— CO line number xx is selected)
4. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Station Programming
2-37
2.2
Programming
Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing
Allows you to select the desired outgoing line preference to originate calls from the following
four line preferences:
1.) No Line Preference
2.) Idle Line Preference
3.) Prime Line (CO line) Preference
4.) Prime Line (INTERCOM) Preference (— default)
Follow the programming procedure for your selection.
<Note>
When setting “Idle Line Preference,” “No Line Preference” or “Prime Line (CO Line)
Preference,” it is not possible to have access to any DPT features after going off-hook. To
access these DPT features, press the INTERCOM button after going off-hook or press the
INTERCOM button before going off-hook.
No Line Preference — Outgoing (Assignment)
When you go off-hook, you are not connected to any line. You must make a choice.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1
1
2
1
1. Dial 1.
• The display shows the current status.
2. Dial 1.
• The display shows:
Pref. Out: No
3
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
...
Idle Line Preference — Outgoing (Assignment)
When you go off-hook, you are connected to an idle line.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1
1
2
2
2-38
Station Programming
1. Dial 1.
• The display shows the current status.
2. Dial 2.
• The display shows:
Pref. Out: Idle
2.2
Programming
3
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
...
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Prime Line (CO Line) Preference — Outgoing (Assignment)
When you go off-hook, you are connected to the pre-assigned line.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Dial 1.
• The display shows the current status.
1
1
2 Dial 3.
2
3
3. Dial the CO line number (01 through 08) or (01 through 24).
- 01 through 08 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 01 through 24 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
• The display shows:
3
CO line number
4
...
Pref. Out: CO-01 (— xx: CO line number xx is
selected)
4. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Prime Line (INTERCOM) Preference — Outgoing (Assignment)
When you go off-hook, you are connected to the INTERCOM line.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1
1
2
INTERCOM
1. Dial 1.
• The display shows the current status.
2. Press the INTERCOM button.
• The display shows:
Pref. Out: ICM
3
...
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Station Programming
2-39
2.2
Programming
Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons
Allows you to assign a ringer frequency to each CO button.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Press the CO button which you wish to change the ringing tone.
1
CO
2
CO
2. Press the same CO button again.
• The display shows the current status.
3
3. Enter the tone type number (1 through 8).
• The display shows the selected tone type number and you hear the
selected tone until the STORE button is pressed.
tone type number
Tone Type-x
(— x: tone type number)
4
...
• If you want to change the tone type, enter another tone type
number in succession.
4. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Conditions
• Default is Ringing Tone Type 2.
2-40
Station Programming
2.2
Programming
Self-Extension Number Confirmation (KX-T7230 and 7235 only)
Allows you to display your jack and extension number on the display.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1
6
2
1. Dial 6.
• The display shows your jack and extension number.
<Example>
Jack01<=>EXT1234
2. Press the HOLD (END) button.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Station Programming Data Default Set
Allows you to return each of the following programmable items to their default settings.
a) Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment (default: Tone 1)
b) Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment (default: On)
c) Handset/Headset Selection (default: Handset)
d) Intercom Alerting Assignment (default: Ring-Calling)
e) Key Click Tone Assignment (default: Key Click Tone On)
f) Preferred Line Preference — Incoming (default: Ringing Line)
g) Preferred Line Preference — Outgoing (default: INTERCOM Line)
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Dial #.
• The display shows:
1
Clear Ready?
2
...
2. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Station Programming
2-41
2.2
Programming
Station Speed Dialing Number / Name Assignment (KX-T7235 only)
Allows you to assign frequently dialed numbers and names to each Function button of your
telephone.
To store a number
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1
F1
F6
F2
F7
F3
F8
F4
F5
F9
PT-PGM Mode
F10
1. Press the Function button (F1 through F10).
• The STORE indicator light turns off.
• The display shows the current status.
<Example>
0-431-2111
SEL
CLR
(— CO call, 431-2111, is now
programmed)
NEXT
2
2. Enter the desired number (up to sixteen digits).
• 0 through 9, , #, , , INT ( “[” or “]”: secret), and
(–: hyphen) can be used.
• To erase the entry, press the CLR (S2) button.
• To store a name, press the NEXT (S3) button and go to step 3 of
“To store a name” described next.
desired number
3
...
3. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
To store a name
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1
F1
F6
F2
F7
F3
F8
F4
F5
F9
PT-PGM Mode
F10
2
NEXT
S1
2-42
S2
S3
Station Programming
1. Press the Function button (F1 through F10).
• The STORE indicator light turns off.
• The display shows the current status.
2. Press the NEXT (S3) button.
• The display shows the current status.
<Example>
Bob Graham
CLR
(— Name is now programmed)
NEXT
2.2
Programming
3. Enter the name.
• Refer to the Combination Table down below for information on
how to enter each character.
3
name
4. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
4
...
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Combination Table
Each character can be entered by using the dial key pad and some buttons for storing names.
Each dial key pad has seven characters assigned.
The table down below shows the combination of the keys and the number of times to press the
SELECT (AUTO ANSWER/MUTE) button, or the combination of the key and the SHIFT and
Soft buttons to make each character. (The AUTO ANSWER/MUTE button becomes the SELECT button
when using the overlay.)
To enter a character, find the key and number of times to press the SELECT button or the
corresponding SHIFT and Soft button combination from the table. Press the corresponding key
first, then press the SELECT button the required number of times. Or you can use the SHIFT
button and the Soft button (S1 through S3) instead of the SELECT button.
Combination Table
SHIFT & Soft
Combination
S1
SHIFT+ S1
S2
SHIFT+ S2
S3
SHIFT+ S3
1
Q
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
2
q
a
d
g
j
m
p
t
w
.
/
%
3
Z
B
E
H
K
N
R
U
X
,
ö
&
4
z
b
e
h
k
n
r
u
x
’
+
=
5
!
C
F
I
L
O
S
V
Y
:
ü
(
6
?
c
f
i
l
o
s
v
y
Pressing
SELECT
(Times)
keys
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
ä
$
;
–
)
Station Programming
2-43
2.2
Programming
<Example>
— To enter “Mike” by using the SELECT button;
1. Press 6 and then press the SELECT button once to enter “M.”
2. Press 4 and then press the SELECT button six times to enter “i.”
3. Press 5 and then press the SELECT button four times to enter “k.”
4. Press 3 and then press the SELECT button four times to enter “e.”
— To enter “Mike” by using the SHIFT button and the Soft button;
1. Press 6 and then press the S1 button to enter “M.”
2. Press 4 and then press the SHIFT and S3 button to enter “i.”
3. Press 5 and then press the S2 button to enter “k.”
4. Press 3 and then press the S2 button to enter “e.”
• Pressing the SHIFT button alternates between capital and small letters. Once this button
is pressed, the SHIFT mode lasts until it is pressed again.
• To erase the last word (to backspace), press the CONF (
) button.
(The CONF (
) button becomes the “←” (backspace) key when using the overlay.)
• To erase all data, press the CLR (S2) button.
Conditions
• Default is “Not Stored.”
• Up to ten dialing numbers and names can be assigned. Each dialing number has a
maximum of sixteen digits and each name has a maximum of ten characters.
2-44
Station Programming
Section 3
User Programming
(Manager Programming)
Contents
3.1
3.2
General Programming Instructions....................................3-2
3.1.1 Using the Proprietary Telephone ............................3-3
3.1.2 Programming Ways .................................................3-5
User Programming (Manager Programming) ...................3-7
3.1
General Programming Instructions
User Programming (Manager Programming) allows you, the proprietary telephone (PT) user,
to program the following features of the system from your telephone individually.
• Date and Time Set
• System Speed Dialing Number Set
• System Speed Dialing Name Set
• Extension Number Set
• Extension Name Set
• Flexible CO Button Assignment
• Operator / Manager Extension Assignment – Day / Night
• DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment
• Absent Messages
• Emergency Dial Number Set
• Budget Management
• Charge Margin and Tax Rate
• ISDN Extension Number Set
• ISDN Extension Name Set
• Budget Management on ISDN Port
To program, you need to switch your telephone to the User Programming mode. During the
programming mode, your telephone is put in a busy condition to outside caller. If you want to
make a normal call handling operation, you should finish the programming mode.
Default Setting
This system has a default factory setting. Any required changes can be written on
“Programming Tables.”
Required Telephone Set
One of the following telephone sets is required for User Programming (Manager
Programming):
• Proprietary Telephone (PT): KX-T7235, KX-T7230
Soft Buttons and SHIFT Button on the Display PT
Three soft buttons are provided just below the display on the display Proprietary Telephones
(PT). The functions of these soft buttons vary as the programming procedures advance from
step to step. Those functions that are currently assigned to the buttons are shown on the lower
line of the display. If the SHIFT button indicator is on, two functions are available with each
soft button. To alternate between the two functions, press the SHIFT button on the right side
of the display.
3-2
User Programming (Manager Programming)
3.1.1
Using the Proprietary Telephone
Using the Overlay
A programming overlay is packed with the main unit at the factory.
This overlay should be used at all times while in programming mode since the functions of the
telephone keys change while in programming mode.
Location of Controls with the Overlay
The pictures below show the functions of the buttons of the KX-T7235 and KX-T7230 while
in programming mode.
SECRET
1QZ!?
PAUSE
2ABC
3DEF
END
UP
SECRET
PAUSE
1QZ!?
2ABC
3DEF
2
3
6MNO
1
2
3
1
4GHI
5JKL
6MNO
4GHI
5JKL
4
5
6
7PRS
8TUV
9WXY
4
5
6
7PRS
8TUV
9WXY
7
8
9
ä /ö + ü –
0.,’:;
# $ % &= ( )
DOWN
STORE
SELECT
FLASH
KX-T7230
CLEAR
NEXT
UP
DOWN
STORE
7
8
9
ä/ö+ü–
0.,’:;
#$%&=( )
SELECT
CLEAR
NEXT
0
0
PREV
END
PREV
FLASH
KX-T7235
User Programming (Manager Programming)
3-3
3.1.1
Using the Proprietary Telephone
Before entering the programming mode
Before entering programming mode, confirm that:
• Your telephone is on-hook.
• No calls are on hold at your telephone.
Entering the programming mode
To enter the User Programming (Manager Programming) mode:
Press PROGRAM + 0 + 0 .
• The display shows the Initial Message: MNG-PGM NO?->
Notes:
• If nothing is entered in five seconds after the PROGRAM button is pressed, it is cancelled.
• During the programming mode, your extension is treated as a busy extension.
• Only one proprietary telephone can be in programming mode at any one time.
3-4
User Programming (Manager Programming)
3.1.2
Programming Ways
Advancing to the next stage
When “MNG-PGM NO?->” is displayed, you can select one of the following:
• To go to program [000], press the NEXT button.
• To go to another program, enter the 3-digit program address.
Rotation of jack number
Each jack of our Digital Super Hybrid System supports the connection of a proprietary
telephone and an analog device with different extension numbers (eXtra Device Port: XDP
function).
To program this function it is necessary to assign two parts for each jack. The first part of jack
one is 01-1. The second part of jack one is 01-2. The first part of jack two is 02-1 and so on.
The NEXT and PREV buttons can be used to move from jack to jack as required.
Example;
NEXT
#01-1
NEXT
#01-2
PREV
NEXT
#02-1
PREV
#02-2......
PREV
Note:
The first part of a jack is for a PT of a XDP-assigned jack. The second part is for a single line
device. Program [600] “EXtra Device Port” assigns which jacks are XDP.
Entering Characters
You can enter characters to store names for speed dial numbers, extension numbers, etc., by
using the dialing key pad and the buttons.
Each of twelve dialing keys on the dialing key pad has seven characters assigned. Refer to the
“Station Speed Dialing Number / Name Assignment (KX-T7235 only)” section in Section 2.2
Programming.
Storing your data
Press STORE to store your data.
• The STORE indicator lights red and confirmation tone sounds.
* Confirmation tone (one beep)
After pressing STORE, you will hear a beep. This informs you that your storage is
completed.
*Alarm tone (three beeps)
If you hear the alarm, check that your entry is valid.
Making another selection within the same program address
• To make the next higher selection, press NEXT.
• To make the previous selection, press PREV.
• To make a specific selection, press SELECT and then enter the number.
User Programming (Manager Programming)
3-5
3.1.2
Programming Ways
Going to another program address
After pressing STORE, you can go to another program with either of the following two
methods:
(1) • To go to the next larger program address:
Press Soft 1 (SKP+) or VOLUME
(DOWN).
• To go to the next smaller program address:
Press SHIFT + Soft 1 (SKP-) or VOLUME
(UP).
(2) To go to a specific program address:
Press END, then enter the program address.
Going back to the operation mode
Two ways are available to go back to the operation mode:
(1) Lift the handset while in programming mode.
(2) When the Initial Message: MNG-PRG NO?-> is displayed, press the PROGRAM
button.
(To display the Initial Message, press END.)
3-6
User Programming (Manager Programming)
3.2
User Programming (Manager Programming)
Date and Time Set
000
NOTICE
It is assumed that you have read Section 3.1 “General Programming Instructions.” The use of the soft buttons
is discussed in the section, therefore we will not make any reference to them in the following instructions. At
any time the soft buttons can be used in place of the overlay keys.
Description
Sets the current data and time.
Selection
•
•
•
•
•
•
Default
1 Jan ’94 SAT 00:00
Programming
1.
Day: 1 through 31
Month: Jan through Dec.
Year: 00 through 99
Day of the week: SUN / MON / TUE / WED / THU / FRI / SAT
Hour: 00 through 23
Minute: 00 through 59
Enter 000.
Display: Day/Time Set
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: 1 Jan '94 SAT
3.
Enter the day.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new day.
4.
Press →.
5.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired month is displayed.
6.
Press →.
7.
Enter the year.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new year.
8.
Press →.
9.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired day of the week is displayed.
10.
Press STORE.
11.
Press NEXT.
Display example: 00:00
User Programming (Manager Programming)
3-7
000
3.2
User Programming (Manager Programming)
Date and Time Set (contd.)
12.
Enter the hour.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new hour.
13.
Press →.
14.
Enter the minute.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new minutes.
15.
Press STORE.
16.
Press END.
Conditions
• After changing an entry, you can press STORE. You do not have to perform
all of the rest of the steps.
• To go back to the previous field, press ← at steps 4 through 9 and steps 13
through 14.
• If you hear the alarm after pressing STORE, check that the date is valid.
• The clock starts immediately after the STORE button is pressed.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
• The time is adjusted automatically, if the first outgoing call is made after
three o’clock each morning.
Feature References
Installation Manual, Section 3, Features,
Display, Time and Date
3-8
User Programming (Manager Programming)
3.2
User Programming (Manager Programming)
System Speed Dialing Number Set
001
Description
Used to program the System Speed Dial numbers. These numbers are
available to all extension users. The stored numbers are also applied to Caller
ID and Call Log, Incoming Features.
Selection
• Speed dial number: 000 through 499
• Telephone number: 24 digits (max.)
Default
All speed dial numbers – Not stored
Programming
1.
Enter 001.
Display: SPD Number Set
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: SPD Code?->
3.
Enter a speed dial number.
To enter speed dial number 000, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 000: Not Stored
4.
Enter a telephone number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
Conditions
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another speed dial number, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired speed dial number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
• There is a maximum of 500 speed dial numbers. Each speed dial number
has a maximum of 24 digits. The valid characters are 0 through 9, , and
# keys, SECRET and – (hyphen) buttons.
– To store a hyphen, press the “–” button.
– To prevent the display of all or part of the number, press SECRET
before and after confidential parts of the number. The SECRET
button must always be entered in a pair. Or your entry is not stored.
(Refer to the Installation Manual, Section 3 “Secret Dialing.”)
User Programming (Manager Programming)
3-9
001
3.2
User Programming (Manager Programming)
System Speed Dialing Number Set (contd.)
• If you are storing an external number, include the line access code
(default=0, 81 through 88) before the number. For Caller ID and Call Log,
Incoming feature; When – (hyphen) precedes a phone number, the Caller ID
check starts on the phone number. Example: 0 - 12345678
• If you are storing an account code, enter the account code before the line
access code. Example: 49 12345#0 - 12345678
(Refer to the Installation Manual, Section 3 “Account Code Entry.”)
• It is possible to store a number consisting of 25 digits or more by storing it
in two speed dial numbers. A line access code should not be stored in the
second speed dial number.
• To display parts of the number which have scrolled off the display, press →
or ←.
• Program [002] “System Speed Dialing Name Set” is used to give names to
speed dial numbers.
Feature References
3-10
Installation Manual, Section 3, Features,
Call Log, Incoming
Caller ID
Special Features for KX-T7235 — System Speed Dialing
System Speed Dialing
Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing
User Programming (Manager Programming)
3.2
User Programming (Manager Programming)
System Speed Dialing Name Set
002
Description
Assigns names to the system speed dial numbers assigned in program [001]
“System Speed Dialing Number Set.” The KX-T7235 shows the stored name
when performing System Speed Dialing. The stored names are applied to the
Caller ID and Call Log, Incoming features.
Selection
• Speed dial number: 000 through 499
• Name: 10 characters (max.)
Default
All speed dial numbers – Not stored
Programming
1.
Enter 002.
Display: SPD Name Set
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: SPD Code?->
3.
Enter a speed dial number.
To enter speed dial number 000, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 000: Not Stored
4.
Enter a name.
For entering characters, see Section 2.2 “Programming.”
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new name.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another speed dial number, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired speed dial number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• Speed dial numbers are programmed in program [001] “System Speed
Dialing Number Set.”
• There is a maximum of 500 names. Each name has a maximum of 10
characters.
Feature References
Installation Manual, Section 3, Features,
Call Log, Incoming
Caller ID
Special Features for KX-T7235 — System Speed Dialing
System Speed Dialing
User Programming (Manager Programming)
3-11
003
3.2
User Programming (Manager Programming)
Extension Number Set
Description
Assigns an extension number to each extension.
Selection
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16 (-1 / -2)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64 (-1 / -2)
(-1 = first part, -2 = second part)
• Extension Number: 2 through 4 digits
Default
KX-TD816 – Jack 01-1 through 16-1 = 201 through 216
Jack 01-2 through 16-2 = 301 through 316
KX-TD1232 – Jack 01-1 through 64-1 = 201 through 264;
Jack 01-2 through 64-2 = 301 through 364
Programming
1.
Enter 003.
Display: EXT Number Set
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?->
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack number.
Display: #01-1:EXT201
4.
Enter an extension number.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
Conditions
3-12
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or SELECT and the
desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
• There is a maximum of 32 extension numbers for KX-TD816 and 128
extension numbers for KX-TD1232. Each extension number can be two,
three, or four digits, consisting of 0 through 9. The and # keys cannot be
used.
• In case of KX-TD1232, Jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master
System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
User Programming (Manager Programming)
3.2
User Programming (Manager Programming)
Extension Number Set (contd.)
003
• An extension number is invalid if the leading first or second digits disagree
with the setting of the program [100] “Flexible Numbering, 1st through 16th
hundred extension blocks.” If one digit is assigned as the leading digit,
some extensions have two digits and some have three digits. If two digits
are assigned, some have three digits and some have four digits.
• Two extension numbers can be assigned per jack. If XDP is disabled for the
jack in program [600] “EXtra Device Port,” the extension number of the
second part (XX-2) is not available. (XX=jack number)
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number” on
page 3-5.
• Double entry or incompatible entry is invalid including the assignment of
programs [012] “ISDN Extension Number,” [127] “Voice Mail Extension
Number Assignment,” and [813] “Floating Number Assignment.” Valid
entry examples: 10 and 11; 10 and 110. Invalid entry examples: 10 and 106;
210 and 21.
• Program [004] “Extension Name Set” is used to give names to extension
numbers.
Feature References
Installation Manual, Section 3, Features,
EXtra Device Port (XDP)
Intercom Calling
Special Features for KX-T7235 — Extension Dialing
User Programming (Manager Programming)
3-13
004
3.2
User Programming (Manager Programming)
Extension Name Set
Description
Assigns names to the extension numbers programmed in program [003]
“Extension Number Set.”
Selection
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16 (-1 / -2)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64 (-1 / -2)
(-1 = first part, -2 = second part)
• Name: 10 characters (max.)
Default
All jacks – Not stored
Programming
1.
Enter 004.
Display: EXT Name Set
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack No?->
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack number.
Display: #01-1:Not Stored
4.
Enter a name.
To delate the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new name.
Conditions
3-14
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or SELECT and the
desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
• There is a maximum of 32 names for KX-TD816 and 128 names for KXTD1232. Each name has a maximum of 10 characters.
• Program [003] “Extension Number Set” is used to assign extension
numbers.
• In case of KX-TD1232, Jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master
System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number” on
page 3-5.
User Programming (Manager Programming)
3.2
User Programming (Manager Programming)
Extension Name Set (contd.)
Feature References
004
Installation Manual, Section 3, Features,
Intercom Calling
Special Features for KX-T7235 — Extension Dialing
User Programming (Manager Programming)
3-15
3.2 User Programming (Manager Programming)
Please refer to the Installation Manual or consult your dealer when you need to change the
following programs:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3-16
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[006] Operator / Manager Extension Assignment – Day / Night
[007] DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment
[008] Absent Messages
[009] Emergency Dial Number Set
[010] Budget Management
[011] Charge Margin and Tax Rate
[012] ISDN Extension Number Set
[013] ISDN Extension Name Set
[014] Budget Management on ISDN Port
User Programming (Manager Programming)
Section 4
DPT Features
Contents
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
Basic Operation ...................................................................4-2
Making Calls.........................................................................4-2
Receiving Calls .....................................................................4-3
DPT Features (A - Z)...........................................................4-4
Operator Service Features
(— for Operator only) .....................................................4-138
Special Display Features
(— for KX-T7235) ...........................................................4-155
<Note>
When setting “Idle Line Preference — Outgoing,” “No Line Preference
— Outgoing” or “Prime (CO Line) Preference,” it is not possible to have
access to any DPT features after going off-hook. To access DPT features,
press the INTERCOM button after going off-hook or press the
INTERCOM button directly without going off-hook.
In this manual, the default feature numbers are used to describe each
operation and illustration. Use newly programmed numbers if you have
changed the number by System Programming.
All illustrations used in these operating instructions are KX-T7235’s.
4.1
Basic Operation
Making Calls
Intercom Calling
Allows you to make a call to another extension.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the extension number or press the DSS button.
2
extension number
Outward Dialing
There are three line access methods to make a call to an outside party.
1.) Line Access, Automatic
2.) Line Access, CO Line Group
3.) Line Access, Individual
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the line access code (0 or 81 through 88), or press a CO button.
- 0 : Line Access, Automatic
- 81-88 : Line Access, CO Line Group
- CO : Line Access, Individual
2
line access code
3
3. Dial the phone number.
phone number
Conditions
• There are four types of Line Preference for outgoing calls (— Idle Line/No Line/Prime CO
Line/Prime INTERCOM Line). Each preference can be selected by Station Programming.
• Helpful hints for Handsfree (speakerphone) operation are noted in the “Handsfree
Operation” feature.
4-2
DPT Features
4.1
Basic Operation
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing
Feature References
Extension Dialing (4.4/Special Display Features)
Handsfree Operation
Intercom Calling
Outward Dialing, Line Access
Receiving Calls
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
1
or
or
1
INTERCOM
CO
1. Press a flashing CO or INTERCOM button directly.
• The CO or INTERCOM indicator light turns steady green.
or
Conditions
• There are three types of Line Preference for incoming calls (— No Line/Prime CO Line
/Ringing Line). Each preference can be selected by Station Programming.
• Helpful hints for Handsfree (speakerphone) operation are noted in the “Handsfree
Operation” feature.
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day/Night
Feature References
Answering, Direct CO Line
Handsfree Operation
DPT Features
4-3
A
4.2
DPT Features
Absent Message Capability
Once set this option, it provides a message on the display of the calling extension to show
the reason for your absence. Nine messages are available for every extension user. There are
six pre-programmed default messages. Setting or Cancelling a message can be done by
individual extension users but only callers with a display telephone can receive the message.
If required, Message 7, 8 and 9 can be programmed through System Programming.
Message No.
Message
1
Will Return Soon
2
Gone Home
At Ext %%%
3
Extension number
Back at %%:%%
4
Minute
Hour
Out until %%/%%
5
Day (or Month)
Month (or Day)
6
In a Meeting
7
8
9
Note: % indicates the area where you enter the desired parameter.
Setting
Message 1. “Will Return Soon”
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Dial the feature number (750) and 1.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
7
5
0
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
3
4-4
DPT Features
4.2
A
DPT Features
Message 2. “Gone Home”
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Dial the feature number (750) and 2.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
7
5
0
2
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
3
Message 3. “At Ext %%%” (extension number)
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Dial the feature number (750) and 3.
7
5
0
3
3. Dial the extension number where you are.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
extension number
4
Message 4. “Back at %% : %%” (time)
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
2. Dial the feature number (750) and 4.
7
5
0
4
3. Enter the hour (00 through 23) and the minute (00 through 59).
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3
hour and minute
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
4
DPT Features
4-5
A
4.2
DPT Features
Message 5. “Out until %% / %%” (month/day) or (day/month)
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
2. Dial the feature number (750) and 5.
7
5
0
5
3. Enter the month and the day.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
month and day
4
Message 6. “In a Meeting”
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
7
5
0
6
2. Dial the feature number (750) and 6.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
3
Message 7, 8 and 9. (User programmable)
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Dial the feature number (750) and a desired message number
(7 through 9).
7
X
5
(X: 7 through 9)
3
parameters
4-6
0
DPT Features
3. Enter the parameters, if required.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
4.2
A
DPT Features
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
4
Cancelling
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
7
5
0
2. Dial the feature number (750) and 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
Message Cancel
0
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
3
Conditions
• The selected message is displayed every time you go off-hook.
• Regarding Message 3;
1) If the extension number you want to dial has four characters, refer to System
Programming to change the setting of the characters.
2) If the extension number you want to dial has less than three characters, dial “ ” or “#”
to make it up to three characters.
• With the KX-T7235, you can execute this feature with the display operation.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[008] Absent Messages
[100] Flexible Numbering, Absent message
[990] System Additional Information, Field (41)
Feature References
System Feature Access Menu — Absent Message Capability (4.4/Special Display Features)
DPT Features
4-7
A
4.2
DPT Features
Account Code Entry
An Account Code is used to identify incoming and outgoing CO calls, for accounting and
billing purposes. The account code is appended to the “Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR)” call record. For incoming CO calls, account codes are optional. There are three
modes available for entering an account code during an outgoing call: Verified - All Calls
mode; Verified - Toll Restriction Override mode; and Option mode. One mode is selected for
each extension on a “Class of Service*1” basis.
Soft Button Operation
Entering account codes before dialing
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
1
2
ACCNT
S1
S2
2. Press the ACCNT (S3) button.
• You hear an intermittent tone.*2
• The display shows:
Enter ACCNT Code?
S3
3. Enter the account code and #.
• You hear a dial tone.
3
account code and #
4
4. Press a CO button or dial the line access code (0 or 81 through 88)
and dial.
CO
Entering account codes during or after a conversation
1
ACCNT
S1
S2
S3
2
2. Enter the account code and #.
account code and #
4-8
While having a conversation or hearing reorder tone after the other party
hangs up (within 15 seconds);
1. Press the ACCNT (S3) button.
• You can keep talking.
DPT Features
4.2
A
DPT Features
Standard Operation
Entering account codes before dialing
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
9
4
3
account code and #
4
CO
2. Dial the feature number (49), or press the flexible button which is
assigned as the Account button.
• No tone is returned, if you dial the feature number.
• You hear an intermittent tone,*2 if you press the Account button.
• The corresponding indicator light turns on when using the
Account button.
3. Enter the account code and #.
• The corresponding indicator light turns off when using the
Account button.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
4. Press a CO button or dial the line access code (0 or 81 through 88)
and dial.
Entering account codes during or after a conversation.
While having a conversation or hearing reorder tone after the other party
hangs up (within 15 seconds);
1. Press the flexible button which is assigned as the Account button.
• The corresponding indicator light turns on when using the
Account button.
• You can keep talking.
1
2
account code and #
2. Enter the account code and #.
• The corresponding indicator light turns off when using the
Account button.
DPT Features
4-9
A
4.2
DPT Features
Conditions
In “Verified - All Calls” mode
• You must always enter a pre-assigned account code when making any of the following
calls unless it has previously been stored in memory:
a) Call Forwarding — to CO Line
b) Manual Dialing (Selecting a CO line)
c) Note Book Function
d) One-Touch Dialing
e) Pickup Dialing (Hot Line)
f) Redial, Last Number
g) Redial, Saved Number
h) Station Speed Dialing
i) System Speed Dialing
In “Verified - Toll Restriction Override” mode
• You can enter a pre-assigned account code only when you need to override toll
restriction (Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry).
In “Option” mode
• You can enter any account code if needed. It is possible to record a calling or called
party’s account code in the SMDR optionally, during a conversation or within fifteen
seconds after the other party hangs up.
General
• There is no need for account code entry when receiving incoming calls.
• Dialing “ ” while entering an account code allows you to clear the number and re-enter.
• Pressing the flexible button assigned as the Account button while entering an account
code cancels the entry.
• An account code can be up to five numeric digits (0 through 9). FLASH, PAUSE, etc.
are not allowed. After entering an account code, the delimiter “#” or “99” must be
entered.
• An account code can be stored into Memory Dialing (“Note Book Function,” “OneTouch Dialing,” “Pickup Dialing (Hot Line),” “System/Station Speed Dialing,” “Call
Forwarding — to CO Line”). The sequence to enter an account code into Memory
Dialing is:
— [Feature Number] [Account Code] [#] [Line Access Code] [Phone Number]
or
— [Feature Number] [Account Code] [99] [Line Access Code] [Phone Number]
4-10
DPT Features
4.2
A
DPT Features
• If an entered account code does not match a pre-assigned account code in the verified-all
calls mode or the verified-toll restriction override mode,
1) When making a CO call, a reorder tone is returned.
2) While having a conversation, the code entry is accepted and the call is maintained
(= Option mode).
• If an entered account code matches a pre-assigned account code when making a CO call, the
charge fee of the account code is totalized.
• If you use an account code which is for a private call, the phone number of the destination
is not recorded on SMDR.
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Charge Fee Reference — Account Code Charge Fee Reference
Account Code Charge Fee Meter Clear
Account Code Set
Flexible Button Assignment — Account Button
(System Programming — [005] (Installation Manual) can be used for this assignment.)
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[105] Account Codes
[100] Flexible Numbering, Account code entry
[508] Account Code Entry Mode
[601] Class of Service
Feature References
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) (→ see Installation Manual)
Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry
*1 Class of Service (COS) is used to define the features which are allowed for a group of extensions.
Refer to the Installation Manual for programming and more details.
*2 One of the dial tones. Refer to “Tone List” in the Appendix.
DPT Features
4-11
A
4.2
DPT Features
Alternate Calling — Ring/Voice
Allows you to select ring or voice calling when making an intercom call. In Ring-Calling
mode, you can call the other party with a ring tone. While in Voice-Calling mode, you can
talk to the other party immediately after a confirmation tone.
Soft Button Operation
Alternating (to Voice-Calling mode)
1
Voice
S1
S2
S3
If the called extension is set to Ring-Calling mode, you hear a ringback
tone.
1. Press the Voice (S3) button.
• You hear a confirmation tone when it is changed to Voice-Calling
mode.
Alternating (to Ring-Calling mode)
1
Tone
S1
S2
S3
If the called extension is set to Voice-Calling mode, you hear a
confirmation tone.
1. Press the Tone (S2) button.
• You hear a ringback tone when it is changed to Ring-Calling
mode.
Standard Operation
Alternating (to Voice-Calling mode)
If the called extension is set to Ring-Calling mode, you hear a ringback
tone.
1. Press .
• You hear a confirmation tone when it is changed to Voice-Calling
mode.
1
Alternating (to Ring-Calling mode)
If the called extension is set to Voice-Calling mode, you hear a
confirmation tone.
1. Press .
• You hear a ringback tone when it is changed to Ring-Calling
mode.
1
4-12
DPT Features
4.2
A
DPT Features
Conditions
• Default is Ring-Calling mode.
• You can switch the desired calling mode only once during a call.
• If party you are calling is using a single line telephone (SLT), only Ring-Calling mode is
available.
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Intercom Alerting Assignment
Feature References
Handsfree Answerback
Answering, Direct CO Line
Allows you to answer an incoming CO call by simply pressing the appropriate CO button
without lifting the handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button.
To answer an incoming CO call
1. Press the CO button which is flashing red rapidly.
• The indicator light turns green and handsfree conversation is
established.
1
CO
Conditions
• This feature permits you to specify the desired line to be connected if multiple incoming CO
calls arrive at the same time.
• There are three types of CO buttons: Group-CO (G-CO) button, Loop-CO (L-CO) button
and Single-CO (S-CO) button. These can be assigned on flexible buttons by Station
Programming.
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment— Group-CO (G-CO) button, Loop-CO (L-CO) button,
Single-CO (S-CO) button
(System Programming — [005] (Installation Manual) can be used for this assignment.)
Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming
Feature References
Handsfree Operation
DPT Features
4-13
A
4.2
DPT Features
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)
When the selected CO line or extension you have dialed is busy, dial the camp-on code and
hang up. Your telephone will ring when the called party is idle.
Soft Button Operation
Setting
If you make a call and hear a busy tone;
1. Press the C.BCK (S3) button.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a reorder tone.
1
C.BCK
S1
S2
S3
2. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
• Wait until the telephone rings back.
2
Standard Operation
Setting
1
6
2
If you make a call and hear a busy tone;
1. Dial 6.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a reorder tone.
• The display shows:
<Example>
Callback Ext xxxx
Extension number
2. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
• Wait until the telephone rings back.
Answering an intercom recall
If you hear the telephone ringing;
• The display shows:
<Example>
xxxx: Free
1
Extension number
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
• You hear a ringback tone and the called extension rings
automatically.
4-14
DPT Features
4.2
A
DPT Features
Answering a CO recall
If you hear the telephone ringing;
• The display shows:
<Example>
COxx: Free
1
CO line number
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
• You hear a dial tone.
2
phone number
2. Dial the phone number of the outside party.
Cancelling
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (46).
2
4
6
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
3
Conditions
• If you do not answer before four callback ring signals (within 10 seconds), this feature will
be automatically cancelled.
• If the called party becomes busy again after the callback ringing starts, ringing stops but this
feature will be executed again when the extension becomes free.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Camp-On cancel
DPT Features
4-15
B
4.2
DPT Features
Background Music (BGM)
Background music, from an external source, is heard through the built-in speaker of the
telephone.
Soft Button Operation
1
BGM
S1
S2
When the handset is on the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off;
1. Press the BGM (S3) button.
• To turn off the BGM, press this button again.
S3
Standard Operation
Setting / Cancelling
When the handset is on the cradle and the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button
is off;
1. Press the HOLD button.
• The display shows as following for five seconds:
1
BGM On
or
BGM Off
— (When the BGM has been set.)
— (When the BGM has been
cancelled.)
Conditions
• It may be required to connect an external music source, such as a radio.
• The BGM stops whenever a call comes in or when you lift the handset.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[803] Music Source Use
[990] System Additional Information, Field (20)
4-16
DPT Features
4.2
B
DPT Features
Busy Station Signaling (BSS)
Allows you to inform a busy extension that you are waiting by sending three beeps.
Soft Button Operation
If you make an intercom call and hear a busy tone;
1. Press the BSS (S1) button.
• Wait for an answer and talk.
1
BSS
S1
S2
S3
Standard Operation
1
2
If you make an intercom call and hear a busy tone;
1. Dial 2.
• Wait for an answer and talk.
Conditions
• To receive the signal from the calling extension, see “Call Waiting” in this manual.
• This feature is available only for called extensions which have set “Call Waiting.”
Feature References
Call Waiting
DPT Features
4-17
C
4.2
DPT Features
Call Forwarding — SUMMARY
Automatically transfers incoming calls to another extension or to an external destination.
The following types are available:
Type
Description
Call Forwarding
— All Calls
All incoming calls are forwarded to another extension.
Call Forwarding
— Busy
All incoming calls are forwarded to another extension, when
your extension is busy.
Call Forwarding
— No Answer
All incoming calls are forwarded to another extension if you
don’t answer the call.
Call Forwarding
— Busy/No Answer
All incoming calls are forwarded to another extension if you
don’t answer or your extension is busy.
Call Forwarding
— to CO Line
Incoming calls are forwarded to a CO line.
Call Forwarding
— Follow Me
Allows you to remotely set “Call Forwarding — All Calls”
from another extension.
Note: You can also set the Voice Mail or Radio Paging Systems to the forwarding
destination. Refer to “Voice Mail Integration” in this manual.
Conditions
• To cancel Call Forwarding features, refer to “Call Forwarding — CANCEL” in this
manual.
• Only one stage of Call Forwarding is allowed. For example, if extension A has already
established Call Forwarding to extension B and extension B wants to activate Call
Forwarding to extension C, then extension B will receive reorder tone. Also if extension
C wants to activate Call Forwarding to extension A, then extension C will receive
reorder tone.
Ext A
(Yes)
Ext B
(No)
(No)
Ext C
• A floating extension such as MODEM or external pager cannot be programmed as the
forwarding destination.
4-18
DPT Features
4.2
C
DPT Features
• The destination extension, which is a proprietary telephone (PT) that does not have the
associated CO button, is unable to receive calls.
• Confirmation tone 2 (two beeps) is sent when the previously programmed data is same as
the new data, if not, confirmation tone 1 (one beep) is sent. Refer to “Tone List” in the
Appendix (Section 8).
• A flexible button on the KX-T7250 (no FWD/DND button provided) can be assigned as the
FWD/DND button.
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment — FWD/DND Button
(System Programming — [005] (Installation Manual) can be used for this assignment.)
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call Forwarding/Do not disturb
Feature References
Call Forwarding — CANCEL
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Voice Mail Integration
Call Forwarding — All Calls
This feature is used when you want your calls to be automatically re-directed to another
extension.
Display Operation (— for KX-T7235)
Setting
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
1
2. Press the FWD/DND button.
2
3. Press the FWD-All Calls (F3) button.
3
F3
FWD-All Calls(Rext)
F4
F5
DPT Features
4-19
C
4.2
4
extension number
5
DPT Features
4. Dial the extension number to which you wish to forward the call.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
FWD(All) Extxxxx
Extension number to which the call
is to be forwarded
• The FWD/DND indicator light flashes red slowly.
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
Standard Operation
Setting
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
1
2. Press the FWD/DND button.
• You may dial the feature number (710) instead.
2
3. Dial 2.
3
2
4
extension number
5
4. Dial the extension number to which you wish to forward the call.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
FWD(All) Extxxxx
Extension number to which the call
is to be forwarded
• The FWD/DND indicator light flashes red slowly.
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
4-20
DPT Features
4.2
C
DPT Features
Call Forwarding — Busy
A call directed to your extension is forwarded to another extension if your telephone is busy.
Display Operation (— for KX-T7235)
Setting
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
2
2. Press the FWD/DND button.
3
3. Press the FWD-Busy (F4) button.
F4
FWD-Busy
(Rext)
F5
4
extension number
5
4. Dial the extension number to which you wish to forward the call.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
FWD(BSY) Extxxxx
Extension number to which the call
is to be forwarded
• The FWD/DND indicator light flashes red slowly.
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
Standard Operation
Setting
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Press the FWD/DND button.
• You may dial the feature number (710) instead.
2
3. Dial 3.
3
3
4
extension number
4. Dial the extension number to which you wish to forward the call.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows.
FWD(BSY) Extxxxx
Extension number to which the call
is to be forwarded
• The FWD/DND indicator light flashes red slowly.
DPT Features
4-21
C
4.2
DPT Features
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
5
Call Forwarding — No Answer
Calls to your extension are forwarded to another extension if you do not answer the call in a
pre-determined time.
Display Operation (— for KX-T7235)
Setting
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
1
2. Press the FWD/DND Button.
2
3. Press the FWD-No Answer (F5) button.
3
FWD-No Answer (Rext)
F5
4
extension number
5
4. Dial the extension number to which you wish to forward the call.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
FWD(NA) Extxxxx
Extension number to which the call
is to be forwarded
• The FWD/DND indicator light flashes red slowly.
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
Standard Operation
Setting
4-22
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Press the FWD/DND button.
• You may dial the feature number (710) instead.
DPT Features
4.2
C
DPT Features
3. Dial 4.
3
4
4
extension number
5
4. Dial the extension number to which you wish to forward the call.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
FWD(NA) Extxxxx
Extension number to which the call
is to be forwarded
• The FWD/DND indicator light flashes red slowly.
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[202] Call Forwarding — No Answer Time
Call Forwarding — Busy / No Answer
Your calls are forwarded to another extension if your extension is busy or you do not answer
the call in a pre-determined time.
Display Operation (— for KX-T7235)
Setting
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
2
2. Press the FWD/DND button.
3
3. Press the NEXT (S3) button.
NEXT
S1
S2
S3
4. Press the FWD-BSY/NA (F1) button.
4
F1
FWD-BSY/NA
(Rext)
F2
F3
F4
F5
DPT Features
4-23
C
4.2
5
extension number
6
DPT Features
5. Dial the extension number to which you wish to forward the call.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
FWD(B/NA) Extxxxx
Extension number to which the call
is to be forwarded
• The FWD/DND indicator light flashes red slowly.
6. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
Standard Operation
Setting
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Press the FWD/DND button.
• You may dial the feature number (710) instead.
2
3. Dial 5.
3
5
4
extension number
5
4. Dial the extension number to which you wish to forward the call.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
FWD(B/NA) Extxxxx
Extension number to which the call
is to be forwarded
• The FWD/DND indicator light flashes red slowly.
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[202] Call Forwarding — No Answer Time
4-24
DPT Features
4.2
C
DPT Features
Call Forwarding — to CO Line
You can forward your calls to a telephone number outside of the extension group. The
outside telephone number must be pre-programmed.
Display Operation (— for KX-T7235)
Setting
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
1
2. Press the FWD/DND button.
2
3. Press the NEXT (S3) button.
3
NEXT
S1
S2
4. Press the FWD-CO Line (F2) button.
S3
4
F2
FWD-CO Line (Rdial)
5. Dial the line access code (0 or 81 through 88).
F3
F4
F5
6. Dial the phone number to which you wish to forward the call.
5
line access code
6
7. Dial #.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
<Example>
When entered 2011234 at step 6, the display shows:
FWD(CO)-02011234
• The FWD/DND indicator light flashes red slowly.
phone number
7
8. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
8
DPT Features
4-25
C
4.2
DPT Features
Standard Operation
Setting
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Press the FWD/DND button.
• You may dial the feature number (710) instead.
3
3. Dial 6.
6
4
4. Dial the line access code (0 or 81 through 88).
line access code
5
phone number
6
7
5. Dial the phone number to which you wish to forward the call.
6. Dial #.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
<Example>
When entered 2011234 at step 5, the display shows:
FWD CO 02011234
• The FWD/DND indicator light flashes red slowly.
7. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Conditions
• Up to sixteen digits (line access code is included) can be programmed.
• “Class of Service” programming determines the extension that can perform this feature.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[504] Call Forwarding to CO Line
4-26
DPT Features
4.2
C
DPT Features
Call Forwarding — Follow Me
If you forget to set “Call Forwarding — All Calls” before you leave your desk, this allows
you to set the same function from the destination extension.
Display Operation (— for KX-T7235)
Setting
- at the destination extension;
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
1
2
2. Press the FWD/DND button.
3
3. Press the NEXT (S3) button.
NEXT
S1
S2
S3
4. Press the FWD-From (F3) button.
4
F3
FWD-From
(Rext)
F4
F5
5
5. Dial your own extension number.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
FWD(From) Extxxxx
Your extension number
• The FWD/DND indicator light flashes red slowly at your own
extension.
your extension number
6
6. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
DPT Features
4-27
C
4.2
DPT Features
Standard Operation
Setting
- at the destination extension;
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
2. Press the FWD/DND button.
• You may dial the feature number (710) instead.
3
3. Dial 7.
7
4
your extension number
5
4. Dial your own extension number.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
FWD(From) Extxxxx
Your extension number
• The FWD/DND indicator light flashes red slowly at your own
extension.
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Conditions
• This feature can be cancelled at your extension or at the destination extension.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation manual
[991] COS Additional Information
4-28
DPT Features
4.2
C
DPT Features
Call Forwarding — CANCEL
There are two cancelling methods for “Call Forwarding,” depending on its function type.
Follow the appropriate cancelling procedure described below.
Display Operation (— for KX-T7235)
Cancelling Call Forwarding at your (original) extension
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
2
2. Press the FWD/DND button.
3
F1
3. Press the FWD/DND Cancel (F1) button.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
FWD/DND Cancel
FWD/DND Cancel
F2
F3
F4
• The FWD/DND indicator light turns off.
F5
6
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
Cancelling Call Forwarding at the destination extension — “Follow Me (All Calls)” only
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
2
2. Press the FWD/DND button.
3
3. Press the NEXT (S3) button.
NEXT
S1
S2
S3
4. Press the FWD-From Cancel (F4) button.
4
F4
FWD-From Cancel(Rext)
F5
5. Dial your extension number.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
FWD Cancel Exxxx — (xxxx: your extension number)
5
your extension number
• The FWD/DND indicator light turns off at your own extension.
DPT Features
4-29
C
4.2
DPT Features
6. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
6
Standard Operation
Cancelling Call Forwarding at your (original) extension
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Press the FWD/DND button.
• You may dial the feature number (710) or press the flexible
button assigned as the FWD/DND button instead.
3
0
4
3. Dial 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
FWD/DND Cancel
• The FWD/DND indicator light turns off.
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Cancelling Call Forwarding at the destination extension — “Follow Me (All Calls)” only
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Press the FWD/DND button.
• You may dial the feature number (710) or press the flexible
button assigned as the FWD/DND button.
2
3
3. Dial 8.
8
4. Dial your extension number.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
4
your extension number
FWD Cancel Exxxx
— (xxxx: your extension number)
• The FWD/DND indicator light turns off at your own extension.
5
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
4-30
DPT Features
4.2
C
DPT Features
Call Hold
Allows you to place an intercom or CO call on hold.
To place a call on hold
While having a conversation;
1. Press the HOLD button.
• The CO or INTERCOM indicator light flashes green moderately.
• The current call is placed on exclusive hold.
1
2
2. Press the HOLD button again.
• The CO or INTERCOM indicator light flashes green slowly.
• The current call is placed on hold.
Retrieving a call on hold
1
INTERCOM
CO
or
-at the holding extension;
1. Press the CO or INTERCOM button which is flashing green slowly.
• The CO or INTERCOM indicator light turns steady green.
Conditions
• To retrieve a call on hold at another extension, refer to “Call Hold Retrieve” in this manual.
• If a held call is not retrieved within the specific period of time (default: 60 sec.), “Hold
Recall” occurs.
• If a CO call is placed on hold and not retrieved in fifteen minutes, it is automatically
disconnected.
• CO calls and one intercom call can be placed on hold at the same time.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[200] Hold Recall Time
Feature References
Call Hold Retrieve
Hold Recall (→ see Installation Manual)
DPT Features
4-31
C
4.2
DPT Features
Call Hold, Exclusive
Allows you to prevent other extension users from retrieving your held call. Only the user
who held it can retrieve the call.
To place a call on hold
While having a conversation;
1. Press the HOLD button.
• The corresponding CO or INTERCOM indicator light flashes
green moderately.
• You hear a confirmation tone.
• You may replace the handset.
1
Retrieving a call on exclusive hold
1
INTERCOM
CO
or
1. Press the CO or INTERCOM button which is on exclusive hold.
• The CO or INTERCOM indicator light turns steady green.
• The held call is released.
Conditions
• If a held call is not retrieved within the specific period of time (default: 60 sec.), “Hold
Recall” occurs.
• If a CO call is placed on hold and not retrieved in fifteen minutes, it is automatically
disconnected.
• CO calls and one intercom call can be placed on exclusive hold at the same time.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[200] Hold Recall Time
Feature References
Call Hold
Hold Recall (→ see Installation Manual)
4-32
DPT Features
4.2
C
DPT Features
Call Hold Retrieve
Allows you to retrieve a call that has been placed on hold by another extension.
Retrieving a CO call on hold
- at another extension;
1. Press the CO button whose indicator is flashing red slowly.
• The CO indicator light turns steady green.
1
CO
or
or
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (53).
2
5
3
3. Dial the held CO line number (01 through 08) or (01 through 24).
- 01 through 08 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 01 through 24 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
3
held CO line number
Retrieving an intercom call on hold
- at another extension;
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
2. Dial the feature number (51).
5
1
3
3. Dial the holding extension number.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
holding extension number
Condition
• A confirmation tone is audible when the call is retrieved by the feature number. Eliminating the
tone is programmable.
DPT Features
4-33
C
4.2
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Hold retrieve — intercom
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References
Call Hold
4-34
DPT Features
DPT Features
4.2
C
DPT Features
Call Log, Incoming (— for KX-T7230 and KX-T7235 only)
Allows you to confirm the external calling party’s phone number, name, day and time on the
display when you do not answer the call. You can also modify and call back the logged
number. Up to 15 calls can be logged per extension.
Setting
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
1
2
5
4
1
2. Dial the feature number (54) and 1.
• The display shows:
Incoming Log On
• The oldest call log is replaced by a newest call that is received
after 15 calls are stored.
3
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
Cancelling
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
2
2. Dial the feature number (54) and 0.
• The display shows:
Incoming Log Off
5
4
0
• The 16th call log is ignored after 15 calls are stored.
3
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
DPT Features
4-35
C
4.2
DPT Features
Display Operation (— for KX-T7235)
1 Jan 15:00
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Extension
STA Speed F8
Features
SYS Speed F9
Call Log
F10
NEW5
NEXT
OLD7
S2
S1
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
A112:AB COMPANY
0102030405
BOB HANKS
30 15:00
Seq01 2Call
PREV
NEXT
MENU
S2
S1
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
S2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
S3
A104:CD COMPANY
0011223344
Nancy Home
30
16:00
Seq05 3Call
PREV
NEXT
MENU
S1
F1
F2
S3
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
S3
A104:CD COMPANY
0011223344
Nancy Home
30
10:00
F6
F7
When the LED indicator of the SHIFT button is red, there are unanswered
calls:
1. Press the OLD (S1) or NEW (S2) button to see the incoming call log
information.
– Alt : Information that you have already confirmed by pressing
NEW (S2) button.
– NEW : Information that you have not confirmed yet.
• Pressing the SHIFT button provides you with the CONT (S1),
RING (S2), BGM (S3) button on the display.
2. Confirm the information by pressing the NEXT (S3) button.
• The display shows the CO line number and CO line name, the
telephone number, the caller’s name, the date and time, sequence
number and the number of times called.
• To return to the initial display, off-hook and on-hook or press the
MENU (S1) button.
• To clear the displayed information, press the CLR (S2) button.
• Pressing “ ” erases the numbers from the first digit.
3. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button if you want to call
back the party on the display.
• You hear a dial tone.
• You may press the CO button first to select the specified CO line.
4. Press the CALL (S1) button.
F8
F9
F10
CALL
S1
S2
S3
Display Operation (— for KX-T7230)
1
Jan
12:00
OLD7
NEW5
S1
4-36
S2
DPT Features
S3
When the LED indicator of the SHIFT button is red, there are unanswered
calls:
1. Press the OLD (S1) or NEW (S2) button to see the CO incoming
call information.
– Alt : Information that you have already confirmed by pressing
NEW (S2) button.
– NEW : Information that you have not confirmed yet.
• Pressing the SHIFT button provides you with the CONT (S1),
RING (S2), BGM (S3) button on the display.
4.2
C
DPT Features
01:0111111111
INFO CLR
NEXT
S1
S2
S3
2. Confirm the information by pressing the NEXT (S3) button.
• Pressing the INFO (S1) button provides you with the further
information for one party. The upper line of the display changes
as follows:
(sequence number and a name)
01:BOB HANKS
01:30 17:00
2
A112:AB COMPANY
(sequence number, date, time, and
number of times called)
(CO line number and CO line name)
• To return to the initial display, off-hook and on-hook.
• To clear the displayed number, press the CLR (S1) button.
• Pressing “ ” erases the numbers from the first digit.
05:0011223344
INFO CLR
NEXT
S1
S2
S3
05:0011223344
CALL
S1
S2
3. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button if you want to call
back the party on the display.
• You hear a dial tone.
• You may press the CO button first to select the specified CO line.
4. Press the CALL (S1) button.
S3
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
This feature is only available for KX-T7235 and KX-T7230.
If you do not answer a call, your extension automatically records the caller’s information.
If you modify the displayed telephone number, the replaced number will be memorized.
You can lock the display so that incoming call log information is not shown on the display.
The caller’s name should be stored in the list of the system speed dialing.
Programming References
• User Programming (Manager Programming) (Section 3)
[001] System Speed Dialing Number Set
[002] System Speed Dialing Name Set
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[001] System Speed Dialing Number Set
[002] System Speed Dialing Name Set
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call Log, Incoming, Call Log Lock, Incoming
Feature References
Call Log Lock, Incoming
DPT Features
4-37
C
4.2
DPT Features
Call Log Lock, Incoming (for KX-T7230 and KX-T7235 only)
Allows, you to lock the display of your extension so that “Call Log, Incoming” feature is not
shown on the display, if you don’t want others to see the information.
Locking
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (59).
2
5
9
3. Dial the lock code (000 through 999).
3
4. Dial the same lock code again.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
Log Locked:xxx
Lock code
lock code
4
lock code
5
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
Unlocking
1. .Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (59).
2
5
9
3. Dial the same lock code as you used to lock the extension.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
3
lock code
5
4-38
Unlocked
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
DPT Features
4.2
C
DPT Features
Conditions
• The operator can unlock the display of call log for any extension if you forget your lock
code as you used to lock the extension. (Incoming Call Log Lock, Remote)
• While in locking status, you cannot lock the display of your extension with new lock code.
You must unlock your extension before locking with new lock code.
• You cannot enter “ ” “#” as a lock code.
• When you unlock the extension using the lock code which is different from previous
entering lock code, you hear a reorder tone. While in locking status, if you press OLD (S1)
or NEW (S2) button, the display shows: Restricted
Feature References
Call Log, Incoming
Call Log Lock Control, Incoming (4.3/Operator Service Features)
DPT Features
4-39
C
4.2
DPT Features
Call Park
Allows you to place a held call into a system parking area. This releases you from the parked
call to perform other operations. The parked call can be retrieved by any extension user. If
your extension is assigned as an operator, you can perform the operation using the display.
While having a conversation;
1. Press the TRANSFER button.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
1
2
2. Dial the feature number (52).
5
2
3
parking zone number
3. Dial a parking zone number (0 through 9).
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone when the call is
parked.
• The display shows:
Call Parked at x
Parking zone number (0 through 9)
• If you hear a busy tone, that indicates the specified parking zone
is unavailable. The display shows:
Park at 1 N/A
• It is not necessary to redial the feature number to change the
parking zone. Just enter the parking zone number while hearing
busy tone.
Retrieving a parked call
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (52).
2
5
2
3
parking zone number
4-40
DPT Features
3. Dial the parking zone number (0 through 9) at which the call is
parked.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional) and then you can talk to
the party.
• You hear a reorder tone if there is no held call.
• The display shows:
No Held Call
4.2
C
DPT Features
Conditions
• Up to ten calls can be parked.
• If a parked call is not retrieved within Transfer Recall time, “Call Park Recall” occurs. If a
parked call is a CO call, it is possible to select whether the “Call Park Recall” will go to the
initiating extension or to the operator through System Programming. If a parked call is an
intercom call, the “Call Park Recall” will return to the initiating extension.
• If a “Call Park Recall” is not retrieved within fifteen minutes, it is automatically
disconnected.
• A confirmation tone is audible when the parked call is retrieved. Eliminating the tone is
programmable.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call park/call park retrieve
[201] Transfer Recall Time
[990] System Additional Information, Fields (11), (16)
Feature References
System Feature Access Menu — Call Park (4.4/Special Display Features)
Call Pickup, CO Line
Allows you to answer an incoming CO call that is ringing at another’s telephone.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (4 ).
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• You can talk to the caller.
2
4
Conditions
• It is not possible to answer Call Waiting calls.
• A confirmation tone is audible when the call is picked up. Eliminating the tone is
programmable.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call pickup, CO line
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References
Call Pickup Deny
Call Waiting
DPT Features
4-41
C
4.2
DPT Features
Call Pickup, Directed
Allows you to answer an incoming call ringing at any other extension.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (41).
2
4
1
3
extension number
3. Dial the extension number at which a call is ringing.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• You can talk to the caller.
or
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2. Press the DSS button whose indicator is flashing.
Conditions
• Doorphone calls can be picked up from extensions that are not programmed to answer
doorphone calls.
• A confirmation tone is audible when the call is picked up. Eliminating the tone is
programmable.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call pickup, directed
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References
Call Pickup Deny
4-42
DPT Features
4.2
C
DPT Features
Call Pickup, Group
Allows you to answer a call that is ringing at another telephone within your extension group.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
4
0
2. Dial the feature number (40).
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• You can talk to the caller.
Conditions
• You can pick up an incoming CO, intercom or doorphone call.
• It is not possible to answer Call Waiting calls.
• A confirmation tone is audible when the call is picked up. Eliminating the tone is
programmable.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call pickup, group
[602] Extension Group Assignment
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References
Call Pickup Deny
Call Waiting
Extension Group (→ see Installation Manual)
DPT Features
4-43
C
4.2
DPT Features
Call Pickup Deny
Allows you to prohibit another extension from picking up your calls with the “Call Pickup”
features.
Setting
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
7
2
0
2. Dial the feature number (720) and 1.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
C.Pickup Deny
1
3
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Cancelling
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
7
2
0
2. Dial the feature number (720) and 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
C.Pickup Allow
0
3
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call pickup, deny
Feature References
Call Pickup, CO Line
Call Pickup, Directed
Call Pickup, Group
4-44
DPT Features
4.2
C
DPT Features
Call Splitting
Allows you to alternate between two callers. Placing the current call on hold allows a
conversation with the other party.
Having a conversation while having another call on hold
1
INTERCOM
CO
1. Press the CO or INTERCOM button of the first held call.
• Pressing this button alternates between the callers.
or
Having a conversation with an intercom call while having another intercom call on hold
1. Press the HOLD button.
• Pressing this button alternates between the callers.
1
Conditions
• This feature does not work during doorphone call or paging.
Feature References
Call Hold
DPT Features
4-45
C
4.2
DPT Features
Call Transfer — to CO Line
Allows you to transfer your calls to an outside party by a Screened Call Transfer.
Screened Call Transfer
While having a conversation;
1. Press the TRANSFER button.
• The other party is placed on hold.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
1
2
CO
2. Press a CO button or dial the line access code (0 or 81 through 88).
3
3. Dial the phone number to where calls will be transferred.
phone number
4
4. Wait for an answer and announce.
5
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
• The call is transferred.
Conditions
• Pressing the Terminate button while dialing allows you to disconnect the line, and try again.
• If you want to return to the held call, press the TRANSFER button or corresponding CO or
INTERCOM button before the destination party answers.
• “Class of Service” programming determines the extensions that can perform this feature.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[503] Call Transfer to CO Line
[601] Class of Service
[990] System Additional Information, Field (1)
4-46
DPT Features
4.2
C
DPT Features
Call Transfer — to Extension
Allows you to perform a Screened or Unscreened Call Transfer to another extension. A call
can also be transferred to an extension by using the DSS button, if it is programmed.
Screened Call Transfer
While having a conversation;
1. Press the TRANSFER button.
• The other party is placed on hold.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
1
2
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
• You hear a ringback tone.
extension number
3
3. Wait for an answer and announce.
4
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
• The call is transferred.
Unscreened Call Transfer
While having a conversion;
1. Press the TRANSFER button.
• The other party is placed on hold.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
1
2
extension number
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
• You hear a ringback tone.
• Ringing starts at the extension you dialed.
3
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
DPT Features
4-47
C
4.2
DPT Features
Call Transfer using a DSS button
Allows you to perform a Screened or Unscreened Call Transfer by using a DSS button.
There are two operations, depending on whether or not One-Touch Transfer* is set.
* One-Touch Transfer allows you to hold a CO call and transfer it to an extension by pressing one key. This
feature provides automatic hold and transfer, without pressing the TRANSFER button. System Programming is
required to use this function.
“One-Touch Transfer” mode enable:
1
CO
While having a conversation;
1. Press the desired flexible button which is assigned as the DSS
button.
• The other party is placed on hold and the destination extension is
called immediately.
“One-Touch Transfer” mode disable:
While having a conversation;
1. Press the TRANSFER button.
1
2
CO
2. Press the desired flexible button which is assigned as the DSS
button.
Conditions
• Pressing the Terminate button while dialing allows you to disconnect the line and try again.
• If you want to return to the held call, press the TRANSFER button or corresponding CO or
INTERCOM button before the destination extension answers.
• If the destination extension does not answer the call within twelve rings (default), “Transfer
Recall” occurs. If the transferred call is a CO call, it is possible to select whether the
Transfer Recall will go to the initiating extension or to the operator by System
Programming.
• When the “Transfer Recall” occurs, the display shows:
<Example>
RCL:Ext:103
• If the “Transfer Recall” returns to you and you do not answer it for fifteen minutes, the line
will be disconnected.
• A flexible CO button can be assigned as a DSS button.
• To use “One-Touch Transfer,” System Programming is necessary.
4-48
DPT Features
4.2
C
DPT Features
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment — DSS Button
(System Programming — [005] (Installation Manual) can be used for this assignment.)
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[108] One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button
[201] Transfer Recall Time
[990] System Additional Information, Field (1), (11)
Feature References
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Transfer Recall (→ see Installation Manual)
DPT Features
4-49
C
4.2
DPT Features
Call Waiting
During a conversation, a Call Waiting tone informs you that there is a call waiting. You can
answer the third call by disconnecting or placing the current call on hold.
Setting
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
7
3
1
1
3
2. Dial the feature number (731) and 1.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
Call Waiting On
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Cancelling
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
7
3
1
0
3
2. Dial the feature number (731) and 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
Call Waiting Off
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
To talk to the new party by terminating the current call
While hearing a Call Waiting tone;
1. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
• The current call is disconnected.
1
2
CO
4-50
INTERCOM
or
DPT Features
2. Press the flashing CO or INTERCOM button.
• You can talk to the new caller.
4.2
C
DPT Features
To talk to the new party by holding the current call
1
INTERCOM
CO
or
While hearing a Call Waiting tone and the CO or INTERCOM indicator is
flashing rapidly;
1. Press the flashing CO or INTERCOM button.
• You can talk to the new caller.
— If both the current call and new call are extension calls, you can
press the HOLD button.
Conditions
• A Call Waiting tone is generated at the extension in the following conditions:
1) When a CO call comes in.
2) When a Doorphone call comes in.
3) When another extension executes the “Busy Station Signaling (BSS)” feature.
• Setting “Data Line Security” temporarily cancels this feature.
• You can change the desired Call Waiting tone (Tone 1 or Tone 2).
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call waiting
Feature References
Busy Station Signaling (BSS)
DPT Features
4-51
C
4.2
DPT Features
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
Allows you to restrict the presentation of your number to the called party when you make a
call. You can set the called party to see your number on the display once or in succession.
To restrict the presentation of your number to the called party
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (57) and 2.
• The display shows:
2
5
7
2
3
CLIR
ON
3. Hang up and press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
To present your number to the called party
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Dial the feature number (57) and 0.
• The display shows:
5
7
0
3
CLIR
OFF
3. Hang up and press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
To change the current setting at just time you make a call
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (57) and 1.
2
5
7
3. Dial the line access code (0 or 81 through 88), or press a CO button.
3
line access code
4-52
1
DPT Features
4.2
C
DPT Features
4. Dial the phone number.
4
phone number
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, CLIR continue/once/cancel
[419] Subscriber Number Assignment
[516] Calling Line Identification Restriction
Feature References
Caller ID (→ see Installation Manual)
DPT Features
4-53
C
4.2
DPT Features
Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)
Allows you to restrict the presentation of your number to the calling party when you receive
the incoming call. You can set the calling party not to see your number on the display.
To restrict the presentation of your number to the calling party
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
5
8
1
3
2. Dial the feature number (58) and 1.
• The display shows:
COLR
ON
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
To present your number to the calling party
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Dial the feature number (58) and 0.
• The display shows:
5
8
0
3
COLR
OFF
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, COLR set/cancel
[419] Subscriber Number Assignment
[517] Connected Line Identification Restriction
4-54
DPT Features
4.2
C
DPT Features
Conference
During a two-party conversation, you can add a third party to make a three-party conference.
The members of a conference on the line may be three extensions, one extension and two
CO lines, or two extensions and one CO line.
To establish a conference
While having a two-party conversation;
1. Press the CONF button.
• The current party is placed on hold.
• The CONF indicator light flashes red slowly.
1
2
2. Dial the phone number of the third party.
phone number
3. Press the CONF button after the third party answers.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• The CONF indicator light turns steady red.
• The corresponding CO or INTERCOM indicator light turns green.
3
To leave the conference
1. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
• The other two parties may continue their conversation.
• If the other two parties are both CO lines, they will be
disconnected.
1
To terminate one party and talk to the other – Available for one extension and two CO line
calls, or two extension and one CO line calls.
1
CO
INTERCOM
or
1. Press the CO or INTERCOM button of the desired party.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• Conversation with the desired party is established and the other
party is disconnected.
To talk to the first caller while keeping the second call on hold
1
1. Press the TRANSFER button.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• If both of the other parties are extensions, the INTERCOM
indicator light flashes green moderately.
DPT Features
4-55
C
4.2
DPT Features
To put both parties on hold
1. Press the HOLD button.
• This feature is available only when at least one party is on a CO
line.
1
Conditions
• When you dial the telephone number of an outside party, you must dial the line access code
(0 or 81 through 88) as the leading digit.
• Up to six conference calls are allowed simultaneously.
• A conference call is also established by “Executive Busy Override.”
• Pressing a CO button which is not in the conference, allows you to exit from the conference
leaving the two parties connected unless they are both CO lines. If the other two parties are
both CO lines, they will be disconnected.
• You can return to the original party before the third party answers by pressing the
TRANSFER button.
• A flexible button on the KX-T7250 (no CONF button provided) can be assigned as the
CONF button.
• When a two-party call is changed to a three-party call and vice versa, a confirmation tone is
sent to all three parties. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment — Conference (CONF) Button
(System Programming — [005] (Installation Manual) can be used for this assignment.)
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[990] System Additional Information, Field (13)
Feature References
Executive Busy Override — CO Line
Executive Busy Override — Extension
4-56
DPT Features
4.2
C
DPT Features
Conference, Unattended
When you are in a conference with two outside parties, you can disconnect from a threeparty conference allowing the other two parties to continue their conversation. You can also
rejoin the three party conference.
To establish an Unattended Conference
While having a conversation with two outside parties;
1. Press the CONF button to leave the conference.
• A CO-to-CO call between the other two parties is established.
1
To return to the conference
1. Press the CO button flashing green moderately.
1
CO
Conditions
• The class of service assignment determines whether an extension can establish an
unattended conference.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[503] Call Transfer to CO Line
[601] Class of Service
Feature References
Conference
Hold Recall (→ see Installation Manual)
* Class of Service (COS) is used to define the features which are allowed for a group of extensions.
Refer to the Installation Manual.
DPT Features
4-57
D
4.2
DPT Features
Display Call Information (for KX-T7230 and KX-T7235 only)
When you have a call with an outside party, you can see the phone number or the duration of
a telephone call, the meter, the phone charge on the display by pressing the CO button
alternately.
When you make a call with an outside party;
• The display shows the telephone number that you are calling.
When you receive a call from an outside party;
• The display shows the duration of a telephone call.
After receiving a signal of the telephone charge;
• The display changes to the meter.
<Example>
CO01 : 00001
1
CO
1. Press the CO button.
• The display shows the charge of FR.
<Example>
CO01 :0000.23 FR
2
CO
2. Press the CO button again.
• The display returns to the telephone number that you are calling
or the duration of a telephone call.
Conditions
• Whenever pressing the CO button, the display changes the phone number or the duration of
a telephone call, the meter, the phone charge in circular way.
• If you don’t pay the telephone charge, your display doesn’t change even if you press the CO
button.
• You can change the order of the display, the meter and the charge through System
Programming.
• Refer to the display examples of Section 8 in this manual for another display call
information.
• If the displayed characters exceed sixteen digits, “&” is shown at the right-hand edge.
• The currency denomination is programmable by System Programming.
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Charge Fee Reference — New Rate Set
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[117] Charge Display Selection
[125] Assignment of Demonination
4-58
DPT Features
4.2
D
DPT Features
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Allows you to refuse an incoming intercom call or to transfer an incoming CO call to the
backup station.
Display Operation (— for KX-T7235)
Setting
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
2
2. Press the FWD/DND button.
3
F2
3. Press the Do Not Disturb (F2) button.
Do Not Disturb
F3
F4
4. Dial the extension number or 0 (to operator) for the backup station.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
Do Not Disturb→xxx
F5
4
extension number
5
Extension number
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
• The FWD/DND indicator light turns on.
Cancelling
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
1
2. Press the FWD/DND button.
2
3
F1
F2
F3
F4
FWD/DND Cancel
3. Press the FWD/DND Cancel (F1) button.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
FWD/DND
Cancel
F5
4
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
• The FWD/DND indicator light turns off.
DPT Features
4-59
D
4.2
DPT Features
Standard Operation
Setting
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Press the FWD/DND button.
• You may dial the feature number (710) instead.
3. Dial 1.
3
1
4. Dial the extension number or 0 (to operator) for the backup station.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
4
Do Not Disturb
extension number
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
• The FWD/DND indicator light turns on.
5
Cancelling
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Press the FWD/DND button.
• You may dial the feature number (710) instead.
3
0
4
3. Dial 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• This display shows:
FWD/DND
Cancel
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
• The FWD/DND indicator light turns off.
4-60
DPT Features
4.2
D
DPT Features
Conditions
• If the extension is already set as the destination of the “Call Forwarding,” “Do Not Disturb
(DND)” and “Do Not Disturb for Direct Dial In Calls” features, you cannot set this feature
and when you set this feature, you hear a reorder tone.
• When this feature is set, an incoming CO call (directed by Intercept Routing or DIL 1:1
extension) will be automatically transferred to the backup station (pre-assigned extension).
An incoming intercom call will send the DND tone to your extension.
• This feature does not work for the following calls: doorphone calls; recalls for hold; Timed
Reminder alarm.
• If your extension is assigned as an operator or is set as the destination of the “Call
Forwarding” feature and “Do Not Disturb (DND)” feature, you cannot set this feature.
• While the operator is set as the destination of the “Do Not Disturb (DND)” feature, even if
the operator is different from Day mode and Night mode, an incoming call will be
transferred to an operator. If the operator is not assigned, an incoming call will be
transferred to the IRNA.
• When this feature is set, “Call Forwarding” and “Do Not Disturb for Direct Dial In Calls”
features are cancelled.
• A calling extension that has “Do Not Disturb (DND) Override” enabled can override your
extension when it is set to “Do Not Disturb (DND)” mode.
• If the destination extension has DND activated, then DSS button corresponding to it will
light up red. This indicates to the proprietary telephone or DSS console user that the
destination extension is unavailable.
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment — FWD/DND Button
(System Programming — [005] (Installation Manual) can be used for this assignment.)
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call Forwarding/do not disturb
Feature References
Call Forwarding
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override
Do Not Disturb for Direct Dial In Calls
IRNA (→ see Installation Manual)
DPT Features
4-61
D
4.2
DPT Features
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override
Allows you to call an extension even through the “Do Not Disturb (DND)” feature is set.
System Programming is necessary to use this feature.
Soft Button Operation
If you make an intercom call and hear a Do Not Disturb (DND) tone;
• The display shows:
<Example>
1234:
DND
1
Over
S1
S2
S3
1. Press the Over (S2) button.
• Wait for an answer.
Standard Operation
1
2
If you make an intercom call and hear a Do Not Disturb (DND) tone;
• The display shows:
<Example>
1234:
DND
1. Dial 2.
• Wait for an answer.
Conditions
• If you hear a reorder tone after dialing 2, this means the “Do Not Disturb (DND) Override”
feature is not set at your extension.
• “Class of Service” programming determines the extensions that can perform this feature.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[507] Do Not Disturb Override
[601] Class of Service
Feature References
Do Not Disturb (DND)
4-62
DPT Features
4.2
D
DPT Features
Do Not Disturb for Direct Dial In Calls
You can set “Do Not Disturb (DND)” feature for Direct Dial In (DDI) calls. Direct Dial In
calls will be transferred to the operator. The operator cannot set this feature.
Setting
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
5
6
1
2. Dial the feature number (56) and 1.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
DND-DDI Set
• The FWD/DND indicator light turns on.
3
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Cancelling
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
6
5
0
2. Dial the feature number (56) and 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
DND-DDI Cancel
• The FWD/DND indicator light turns off.
3
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Conditions
• When this feature is set, an incoming call (directed by Intercept Routing or DIL 1:1, DIL
1:N) can be answered.
• Even if this feature is set, your extension doesn’t deny Direct Dial In calls in the following
cases:
1) The destination of DDI is UCD.
2) The destination of DDI is the Hunting group member that is set this feature.
DPT Features
4-63
D
4.2
DPT Features
• If the destination extension has DND activated, then the DSS button corresponding to it will
light up red. This indicates to the proprietary telephone or DSS console user that the
destination extension is unavailable.
• If the operator is assigned different from Day mode and Night mode, Direct Dial In calls
will be transferred to an operator. If the operator is not assigned, Direct Dial In calls will be
transferred to the IRNA.
• When you set this feature, “Call Forwarding” and “Do Not Disturb (DND)” features will be
cancelled.
• While you set this feature, if you go off-hook, you hear a special dial tone
Feature References
Call Forwarding
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override
Direct Dial In (→ see Installation Manual)
4-64
DPT Features
4.2
D
DPT Features
Doorphone Call
Allows you to have a conversation with a visitor at your doorphone. You can also unlock the
door from your telephone.
Calling an extension from a doorphone
1. Press the Doorphone button.
• The visitor hears a beep.
• Wait for an answer and talk.
1
Answering a doorphone call
When you hear the doorphone ring tone at the extension;
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
1
Calling a doorphone
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (68).
2
6
8
3
1
or
2
3. Dial a doorphone number (1) or (1 – 2).
- 1 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 1 – 2 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
• You can talk after you hear a confirmation tone.
• The display shows:
Door Phone 1
Doorphone number (1 or 2)
To unlock the door from an assigned extension
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (55).
2
5
5
DPT Features
4-65
D
4.2
3
1
or
2
4
DPT Features
3. Dial a door opener number (1) or (1 – 2).
- 1 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 1 – 2 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
• You hear a confirmation tone.
• The door is left unlocked for 5 seconds.
• The display shows:
Door 1 Open
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
To unlock the door while talking to the doorphone from any extension
1
5
2
1. Dial 5.
• You hear a confirmation tone.
• The door is left unlocked for 5 seconds.
• The display shows:
Door 1 Open
2. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Conditions
• If you dial 5 again while the door is open, the door will stay open for another five seconds.
• If you do not answer an incoming doorphone call within thirty seconds, the call is cancelled.
• You must program the extensions that can receive calls from each doorphone for day and
night mode.
• It is possible for any extension user to originate a call to a doorphone.
• The door opener 1 and 2 can be unlocked using the feature number, while the doors which
are paired with the doorphone 1 or 2 can be unlocked while talking to the doorphone.
• The door opener 1 and the doorphone 1 are the master cabinet, the door opener 2 and the
doorphone 2 are the slave cabinet.
• “Class of Service” programming determines the extension that can unlock the door.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Door opener
[122] Automatic Door Open Assignment
[511] Door Opener Access
[607]–[608] Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day/Night
4-66
DPT Features
4.2
E
DPT Features
Electronic Station Lockout
Allows you to lock your extension so that other users cannot make outgoing CO calls at your
extension.
Locking
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (77).
2
7
7
3. Dial the lock code (000 through 999).
3
4. Dial the same lock code again.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
Locked No.:xxx
Lock code
lock code
4
lock code
5
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Unlocking
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (77).
2
7
7
3. Dial the same lock code as you used to lock the extension.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
Unlocked
3
lock code
4
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
DPT Features
4-67
E
4.2
DPT Features
Conditions
• An attempt to dial to a CO line from a locked extension receives reorder tone and “Nicht
berechtigt” is shown on the display.
• The extension assigned as an operator can set and cancel this function for another extension
(Remote Station Lock Control).
• “Remote Station Lock Control” overrides this feature. If the operator sets Remote Station
Lock on the extension you have already locked, you cannot unlock it.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Electronic station lockout
Feature References
Remote Station Lock Control (4.3/Operator Service Features)
Emergency Call
Allows you to make an emergency call automatically. There are maximum eight emergency
calls. “117,” “118” and “144” are the default settings and the others can be stored through
System Programming.
Dialing
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
• You hear a dial tone.
2
2. Dial the desired emergency number.
• This feature automatically chooses an idle CO line.
emergency number
Conditions
• The emergency call will override the toll restriction level, the “Electric Station Lockout”
feature, and the account code mode, “Verified — All Calls” or “Verified — Toll Restriction
Override.”
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[009] Emergency Dial Number Set
[100] Flexible Numbering, Emergency call 1 through 8
4-68
DPT Features
4.2
E
DPT Features
Executive Busy Override — CO Line
Allows you to enter into an existing CO call.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Press the CO button corresponding to the call that you want to enter.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
2
CO
To leave the conference
1. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
• The other two parties continue their conversation.
1
To terminate one party and talk to the other
1
INTERCOM
CO
1. Press the CO or INTERCOM button of the desired party.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
or
Conditions
• This feature does not work when “Data Line Security” or “Executive Busy Override Deny”
has been set at the extension engaged in the existing CO call.
• “Class of Service” programming determines the extensions that can perform this feature.
• When a two-party call is changed to a three-party call and vice versa, a confirmation tone is
sent to all three parties. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Executive busy override deny
[505] Executive Busy Override
[506] Executive Busy Override Deny
[601] Class of Service
[612] Data Line Security
[990] System Additional Information, Field (13)
Feature References
Conference
Executive Busy Override Deny
DPT Features
4-69
E
4.2
DPT Features
Executive Busy Override — Extension
Allows you to enter into an existing intercom (extension) conversation, either between two
inside parties or between an outside and an inside party, so as to establish a three-party
conference call.
Soft Button Operation
1
Over
S1
S2
S3
If you make an intercom call and hear a busy tone;
1. Press the Over (S2) button.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• A three-party conference is now established.
Standard Operation
1
3
If you make an intercom call and hear a busy tone;
1. Dial 3.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• A three-party conference is now established.
To leave the conference
1. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
• The other two parties continue their conversation.
1
Conditions
• This feature does not work when “Data Line Security” or “Executive Busy Override Deny”
has been set at either or both of the other parties.
• “Class of Service” programming determines the extensions that can perform this feature.
• When a two-party call is changed to a three-party call and vice versa, a confirmation tone is
sent to all three parties. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Executive busy override deny
[505] Executive Busy Override
[506] Executive Busy Override Deny
[601] Class of Service
[612] Data Line Security
[990] System Additional Information, Field (13)
Feature References
Conference
Executive Busy Override Deny
4-70
DPT Features
4.2
E
DPT Features
Executive Busy Override Deny
Allows you to prohibit other extension users from intruding into your conversation.
Setting
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
7
3
3
1
3
2. Dial the feature number (733) and 1.
• You hear a confirmation tone.
• The display shows:
Busy Ovrde Deny
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Cancelling
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
7
3
3
2. Dial the feature number (733) and 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone.
• The display shows:
Busy Ovrde Allow
0
3
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Conditions
• “Class of Service” programming determines the extensions that can perform this feature.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[506] Executive Busy Override Deny
Feature References
Executive Busy Override — CO Line
Executive Busy Override — Extension
DPT Features
4-71
E
4.2
DPT Features
External Relay Control
A pre-assigned extension can switch on the relay connected to the system.
Relay on
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (67).
2
6
7
3
1
or
2
4
3. Dial the relay number (1) or (1 – 2).
- 1 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 1 – 2 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
(1 = Master, 2 = Slave)
• The display shows:
Relay Control x
— (x : relay number)
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Conditions
• “Class of Service” programming determines the extensions that can perform this feature.
• You can assign the duration time that the relay is on after entering the relay number. If you
assign the duration time zero, the relay is on while you are in off-hook status.
• One external relay can be connected per system.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, External relay on
[213] External Relay Connecting Time
[512] External Relay Access
4-72
DPT Features
4.2
E
DPT Features
External Ringer
Allows incoming calls (CO line, extension) to activate external ringer. You can answer the
ringer from any extension.
Setting
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (730).
2
7
3
0
3. Dial the external ringer number (1) or (1 – 2).
- 1 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 1 – 2 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
• You hear a confirmation tone.
• The display shows:
Central Ringer 1 — (x : ringer number)
3
1
or
2
4
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Cancelling
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (730) and 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone.
2
7
0
3
0
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
3
DPT Features
4-73
E
4.2
DPT Features
Answering
When hearing a tone from the external ringer;
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
2. Dial the feature number (47).
4
7
3
1
or
2
3. Dial the external ringer number (1) or (1 – 2).
- 1 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 1 – 2 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• The line (CO/extension) is connected and you can start talking.
Conditions
• The external ringer can be assigned as a destination of the following feature:
a) CO Line — DIL, Direct Dialing In
b) Extension — All incoming call
c) TAFAS
• You can assign to enable/disable the external ringer per extension/CO line.
• One ringer can be connected per system.
• The ringer can be assigned a floating number.*
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, External ringer, External ringer answer
[418] External Ringer Assignment
[813] Floating Number Assignment
* Floating Number (FN) is a virtual extension number for resources to make it appear to be an extension.
Refer to the Installation Manual.
4-74
DPT Features
4.2
F
DPT Features
Full One-Touch Dialing
This feature automatically activates the handsfree speakerphone and dials a phone number or
accesses a system feature at the touch of a button.
1. Press the flexible button assigned as the One-Touch Dialing, DSS,
REDIAL, or SAVE button.
• The SP-PHONE indicator light turns red.
• The CO or INTERCOM indicator light turns green.
1
Conditions
• This feature is also available with DSS buttons on a DSS Console.
• It is necessary to program full one-touch dialing mode.
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment — DSS Button, One-Touch Dialing Button, SAVE Button
(System Programming — [005] (Installation Manual) can be used for this assignment.)
Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment
DPT Features
4-75
H
4.2
DPT Features
Handsfree Answerback (for KX-T7230 and KX-T7235 only)
Allows you to answer an intercom call without lifting the handset.
Setting
When the SP-PHONE and the AUTO ANSWER/MUTE indicator is off;
1. Press the AUTO ANSWER/MUTE button.
• The AUTO ANSWER/MUTE indicator light turns on.
1
Cancelling
When the AUTO ANSWER/MUTE indicator is on;
1. Press the AUTO ANSWER/MUTE button.
• The AUTO ANSWER/MUTE indicator light turns off.
1
Conditions
• This feature overrides the “Alternate Calling — Ring/Voice” feature. Handsfree
conversation mode is established as soon as a confirmation tone is sent.
• This feature does not work for incoming CO calls or doorphone calls.
Feature References
Alternate Calling — Ring/Voice
4-76
DPT Features
4.2
H
DPT Features
Handsfree Operation
Allows you to dial and to talk to the other party without lifting the handset.
1. Press the SP-PHONE button.
• The microphone and the speaker are now activated and handsfree
operation is available.
1
Switching from handset to handsfree mode
1. Press the SP-PHONE button.
1
2. Hang up.
• Do not replace the handset without pressing the SP-PHONE
button, or the line will be disconnected.
2
Switching from handsfree to handset mode
1. Lift the handset.
1
Conditions
• Helpful hints for Handsfree operation:
— Use this unit in a quiet room for best performance.
— If the other party has difficulty hearing you, decrease the volume.
— If you and the other party speak at the same time, parts of your conversation will be lost.
To avoid this, speak alternately.
• Handsfree mode will be cancelled if you do not start dialing within ten seconds.
• The KX-T7250 has a MONITOR button instead of a SP-PHONE button. It can be used for
handsfree dialing, etc., but it cannot be used for handsfree conversation.
• You may also enable handsfree mode by pressing a CO or INTERCOM button directly.
• A single press of a One-Touch Dialing, DSS, REDIAL or SAVE button also provides
handsfree mode if “Full One-Touch Dialing” is enabled.
Feature References
Full One-Touch Dialing
DPT Features
4-77
H
4.2
DPT Features
Hotel Application
Room Management
Allows you to print out the information of a guest room (e.g. cleaning status of the room and
the total of the minibar charge) with a telephone in each room. The Messages No.6-No.9 can
be printed out.
<Example> Message 7: “Cleaned-up”
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (750) and 7.
2
7
5
0
3. Hang up or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
7
3
<Example> Message 8: “Minibar FR %%%.%”
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (750) and 8.
2
7
5
0
3. Enter the minibar charge.
8
3
4. Hang up or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
minibar charge
4
4-78
DPT Features
4.2
H
DPT Features
Data similar to below is printed out.
Date
Time
Ext
Depatment Code
CO
Dial Number
Duration
24.03.95 14:09
221
Cleaned-up
24.03.95 10:23
230
Minibar FR 535.5
Charge
Code CD
Conditions
• System Programming is required to program the messages.
• This operation is the same as the Absent Message feature.
• It is necessary to assign [990] “System Additional Information, Field (41)” through System
Programming beforehand.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[008] Absent Messages
[990] System Additional Information, Field (41)
DPT Features
4-79
I
4.2
DPT Features
Intercom Calling
Allows you to make a call to another extension.
Using the handset
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the extension number.
2
3. Start talking.
extension number
3
4. Hang up after completion of the conversation.
4
Using the Speakphones
1. Press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR or INTERCOM button.
1
INTERCOM
or
2. Dial the extension number.
2
3. Start talking.
extension number
3
4. Press the SP-PHONE button after completion of the conversation.
4
4-80
DPT Features
4.2
I
DPT Features
Using a DSS (Direct Station Selection) button
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Press the flexible button which is assigned as the DSS button.
2
3. Start talking.
3
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button after completion of the
conversation.
4
Conditions
• An extension number, and a name if programmed, are shown on the display PT during an
intercom call.
• DSS buttons can be assigned on a proprietary telephone (PT) or a DSS Console by
programming.
• After dialing an extension number, you will hear one of the following tones:
Ringback tone: Indicates that the destination extension is being called.
Confirmation tone: Indicates that you can perform voice calling.
Busy tone: Indicates that the destination extension is busy.
Do Not Disturb (DND) tone: Indicates that the destination extension has been set the
“Do Not Disturb (DND)” feature.
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment — DSS Button
(System Programming — [005] (Installation Manual) can be used for this assignment.)
• User Programming (Manager Programming) (Section 3)
[003] Extension Number Set
[004] Extension Name Set
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[003] Extension Number Set
[004] Extension Name Set
[100] Flexible Numbering, 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks
DPT Features
4-81
L
4.2
DPT Features
Live Call Screening (LCS)†
Allows a proprietary telephone user to monitor his voice mailbox while incoming callers are
leaving a message and, if desired, intercept the call.
The flowchart of the Live Call Screening (LCS) feature
Preparation
• Setting the Password
• Assigning the Live Call Screening (LCS) button (Station Programming)
• Selecting the mode, either Hands-free or Private (Station Programming)
When using the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button in the Private Mode:
To set LCS on
• Press LCS button.
• Enter the password.
To cancel LCS
Press LCS button.
Private Mode
Hands-free Mode
Having a conversation
with another party
(Alert Tone)
(Call Waiting Tone)
To monitor
(Automatic)
To cancel monitoring
Press FLASH or
LCS Cancel button.
Hang up*
1
To intercept call
Lift the handset, or
press LCS or
SP-PHONE button.
To monitor
Press the SP-PHONE
/MONITOR button.
To cancel monitoring
Press FLASH or
LCS Cancel button.
To stop the tone
Press FLASH or
press LCS Cancel button.
To intercept call
Lift the handset, or
press LCS or
SP-PHONE button.
*1: To hold the current call temporarily, press the HOLD button.
To return to the held call, press the CO button whose indicator light flashes green slowly.
4-82
DPT Features
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
4.2
L
DPT Features
When using the handset in the Private Mode;
To set LCS on
• Press LCS button.
• Enter the password.
Hands-free Mode
To cancel LCS
Press LCS button.
Private Mode
Having a conversation
with another party
(Alert Tone)
(Call Waiting Tone)
To monitor
(Automatic)
To cancel monitoring
Press FLASH or
LCS Cancel button.
Hang up*1
To intercept call
Lift the handset, or
press LCS or
SP-PHONE button.
To monitor
Lift the handset.
To cancel monitoring
Press FLASH or
LCS Cancel button,
or hang up.
To stop the tone
Press FLASH or
press LCS Cancel button.
To intercept call
Press LCS button.
*1: To hold the current call temporarily, press the HOLD button.
To return to the held call, press the CO button whose indicator light flashes green slowly.
DPT Features
4-83
L
4.2
DPT Features
Setting the password
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (799).
2
7
9
9
3. Enter the password (000 through 999).
3
4. Enter the same password again.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
password
4
Password: xxx
— (xxx: password)
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
(To change your password, you must follow the instructions below
for “Cancelling the password”)
password
5
Cancelling the password
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (799).
2
7
9
9
3. Enter the password (000 through 999).
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
3
Password Cancel
password
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
4
4-84
DPT Features
4.2
L
DPT Features
Setting Live Call Screening
1
LCS
2
When the telephone is idle and on-hook;
1. Press the Live Call Screening button.
• The display shows:
LCS
2. Enter the password (000 through 999).
• The Live Call Screening indicator light turns red.
password
Cancelling Live Call Screening
1
LCS
During the telephone is idle and on-hook;
1. Press the Live Call Screening button.
• The Live Call Screening indicator light turns off.
In the Hands-free mode;
When callers are connected to your voice mailbox, message recording is monitored
automatically through your extension speaker. While monitoring in the Hands-free mode, the
Live Call Screening indicator light flashes green slowly.
Having a conversation with the party
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button, or
press the Live Call Screening button.
• The Live Call Screening indicator light turns steady red from
slow green flashing.
• In Keep Recording mode, the Two-Way Record indicator turns
on. Pressing the Two-Way Record button cancels the recording
and the light turns off.
Stopping monitoring
1
1. Press the FLASH button or the Live Call Screening Cancel button.
• The Live Call Screening indicator light turns steady red from
slow flashing green.
DPT Features
4-85
L
4.2
DPT Features
In the Private mode;
When callers are connected to your voice mailbox, an alert tone is sent. The Live Call
Screening indicator light flashes green rapidly when a caller is connected to your voice
mailbox. (When using a single line telephone, which is connected with a proprietary
telephone in parallel, you hear ringing.)
Stopping the alert tone
1. Press the FLASH button or the Live Call Screening Cancel button.
• The Live Call Screening indicator light turns steady red from
rapid flashing green.
• The alert tone stops.
1
Monitoring the recording message
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button, the
flashing Live Call Screening button or INTERCOM button.
(When using a single line telephone, which is connected with a
proprietary telephone in parallel, only the handset is available).
• The Live Call Screening indicator light flashes green slowly.
• To stop monitoring, lift the handset. The FLASH button or the
Live Call Screening Cancel button can be also used to stop
monitoring. The Live Call Screening indicator light turns steady
red from slow flashing green.
1
Having a conversation with the party
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
LCS
4-86
DPT Features
2. Press the flashing Live Call Screening button. (When using a single
line telephone, which is connected with a proprietary telephone in
parallel, flash the hooking instead.)
• The Live Call Screening indicator light turns steady red from
slow green flashing.
• In Keep Recording mode, the Two-Way Record indicator light
turns on.
4.2
L
DPT Features
While having a conversation with another party;
When the extension user is having a conversation, a call waiting tone is sent. The Live Call
Screening indicator light flashes green rapidly.
- If you want to terminate the current call
Monitoring
1
1. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
• An alert tone is sent.
2
2. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
• Monitoring starts.
Having a conversation with the party
1. Press the flashing Live Call Screening button.
1
LCS
- If you want to hold the current call
Monitoring
1. Press the HOLD button.
1
2. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
• An alert tone is sent.
2
3
3. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
• Monitoring starts.
Having a conversation with the party
1. Press the flashing Live Call Screening button.
1
LCS
DPT Features
4-87
L
4.2
DPT Features
Conditions
• A flexible CO and DSS button can be assigned as a Live Call Screening button.
• The Live Call Screening indicator shows the feature status as below;
Red Steady on ..................Live Call Screening mode is on.
Off ...................................Live Call Screening mode is off.
Slow flashing green..........Live Call Screening is acting.**
Rapid flashing green ........Alert tone is ringing in the Private mode.**
** The DSS button indicator lights illuminate steady red while the Live Call Screening is acting.
• The Two-Way Record indicator shows the feature status as below;
On.....................................Recording the conversation
Off ....................................No recording
• Operator 1 can clear the password at any extension in Station Programming.
• While in Keep Recording mode, if you want to stop recording the conversation, press the
Two-Way Recording button.
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment — Live Call Screening Button, Live Call Screening Cancel
Button, Two-Way Record Button
(System Programming — [005] can be used for this assignment.)
Live Call Screen Password Control
Live Call Screening Private Mode Selection
• System Programming
[617] Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment
4-88
DPT Features
4.2
L
DPT Features
Lockout
If one party in a conversation goes on-hook, they are both disconnected from the speech path
automatically. Reorder tone is sent to the off-hook party before it is disconnected. No
operation is necessary.
Log-In / Log-Out
Allows you to assign the log-in mode or log-out mode within the hunting or UCD group.
When in the log-out mode, you can leave the group temporarily, preventing the hunting calls
from being sent to your extension.
Using the Log-In / Log-Out button
Log-In / Log-Out
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Press the flexible button which is assigned as the Log-In/Log-Out
button.
– Log-In mode: The indicator light is off.
– Log-Out mode: The indicator light is steady red.
– Calls in the UCD queue: The indicator light is flashing red
moderately.
2
3
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Using the feature number
Log-In
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Dial the feature number (45) and 1.
• You hear a confirmation tone.
• The display shows:
4
3
5
1
Log-In
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
DPT Features
4-89
L
4.2
DPT Features
Log-Out
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
4
0
5
2. Dial the feature number (45) and 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone.
• The display shows:
Log-Out
3
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Conditions
• The Log-In / Log-Out button should be assigned to a flexible CO button.
• Default is “Log-In” mode.
• There should be at least one extension that is in log-in mode. Only one log-in extension
cannot be set in log-out mode.
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment — Log-In / Log-Out Button
(System Programming — [005] (Installation Manual) can be used for this assignment.)
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, UCD log-in/log-out
Feature References
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Station Hunting (→ see Installation Manual)
4-90
DPT Features
4.2
M
DPT Features
Message Waiting
Allows you to leave a message for another extension. The message waiting lamp
(MESSAGE indicator) gives a visual indication that a message has been received.
Setting
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (70) and 1.
2
7
0
1
3
3. Dial the extension number where calls will be left.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
extension number
4
1
or
4
If the called extension is busy;
1. Press the MESSAGE button or dial 4.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
2
2. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Cancelling
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Dial the feature number (70) and 0.
7
0
3
0
3. Dial the extension number where you left a message.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
extension number
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
4
DPT Features
4-91
M
4.2
DPT Features
Checking and Selecting a message by the receiver
If there is any message, the message waiting lamp (MESSAGE indicator)
light is on.
When the telephone is idle and on-hook;
1. Press the MESSAGE button repeatedly until the desired message
appears.
• The stored messages are shown on the display in the order they
were received.
<Example>
When Tony at extension 123 left a message, the display shows:
1
123:Tony
Calling back the message sender
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
• You hear a dial tone 4.*
2
2. Press the MESSAGE button or dial the feature number (70) and 2.
• If you have more than one message at your extension, the line is
connected to the message sender which you select.
3
3. Start talking.
• The message is cleared after the conversation.
Clearing all messages by the message receiver
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
• You hear a dial tone 4.*
1
2. Dial the feature number (70) and 0.
2
7
0
0
3. Dial your (message receiver’s) extension number.
• All messages are cleared.
3
your extension number
Conditions
• The system supports a maximum of 128 simultaneous messages. If you try to set the 129th
message, you hear a reorder tone.
4-92
DPT Features
4.2
M
DPT Features
• A flexible button on the KX-T7250 (no MESSAGE button provided) can be assigned as the
MESSAGE button.
• If the MESSAGE button is not provided nor assigned, dial tone 4* after going off-hook
informs you of a message waiting.
• If multiple messages are left at your extension, calling back is executed in the receiving
order.
• If you select a specific message to call back, calling back is executed in the cyclic order
starting with the selected one.
• With the KX-T7235, you can set or cancel this feature with the display operation.
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment — Message Waiting (MESSAGE) Button
(System Programming — [005] (Installation Manual) can be used for this assignment.)
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Message waiting
[214] Message Waiting Ring Interval Time
[990] System Additional Information, Filed (9)
Feature References
System Feature Access Menu — Massage Waiting (4.4/Special Display Features)
* One of the dial tone. Refer to “Tone List” in the Appendix (Section 8).
Microphone Mute (for KX-T7230 and KX-T7235 only)
Allows you to turn off the microphone so that you can consult privately with others in the
room.
Setting
While having a conversation in handsfree mode;
1. Press the AUTO ANSWER/MUTE button.
• The AUTO ANSWER/MUTE indicator light flashes red slowly.
1
Cancelling
When microphone mute is established;
1. Press the AUTO ANSWER/MUTE button.
• The AUTO ANSWER/MUTE indicator light turns off.
1
Conditions
• This feature is effective for the microphone only; your voice will only be muted during a
handsfree conversation.
DPT Features
4-93
N
4.2
DPT Features
Night Service
This system supports both the Night and Day modes of operation. System operation for
originating and receiving calls can be different in day and night modes. Toll restriction calls
can be programmed to prevent unauthorised toll calls at night. Day/Night mode can be
switched either automatically at a pre-assigned time or manually at anytime desired. If your
extension is assigned as an operator, you can perform the operation using the display.
Automatic Night Service: your system will switch the Day/Night mode at the
programmed time each day.
Manual Night Service: you can switch the Day/Night mode at anytime desired.
Automatic Night Service
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (78).
2
8
7
3. Dial 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone.
• The display shows:
Auto Mode
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
3
0
4
Manual Night Service
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (78).
2
8
7
3
1
or
4
2
3. Dial 1 or 2.
- 1 : from Night mode to Day mode
- 2 : from Day mode to Night mode
• You hear a confirmation tone.
• The display shows:
Night Mode
or
Day Mode
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
4-94
DPT Features
4.2
N
DPT Features
Confirming the current mode (with a display PT only)
When the telephone is idle;
1. Press #.
• The display shows the current mode for 5 seconds.
1
Day Mode
Night Mode
— (When Manual Day mode has
been set.)
— (When Manual Night mode has
been set.)
Day(Auto)
— (When Automatic Day mode has
been set.)
Night(Auto)
— (When Automatic Night mode
has been set.)
Conditions
• The following items have separate day and night programming:
1) Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment
2) Direct In Lines (DIL)
3) Doorphone Ringing Assignment
4) Intercept Routing
5) Ringing, Delayed
6) Toll Restriction Level
7) Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing
8) Operator Assignment
• “Class of Service” programming determines the extensions that can perform this feature.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Night service mode
[102] Day/Night Service Starting Time
[513] Night Service Access
[601] Class of Service
Feature References
CO Line Connection Assignment — Outgoing (→ see Installation Manual)
Direct In Lines (DIL) (→ see Installation Manual)
Doorphone Call
Intercept Routing (→ see Installation Manual)
Ringing, Delayed (→ see Installation Manual)
System Feature Access Menu — Night Service (4.4/Special Display Features)
Toll Restriction (→ see Installation Manual)
DPT Features
4-95
N
4.2
DPT Features
Notebook Function
Allows you to store an outside phone number in memory during a conversation with an
outside party or on-hook status. The stored number is dialed automatically with simple
operation.
Storing
1
...
2
...
While having a conversation or in on-hook status;
1. Press the AUTO DIAL/STORE button.
• The AUTO DIAL/STORE indicator light turns red.
2. Press the AUTO DIAL/STORE button again.
• The AUTO DIAL/STORE indicator light flashes red.
3. Dial the desired phone number.
3
phone number
4. Press the flexible button which is assigned as the SAVE button.
4
Dialing
— When you want to dial the stored number;
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
2. Press the flexible button which is assigned as the SAVE button.
• The CO indicator light turns green.
Conditions
• When you dial the stored telephone number of an outside party, you do not need to dial (0
or 81 through 88) as the leading digit.
• The same CO line is selected when redialing the number. If the line is busy, the busy tone is
sent.
• The pause, if programmed, can be inserted between the CO line access number and the
following phone number (Automatic Pause Insertion).
• Up to 24 digits long can be stored in the notebook function.
• “ ” and “#” are counted as one digit.
4-96
DPT Features
4.2
O
DPT Features
Off-Hook Monitor (for KX-T7230 and KX-T7235 only)
Allows you to monitor your conversation through the built-in speaker, when the existing call
is using the handset.
Setting
1
While having a conversation with the handset;
1. Press the SP-PHONE button.
• The conversation is monitored.
• The conversation can be continued also with the handset.
Cancelling
1
When off-hook monitor is established;
1. Press the SP-PHONE button.
• The conversation through the speakers is off.
• You can continue the conversation with the handset.
DPT Features
4-97
O
4.2
DPT Features
One-Touch Dialing
Offers you one-touch access to a destination or a system feature. This is done by storing a
telephone number or a feature number of up to sixteen digits in a One-Touch Dialing button.
Dialing
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Press the flexible button which is assigned as the One-Touch
Dialing button.
Conditions
• To store numbers, refer to the Station Programming.
• You may press the CO button to select the desired CO line directly before pressing the OneTouch Dialing button.
• “Speed Dialing,” “One-Touch Dialing,” “Redial, Last Number/Saved Number” and manual
dialing can be used together.
• It is possible to store a number consisting of seventeen digits or more by dividing it and
storing it in two One-Touch Dialing buttons.
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment — One Touch Dialing Button
(System Programming — [005] (Installation Manual) can be used for this assignment.)
4-98
DPT Features
4.2
O
DPT Features
Operator Call
Allows you to call an operator within the system. There can be up to two extensions
assigned as Operator 1 and 2. If there is only one operator or if you do not specify the
operator, you should generate the General call. If you want to specify the operator, you
should generate the Specific call.
General call
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (9).
2
9
Specific call
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (61) for Operator 1, or (62) for Operator 2.
2
1
6
or
6
2
Conditions
• If you generate the General call, Operator 2 will receive your call if Operator 1 is busy.
• If no operator is assigned, this feature is rejected with reorder tone.
DPT Features
4-99
O
4.2
DPT Features
Outward Dialing, Line Access — SUMMARY
A CO line can be accessed in the following ways:
Line Access, Automatic
Dial the feature number (0).
or
Press a Loop-CO (L-CO) button
Line Access, CO Line group
Dial the feature number (8) and a
CO line group number (1-8).
or
Press a Group-CO (G-CO) button.
Line Access, Individual
Press a Single-CO (S-CO) button.
Conditions
• The CO button assignment on your telephone can be re-arranged as required. Refer to
“Flexible Button Assignment” in Station Programming (Section 2).
• The CO button (L-CO, G-CO or S-CO) must be programmed prior to use.
• After dialing the feature number or pressing the CO button, you will hear one of the
following tones:
Dial tone: Indicates that an idle CO line is captured.
CO xx
— is shown on the display. (xx: CO line number)
Busy tone: Indicates that the selected CO line is busy.
— is shown on the display.
CO in Use
Reorder tone:
1) Indicates that the CO line you have attempted to access is not assigned.
CO Not Assigned — is shown on the display.
2) Indicates that access to CO lines is denied.
— is shown on the display.
Restricted
•
4-100
Restricted
shown on the display, is caused by one of the following:
— The extension has been locked by the owner (Electronic Station Lockout) or the operator
(Remote Station Lock Control).
— The extension may be restricted by the account code mode, “Verified - All Calls” or
“Verified - Toll Restriction Override.”
— The extension may be restricted from making toll calls (Toll Restriction).
DPT Features
4.2
O
DPT Features
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment — Loop-CO (L-CO) Button, Group CO (G-CO) Button,
Single-CO (S-CO) Button
(System Programming — [005] (Installation Manual) can be used for this assignment.)
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[103] Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment
— (Used for “Line Access, Automatic” only.)
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Group Assignment — Day/Night
Feature References
Account Code Entry
Electronic Station Lockout
Remote Station Lock Control (4.3/Operator Service Features)
Toll Restriction (→ see Installation Manual)
Line Access, Automatic
Allows you to select an available CO line automatically.
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Dial the feature number (0).
• You hear a dial tone.
• The selected CO indicator light turns green.
0
3
3. Dial the phone number.
• The display shows the phone number.
phone number
4
4. Start talking.
5
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button after completion of the
conversation.
Conditions
• You may press the L-CO button directly instead of steps 1 and 2.
DPT Features
4-101
O
4.2
DPT Features
Line Access, CO Line Group
Allows you to select an idle CO line within the designated CO line group. Through
programming, CO lines can be divided into eight line groups.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (8).
2
8
3. Dial a CO line group number (1 through 8).
• You hear a dial tone.
• The selected CO indicator light turns green.
3
CO line group number
4
4. Dial the phone number.
• The display shows the phone number.
5. Start talking.
phone number
5
6. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button after completion of the
conversation.
6
Conditions
• You may press the G-CO button directly instead of steps 1, 2 and 3.
4-102
DPT Features
4.2
O
DPT Features
Line Access, Individual
Allows you to select the desired CO line without dialing the line access code.
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Press the CO button.
• You hear a dial tone.
• The CO indicator light turns green.
CO
3
3. Dial the phone number.
• The display shows the phone number.
phone number
4. Start talking.
4
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button after completion of the
conversation.
5
Condition
• You may skip step 1 and press CO button directly.
DPT Features
4-103
P
4.2
DPT Features
Paging — SUMMARY
Paging allows you to make a voice announcement to multiple persons at the same time. Your
message is announced over built-in speakers of proprietary telephones (PT) and/or external
speakers (External Pagers). The paged person can answer your page from a nearby
telephone. There are three types of paging as shown below. You can select the appropriate
type according to your needs.
Type
Paging — All
Paging — External
Description
Paging through both the built-in speakers
and external pagers.
Paging through all the external pagers
simultaneously.
Paging to a specific external pager.
Paging to all groups (all extensions)
simultaneously.
Paging — Group
Paging to a particular group of extensions
using the built-in speakers.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
To answer the page, refer to “Paging — ANSWER.”
If you want to deny the page, refer to “Paging — DENY.”
The paged extension users hear a confirmation tone before the voice announcement.
The confirmation tone from external pagers (External Pager Confirmation Tone) is audible
at the paged side, before the voice announcement. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
• A confirmation tone is audible before making the voice announcement. Eliminating the tone
is programmable.
• With the KX-T7235, you can execute “Paging” feature with the display operation.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering/Paging — external, Paging — external answer
[602] Extension Group Assignment — (Used for “Paging — Group” only.)
[805] External Pager Confirmation Tone
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References
Paging — ANSWER
Paging — DENY
System Feature Access Menu — Paging — External (4.4/Special Display Features)
System Feature Access Menu — Paging — Group (4.4/Special Display Features)
4-104
DPT Features
4.2
P
DPT Features
Paging — All
Allows you to make a voice announcement to all extensions. Your message is announced
from the built-in speakers of the proprietary telephones (PT) and from the external pagers.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (63 or 64) and .
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• The display shows:
All Call Page
3. Make the announcement.
2
6
3
or
6
4
3
4. Wait for an answer and talk.
4
Paging — External
Allows you to make a voice announcement over external pagers.
To access all external pagers
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
6
3
4
4
0
2. Dial the feature number (64) and 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• The display shows:
Extrnl Page All
3. Make the announcement.
4. Wait for an answer and talk.
DPT Features
4-105
P
4.2
DPT Features
To access a particular pager only
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (64).
2
4
6
3
external pager number
3
3. Dial the external pager number (1 – 2) or (1 – 4) you wish to use.
– 1 through 2 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
– 1 through 4 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• The display shows:
Extrnl Page x
External pager number
4. Make the announcement.
4
5. Wait for an answer and talk.
Conditions
• If the designated pager is being used, busy tone is heard.
• The paging priorities are as follows:
1) TAFAS (Trunk (CO Line) Answer From Any Station)
2) Paging — External
3) Background Music (BGM) — External
If a higher priority page is requested when a lower priority page is active, the higher priority
overrides the lower one.
Feature References
Background Music (BGM) — External (4.3/Operator Service Features)
Trunk (CO Line) Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
4-106
DPT Features
4.2
P
DPT Features
Paging — Group
Allows you to select an extension group and make a voice announcement. Paging all groups
(8 groups) simultaneously is also available. The announcement can be heard through the
built-in speakers of the extensions only.
To access all groups simultaneously
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Dial the feature number (63) and 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• The display shows:
Group Page All
3. Make the announcement.
6
3
0
3
4
4. Wait for an answer and talk.
To access a particular group of extensions
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Dial the feature number (63).
3
6
3
extension group number
3. Dial the extension group number (1 through 8).
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional)
• The display shows:
Group Page X
4
Paged group number (1 through 8)
4. Make the announcement.
5
5. Wait for an answer and talk.
Conditions
• There is a maximum of eight extension groups. “Paging — Group” to different groups can
be performed simultaneously.
DPT Features
4-107
P
4.2
DPT Features
Paging — ANSWER
A page sent to the built-in speakers or the external pagers can be answered by any extension
in the system.
Answering a page sent to the built-in speaker
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Dial the feature number (43).
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• You can start talking.
4
3
Answering a page sent to a particular external pager
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (44).
2
4
4
4
external pager number
3. Dial the corresponding external pager number (1 – 2) or (1 – 4).
- 1 – 2 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 1 – 4 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• You can start talking.
Conditions
• Only extensions within the paged group can answer “Paging — Group.”
• Confirmation tone is audible when the page is answered. Eliminating the tone is
programmable.
• With the KX-T7235, you can answer the “Paging” feature with the display operation.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References
System Feature Access Menu — Answering, Paging (4.4/Special Display Features)
4-108
DPT Features
4.2
P
DPT Features
Paging — DENY
A page sent to the built-in speaker can be denied by any extension in the system.
Setting
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Dial the feature number (721) and 1.
• The display shows:
7
2
1
1
Paging Deny On
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
3
Cancelling
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Dial the feature number (721) and 0.
• The display shows:
Paging Deny Off
7
2
1
0
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
3
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Paging – deny
DPT Features
4-109
P
4.2
DPT Features
Paging and Transfer
You can transfer a call using the paging function (Paging — All, Paging — External, or
Paging — Group).
Using Paging — All
While having a conversation;
1. Press the TRANSFER button.
• You hear a dial tone.
• The other party is placed on hold.
1
2
6
3
2. Dial the feature number (63 or 64) and .
• The feature number can be the one for either group or external
paging.
or
6
4
3
3. Make the announcement after hearing a confirmation tone (optional).
4. Wait for the other party to answer.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
4
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
• The held party and the paged extension are connected and can
start conversation.
5
Using Paging — External: to all external pagers
While having a conversation;
1. Press the TRANSFER button.
• You hear a dial tone.
• The other party is placed on hold.
1
2
6
4
0
2. Dial the feature number (64) and 0.
3
3. Make the announcement after hearing a confirmation tone (optional).
4-110
4
4. Wait for the other party to answer.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
5
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
• The held party and the paged extension are connected and can
start conversation.
DPT Features
4.2
P
DPT Features
Using Paging — External: to a particular external pager
While having a conversation;
1. Press the TRANSFER button.
• You hear a dial tone.
• The other party is placed on hold.
1
2
6
4
2. Dial the feature number (64).
3
external pager number
4
3. Dial an external pager number (1 – 2) or (1 – 4).
- 1 – 2 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 1 – 4 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
4. Make the announcement after hearing a confirmation tone (optional).
5
5. Wait for the other party to answer.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
6
6. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
• The held party and the paged extension are connected and can
start conversation.
Using Paging — Group: to all extension groups
While having a conversation;
1. Press the TRANSFER button.
• You hear a dial tone.
• The other party is placed on hold.
1
2
6
3
0
2. Dial the feature number (63) and 0.
3
3. Make the announcement after hearing a confirmation tone (optional).
4
4. Wait for the other party to answer.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
5
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
• The held party and the paged extension are connected and can
start conversation.
DPT Features
4-111
P
4.2
DPT Features
Using Paging — Group: to a particular extension group
While having a conversation;
1. Press the TRANSFER button.
• You hear a dial tone.
• The other party is placed on hold.
1
2
3
6
2. Dial the feature number (63).
3
3. Dial a paging group number (1 through 8).
paging group number
4
4. Make the announcement after hearing a confirmation tone (optional).
5
5. Wait for the other party to answer.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
6
6. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
• The held party and the paged extension are connected and can
start conversation.
Conditions
• A confirmation tone is audible before making the voice announcement. Eliminating the tone
is programmable.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[602] Extension Group Assignment
[805] External Pager Confirmation Tone
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
4-112
DPT Features
4.2
P
DPT Features
Paralleled Telephone Connection
Your extension can be connected in parallel with a single line telephone (SLT). When a
parallel connection is made, either telephone can be used.
Setting
To enable SLT ringing;
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
6
9
1
3
2. Dial the feature number (69) and 1.
• You hear a confirmation tone.
• The display shows:
Parallel On
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Cancelling
To disable SLT ringing;
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
6
9
3
0
2. Dial the feature number (69) and 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone.
• The display shows:
Parallel Off
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Conditions
• Default is “Parallel Off.”
• The PT can be used to perform normal operations whether or not the SLT is enabled.
• When receiving a call:
— If SLT ringing is enabled, then both the PT and the SLT ring except when the PT is in
“Handsfree Answerback” mode or Voice-Calling mode with the “Alternate Calling —
Ring/Voice” feature.
— If SLT ringing is disabled, then the PT rings but the SLT does not. However the SLT can
answer the call.
DPT Features
4-113
P
4.2
DPT Features
• When the SLT is in use, the display and the indicators of the PT will show in the same way
as if the PT is in use.
• If you go off-hook while your paralleled telephone is in use, the call will switch over to
your telephone, and vice versa.
• “XDP*” feature is available. Refer to the Installation Manual.
• With the KX-T7235, you can execute this feature with the display operation.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Parallel telephone mode
Feature References
Alternate Calling — Ring/Voice
EXtra Device Port (XDP) (→ see Installation Manual)
Handsfree Answerback
System Feature Access Menu — Paralleled Telephone Connection (4.4/Special Display
Features)
* XDP (eXtra Device Port) expands the number of telephones available in the system by allowing an extension
port to contain two telephones.
4-114
DPT Features
4.2
P
DPT Features
Pickup Dialing (Hot Line)
Allows you to make an outgoing call by lifting the handset.
Programming the phone number
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Dial the feature number (74) and 2.
7
4
2
3. Dial the phone number and #.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3
phone number and #
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
4
Setting
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Dial the feature number (74) and 1.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
7
4
1
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
3
Cancelling
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Dial the feature number (74) and 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
7
3
4
0
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
DPT Features
4-115
P
4.2
DPT Features
Dialing
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
• Wait for the answer and talk.
1
Conditions
• This feature does not work if you answer an incoming call or retrieve a call on hold.
• Up to sixteen digits, consisting of “0 through 9” and “ ,” can be stored. “#” cannot be
stored.
• During the waiting time after going off-hook, you can dial another party, overriding this
feature. The waiting time is programmable.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Pickup dialing program
[204] Pickup Dial Waiting Time
4-116
DPT Features
4.2
P
DPT Features
Predial Preparation (for KX-T7230 and KX-T7235 only)
Allows you to confirm the phone number with the LCD before the line is connected.
1. Dial the phone number.
• The display shows the dialed telephone number.
<Example>
1
phone number
2
and re-dial
012345678
If you want to change the current entry;
2. Dial and re-dial.
• By pressing , the number at the right-hand edge is deleted.
<Example>
01234567
3
• By pressing the FLASH button, all dialed number is cleared.
3. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button, or press the CO
button.
• The system hunts the CO line and sends the dialed number.
Conditions
• Pressing CO button will cancel this feature if entered number does not have line access code
(0 or 81 through 88).
• Available only for proprietary telephone with LCD.
• If you press “ ” or “#” as a first digit of the phone number, this feature does not work.
• This feature will cancel, if you do the following operation during entering the phone
number.
a) Pressing the FLASH button.
b) Answering the incoming call (off-hook or pressing any key)
c) Retrieving the held call (off-hook or pressing any key)
DPT Features
4-117
R
4.2
DPT Features
Redial, Automatic (for KX-T7230 and KX-T7235 only)
It is possible to redial the last dialed number, saved number, “Call Log, Outgoing,” “Call
Log, Incoming,” “Notebook Function” in the handsfree mode. Redial will be repeated a
programmed number of times until the called party answers.
1
1. Press the SP-PHONE button.
2
2. Press the REDIAL button.
Conditions
• Redialing times can be changed (1 through 12) by System Programming.
• If there is an incoming call during redialing, the redialing process will be delayed until the
termination of the incoming call.
• If any key operation is done during Automatic Redial, this function is canceled.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[209] Automatic Redial Repeat Times
[210] Automatic Redial Interval Time
Feature References
Call Log, Incoming
Call Log, Outgoing (4.4/Special Display Features)
Notebook Function
Redial, Last Number
Redial, Saved Number
4-118
DPT Features
4.2
R
DPT Features
Redial, Last Number
Automatically saves the last CO call number you dialed and allows you to make the same
outgoing call again.
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
2
2. Press the REDIAL button.
Conditions
• Up to twenty-four digits can be stored and redialed, not counting the CO line access code.
• “ ,” “#,” and “PAUSE” are counted as one digit.
• The memorized telephone number is replaced by a new one if at least one digit to be sent to
a CO line is dialed. Dialing a CO line access code alone does not change the memorized
number.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Last number redial
Feature References
Redial, Automatic
DPT Features
4-119
R
4.2
DPT Features
Redial, Saved Number
The desired phone number can be stored and then redialed. You can store it while in
conversation on a CO line. The saved number can be redialed many times until another one
is stored.
Storing
While having a conversation or hearing a busy tone;
1. Press the AUTO DIAL/STORE button.
1
...
2
2. Press the flexible button which is assigned as the SAVE button.
Dialing
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Press the flexible button which is assigned as the SAVE button.
2
Conditions
• Up to twenty-four digits can be stored and redialed, not counting the CO line access code.
• “ ,” “#,” and “PAUSE” are counted as one digit.
• A flexible button can be assigned as the SAVE button.
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment — SAVE Button
(System Programming — [005] (Installation Manual) can be used for this assignment.)
Feature References
Redial, Automatic
4-120
DPT Features
4.2
S
DPT Features
Secret Dialing
Allows you to conceal all or part(s) of a “System Speed Dialing” or “One-Touch Dialing”
number assigned to a flexible button on a PT and DSS console which normally appears on
the display. Additionally, KX-T7235 Model Telephones are capable of Secret Dialing for
“Station Speed Dialing” numbers.
1
INTERCOM
When storing the phone number;
1. Press the INTERCOM button before and after the part you wish to
conceal.
• The display shows:
<Example>
(— “201” is not shown on the
0-1-[201]...
display when you dial.)
Conditions
• The secret code, “[” or “]” (pressing the INTERCOM button), is counted as one digit.
• You can conceal one or more parts in a telephone number.
• If the phone number “0-1-[201]-431-2111” has been stored, the display shows the following
when the call is made:
-1-...-431-2111
• You can select whether the concealed part will be printed out by SMDR through System
Programming.
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Buttons Assignment — One-Touch Dialing Button
(System Programming — [005] (Installation Manual) can be used for this assignment.)
• System Programming — Installation manual
[001] System Speed Dialing Number Set
[990] System Additional Information, Field (26)
Feature References
One-Touch Dialing
Station Speed Dialing
System Speed Dialing
DPT Features
4-121
S
4.2
DPT Features
Station Feature Clear
Allows you to reset the following station features to the default settings.
a) Absent Message Capability
b) Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)
c) Background Music (BGM)
d) Call Forwarding
e) Call Log, Incoming
f) Call Pickup Deny
g) Call Waiting
h) Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
i) Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)
j) Do Not Disturb (DND)
k) Executive Busy Override Deny
l) External Ringer
m) Log-In
n) Message Waiting – (All messages will be removed)
o) Paging — DENY
p) Paralleled Telephone Connection
q) Pickup Dialing (Hot Line) – (The stored telephone number will be removed)
r) Timed Reminder
Clearing current feature setting
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
7
9
0
2. Dial the feature number (790).
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
Ext Data Clear
3
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
4-122
DPT Features
4.2
S
DPT Features
Station Speed Dialing
Allows you to store up to ten speed dial numbers which are only available to that extension
user.
Storing the phone number
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (60).
2
6
0
3. Dial the Station Speed Dial number (0 through 9).
3
Station Speed Dial number
4. Dial the desired number and #.
• You hear a confirmation tone.
4
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
desired number and #
5
Dialing
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (6 ).
2
6
3. Dial the Station Speed Dial number (0 through 9).
3
Station Speed Dial number
DPT Features
4-123
S
4.2
DPT Features
Conditions
• You can store an extension number, a telephone number, or a feature number of up to
sixteen digits.
• To store the telephone number of an outside party, the line access code (0 or 81 through
88) must be stored as the leading digit.
• Valid digits are “0 through 9” and “ ” and PAUSE.
• “Station Speed Dialing” can be followed by manual dialing to supplement the dialed
digits.
• With the KX-T7235, you can execute this feature with the display operation.
Feature References
Station Speed Dialing (4.4/Special Display Features)
4-124
DPT Features
4.2
S
DPT Features
System Speed Dialing
Allows you to make CO calls using speed dial numbers previously programmed. This
system supports five hundred speed dial numbers which are available to all extension users.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
• The INTERCOM indicator light turns green.
1
2
...
3
2. Press the AUTO DIAL/STORE button.
• The AUTO DIAL/STORE indicator light turns on.
• You hear no tone.
3. Dial the System Speed Dial number (000 through 499).
• The AUTO DIAL/STORE indicator light turns off.
System Speed Dial number
Conditions
• System Speed Dial numbers must be stored either through Manager or System
Programming.
• “Speed Dialing,” “One-Touch Dialing,” “Redial, Last Number/Saved Number” and manual
dialing can be used together.
• Continuous use of a speed dial number is possible, if the number is divided to store.
<Example>
If the number is divided and stored in System Speed Dial numbers 001 and 002;
Press: [AUTO DIAL/STORE] [0] [0] [1] [AUTO DIAL/STORE] [0] [0] [2]
• The dialed number appears on the display.
• You may press the CO button to select the desired CO line before pressing the AUTO
DIAL/STORE button.
• With the KX-T7235, you can execute this feature with the display operation.
• “Class of Service” programming determines the extensions that can perform this feature.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[001] System Speed Dialing Number Set
[002] System Speed Dialing Name Set
[006] Operator/Manager Extension Assignment
[601] Class of Service
Feature References
System Speed Dialing (4.4/Special Display Features)
DPT Features
4-125
S
4.2
DPT Features
System Working Report
Allows you to print the system’s working state recorded in the system. The extensions which
are assigned as a manager and operators can only perform this feature.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (794).
2
7
9
4
3
1
or
2
3. Dial 1 or 0.
- 1 : print out the data
- 0 : clear the data
• You hear a confirmation tone.
• The display shows:
SWR Print-out
— (when printing out)
4
SWR CLEAR
— (when clearing)
4. Lift the handset or press SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Conditions
• You must connect the printer to the system when you print out the data.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, System working report printout / clear
[806]–[807] EIA (RS-232C) parameters — Port 1/Port 2
Feature References
System Working Report (→ see Installation Manual)
4-126
DPT Features
4.2
T
DPT Features
Terminate
Allows you to terminate the current CO call and originating another call without hanging up.
Soft Button Operation
While having a conversation with an outside party;
1. Press the TRM (S2) button.
• You hear an internal dial tone.
1
TRM
S1
S2
S3
2. Dial the line access code (0 or 81 through 88), or press a CO button.
2
CO
or
3. Dial the phone number.
line access code
3
phone number
Standard Operation
While hearing any tone, dialing, or talking;
1. Press the flexible button which is assigned as the TERMINATE
button.
• You hear a dial tone.
1
2
2. Dial the phone number.
phone number
Conditions
• When you dial the telephone number of an outside party, you must dial the line access code
(0 or 81 through 88) as the leading digit.
• Pressing the Terminate button disconnects the conversation, outputs an SMDR record.
• The Terminate button can be assigned to a flexible CO button.
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment — Terminate Button
(System Programming — [005] (Installation Manual) can be used for this assignment.)
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[414] Disconnect Time
DPT Features
4-127
T
4.2
DPT Features
Timed Reminder
Each extension can be set to generate an alarm ringing at a preset time as a wake up or
reminder. You can set to be activated once or everyday at a preset time. If you go off-hook
during the alarm ringing, Time Announce or the dial tone 3 is audible.
Setting
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (76) and 1.
2
7
6
1
3. Enter the hour (00 through 23) and the minute (00 through 59).
3
4. Dial 0 for a one time alarm setting,*1 or dial 1 for a daily alarm
setting.*2
• Time Announce or confirmation tone is audible.
*1 You will hear an alarm ringing at the preset time and then the setting is cleared.
*2 You will hear an alarm ringing at the preset time every day until the setting is
hour and minute
4
0
or
1
changed or cancelled.
5
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Cancelling
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
7
6
0
2. Dial the feature number (76) and 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
Alarm Cancelled
3
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
4-128
DPT Features
4.2
T
DPT Features
Checking the setting time (with a display PT only)
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
1
2
7
6
2
3
2. Dial the feature number (76) and 2.
<Example>
If “10:10” has been set, the display shows:
Alarm
10:10
— only one time
or
Alarm
10:10*
— every day
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
Stopping the alarm ringing
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
• Time Announce or the dial tone 3 is audible.
1
Conditions
• The system clock must be set beforehand.
• The alarm ringing continues for thirty seconds.
• If an alarm time has not been set, the display shows the following:
Alarm Not Stored
• If you are receiving an incoming call during the alarm, ringing starts after the alarm stops
sounding.
• When the preset time comes while receiving a call, the alarm starts after the conversation.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Timed reminder set/cancel/confirm
Feature References
Hotel Application — Timed Reminder, Remote (4.3/Operator Service Features)
DPT Features
4-129
T
4.2
DPT Features
Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry
Allows you to override toll restriction temporarily to make a toll call (including a call
originated by “System Speed Dialing”) from a toll-restricted telephone. You can carry out
this feature by entering an appropriate account code before dialing a telephone number. For
operation procedure, refer to “Account Code Entry.”
Conditions
• This feature changes the toll restriction level to level 2. This can be used by extension users
assigned restriction levels from 3 through 8. Levels 1 and 2 are not changed.
• A “Class of Service” which is assigned “Account Code Entry — Verified - Toll Restriction
Override” mode permits the class members to override their toll restrictions.
• Up to forty account codes can be programmed for Verified mode.
• If you enter no account code or an invalid account code, standard toll restriction is done.
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment — Account Button
(System Programming — [005] (Installation Manual) can be used for this assignment.)
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Account code entry
[105] Account Codes
[500]–[501] Toll Restriction Level — Day/Night
[508] Account Code Entry Mode
[509]–[510] Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing — Day/Night
[601] Class of Service
Feature References
Account Code Entry
System Speed Dialing
Toll Restriction (→ see Installation Manual)
4-130
DPT Features
4.2
T
DPT Features
Trunk (CO Line) Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
Ringing from the external speaker or external ringer indicates an incoming CO call. TAFAS
allows this call to be answered from any extension.
Answering a tone from the external pager;
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (44).
2
4
4
3
external pager number
3. Dial the external pager number (1 – 2) or (1 – 4).
- 1 – 2 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 1 – 4 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• The line is connected and you can start talking.
Answering a ring from the external ringer;
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (47).
2
4
7
3
1
or
2
3. Dial the external ringer number (1) or (1 – 2).
- 1 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 1 – 2 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• The line is connected and you can start talking.
Conditions
• This feature can be used in the following cases:
a) The floating number* of an external device is assigned as the DIL 1:1 destination.
In this case, all the incoming calls on the specified line will be signaled.
b) The floating number* of an external device is dialed as the Direct Dialing In (DDI)
destination.
c) The floating number* of an external device is assigned as the Intercept Routing
destination. In this case, incoming calls redirected to the destination will be signaled.
• A confirmation tone is audible before being connected to the caller. Eliminating the tone is
programmable.
DPT Features
4-131
T
4.2
DPT Features
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Paging
[407]–[408] DIL 1:1 Extension — Day/Night
[409]–[410] Intercept Extension — Day/Night
[813] Floating Number Assignment
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References
Floating Station (→ see Installation Manual)
* Floating Number (FN) is a virtual extension number for resources to make it appear to be an extension.
Refer to the Installation Manual.
4-132
DPT Features
4.2
T
DPT Features
Two-Way Recording into the Voice Mail†
Allows you to record the conversation into your mailbox or the desired mailbox.
Recording into your mailbox
1
Two-Way Rec
While having a conversation;
1. Press the Two-Way Record button.
• The Two-Way Record indicator light turns red.
Stopping recording
1. Press the Two-Way Record button.
• The Two-Way Record indicator light turns off.
1
Two-Way Rec
Recording into another mailbox
1
Two-Way TRS
While having a conversation;
1. Press the Two-Way Transfer button.
• The Two-Way Transfer indicator light turns red.
2
2. Enter an extension number or press the desired DSS button.
extension number
Stopping recording
1. Press the Two-Way Transfer button.
• The Two-Way Transfer indicator light turns off.
1
Two-Way TRS
Conditions
• A flexible CO and DSS button can be assigned as a Two-Way Record button or a Two-Way
Transfer button.
• Pressing the Two-Way Record button sends alarm tone, if no idle voice mail port exists.
• Pressing the Two-Way Transfer button followed by an extension number sends alarm tone,
if no idle voice mail port exists.
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment — Two-Way Record Button, Two-Way Transfer Button
(System Programming — [005] can be used for this assignment.)
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
DPT Features
4-133
U
4.2
DPT Features
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Allows incoming calls (CO line, extension) to be distributed uniformly to a specific group of
extensions called a UCD group. Calls to a UCD group queue up, and the head of the queue
searches for an idle station.
Conditions
• UCD can be used in the following cases:
a) The floating number* of UCD is assigned as the DIL 1:1 destination.
b) The floating number* of UCD is assigned as the Intercept Routing destination.
c) The floating number* of UCD is dialed from the extension.
d) The floating number* of UCD is dialed as the DDI destination.
• The floating number* can be assigned on UCD group basis and UCD group is based on the
extension group.
• UCD call can arrive at the extension in log-in mode within the UCD group, and cannot
arrive at the extensions in log-out mode.
• You can assign the log-in or log-out on the extensions.
• The last extension in log-in mode cannot assign the log-out mode.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, UCD log-in/log-out
[106] Station Hunting Type
[813] Floating Number Assignment
Feature References
Log-In / Log-Out
* Floating Number (FN) is a virtual extension number for resources to make it appear to be an extension.
Refer to the Installation Manual.
4-134
DPT Features
4.2
V
DPT Features
Voice Mail Integration
When you are busy or do not answer, your calls can be forwarded to a mailbox of the Voice
Processing System.
Setting Call Forwarding destination to Voice Mail
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Press the FWD/DND button.
• You may dial the feature number (710) or press the flexible
button assigned as the FWD/DND button instead.
2
3. Dial the Call Forwarding number (2 through 5).
• Each Call Forwarding number corresponds to the following
services:
- 2 : Call Forwarding — All Calls
- 3 : Call Forwarding — Busy
- 4 : Call Forwarding — No Answer
- 5 : Call Forwarding — Busy/No Answer
3
FWD number
4
VM extension number
4. Dial the extension number of the Voice Mail.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
5
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
• Calls directed to you are automatically forwarded to your
mailbox.
• Callers can leave their messages in the mailbox, according to the
Voice Mail guidance.
Listening to a stored message
You can listen to the messages stored in your mailbox with ease. There are two operations to
play back messages.
Using the Message Waiting (MESSAGE) button
If there is a message in the mailbox, the MESSAGE indicator light is on.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2
or
2. Press the MESSAGE button or the flexible button assigned as the
MESSAGE button.
• You can listen to the stored message without any other operation.
DPT Features
4-135
V
4.2
DPT Features
Using no MESSAGE button (— with manual dialing)
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the extension number of the Voice Mail.
• You can listen to the stored message by following the Voice Mail
guidance.
2
VM extension number
Conditions
• CO callers can leave their messages in your mailbox. When an incoming CO call arrives,
the operator answers the call and forwards it to your extension. And...
— If you set a “Call Forwarding” function and set the destination to the Voice Mail;
The call will be forwarded to the Voice Mail automatically.
— If you do not set a “Call Forwarding” function;
The call will return to the operator. Then the operator transfers the call to the Voice
Mail.
• A flexible button can be assigned as the MESSAGE, FWD/DND button.
• A Voice Mail can be assigned as the destination of the following features:
a) Call Forwarding — All Calls
b) Call Forwarding — Busy
c) Call Forwarding — No Answer
d) Call Forwarding — Busy/No Answer
e) Intercept Routing
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment — FWD/DND Button/Message Waiting (MESSAGE) Button
(System Programming — [005] (Installation Manual) can be used for this assignment.)
Feature References
Call Forwarding — All Calls, Busy, Busy/No Answer, No Answer
Intercept Routing (→ see Installation Manual)
Voice Mail Transfer
4-136
DPT Features
4.2
V
DPT Features
Voice Mail Transfer
You can transfer CO calls directed to a specified extension to a mailbox of the Voice
Processing System. The callers can leave their messages in the mailbox. If the extension set
a Call Forwarding destination to the Voice Mail, an incoming CO call will be forwarded
automatically. It the extension does not set a “Call Forwarding” function, the call will return
to you. You can forward the call to the Voice Mail by one-touch.
When an incoming CO call arrives and you forward it to the designated extension;
— If the extension has been set to a “Call Forwarding” function and set the destination to
the Voice Mail;
The call will be forwarded to Voice Mail.
— If the extension has not been set a “Call Forwarding” function;
The call will return to you.
If the call returns to you;
1. Press the flexible button assigned as Voice Mail (VM) Transfer
button.
1
2
extension number
2. Dial the extension number again.
• The call will be forwarded to the Voice Mail.
• The caller can leave the message according to the Voice Mail
guidance.
Conditions
• A flexible button can be assigned as the Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button.
• A user’s Voice Mail number, password, etc. can be assigned as a Voice Mail Access Code.
• Through System Programming, “VM Command DTMF Set” and “Station Hunting Type”
must be programmed to match the operation of your Voice Processing System.
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment — Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button
(System Programming — [005] (Installation Manual) can be used for this assignment.)
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[106] Station Hunting Type
[113] VM Status DTMF Set
[114] VM Command DTMF Set
[609] Voice Mail Access Codes
Feature References
Voice Mail Integration
DPT Features
4-137
A
4.3
Operator Service Features
The system supports up to two operators. Any extension except for ISDN telephones can be
appointed as an operator.
System Programming is necessary to appoint operators. The extension assigned as an
operator has the ability to perform the following features:
1) Alert Indication
2) Automatic Overflow and Hurry-Up Transfer
3) Background Music (BGM) — External
4) Call Log Lock Control, Incoming
5) Class of Service (COS) Switch
6) External Sensor
7) Remote Station Lock Control
8) Hotel Application
9) Live Call Screening Password Control†
Conditions
• The Direct Dial In call which is denied to receive by the extension is forwarded to the
operator.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[006] Operator/Manager Extension Assignment
Alert Indication
The pre-warning message is displayed on LCD of Operator 1. You can solve and access in
the following ways.
Meaning
Countermeasure
System Data Err
The system finds the wrong
system data with back up
RAM.
Re-assign the programming.
Contact with your dealer.
Check Printer
The paper of the Printer
SMDR runs out or the
printer is out-of-service.
Confirm the connection and
the paper in the printer.
* System Link Down
System inter-connection
becomes down.
Contact with your dealer.
Message
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
4-138
DPT Features
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
4.3
A
Operator Service Features
Automatic Overflow and Hurry-Up Transfer
When Operator 1 is busy and the outside call reaches the operator 1 directly, the incoming
call can be waited until the waiting queue is over the assigned number.* When the incoming
call is overflow the assigned number,* the last call will be automatically transferred to the
operator 2. (Automatic Overflow)
Operator 1 can refer the waiting queue with LED indication, and transfer the first waiting
call to the pre-assigned extension. (Hurry-Up Transfer)
The Hurry-Up button indicator shows as follows:
— No call in the queue : The indicator light is off.
— More than one call in the queue : The indicator light is steady red.
— Move than assigned number in the queue : The indicator light is flashing red rapidly.
Executing the Hurry-Up Transfer
While having a conversation;
1. Press the flexible button which is assigned as the Hurry-Up button.
• The first call in the queue will be transferred to the pre-assigned
extension.
1
Conditions
• A flexible button can be assigned as the Hurry-Up button.
• The assigned number* should be assigned through System Programming.
Feature References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment — Hurry-Up Button
(System Programming — [005] (Installation Manual) can be used for this assignment.)
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[120] Operator Queue
DPT Features
4-139
B
4.3
Operator Service Features
Background Music (BGM) — External
An external music source, for instance, a radio, or internal music source can be connected to
the system. The music can be broadcast in your office as background music (BGM) through
the external pagers.
Display Operation (— KX-T7235 only)
Setting / Cancelling
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
1
2. Press the Features (F4) button.
2
F4
Features
F5
3. Press the NEXT (S3) button.
3
4. Press the NEXT (S3) button again.
NEXT
S1
S2
S3
4
NEXT
S1
S2
S3
5
F3
5. Press the Extrn BGM On/Off (F3) button.
• Pressing this button alternates between the On and Off modes.
• The display shows:
External BGM On
— (When the BGM-External has
been set.)
or
Extrn BGM On/Off
F4
F5
S1
S2
S3
— (When the BGM-External has
been cancelled.)
• You hear a confirmation tone, and then the music will start or stop
according to your selection.
External BGM Off
6
6. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
4-140
DPT Features
4.3
B
Operator Service Features
Standard Operation
Setting / Cancelling
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (65).
• The display shows:
2
6
5
3
External BGM On
— (When the BGM-External has
been set.)
or
External BGM Off
— (When the BGM-External has
been cancelled.)
• You hear a confirmation tone, and then the music will start or stop
according to your selection.
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Conditions
• You can select internal music source or external music source. If you use external music,
radio (etc.), you must connect an external music source.
• Default is “External BGM Off.”
• BGM is only sent to the programmed external pager.
• Access priority to the external pager is: (1) TAFAS; (2) Paging; (3) BGM
Higher priorities will override BGM.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Background music — external
[803] Music Source Use
[804] External Pager BGM
[990] System Additional Information, Field (20)
DPT Features
4-141
C
4.3
Operator Service Features
Call Log Lock Control, Incoming
The operator can clear the “Call Log Lock, Incoming” feature on any extension.
Programming
1. Press the PROGRAM button.
1
PROGRAM
2
9
9
2. Dial 99.
• You enter into the Station Programming mode.
• The display shows:
PT-PGM Mode
3
0
2
3. Dial 02.
4
extension number or
5
4. Dial the extension number or .
– extension number : to clear one extension
• The display shows:
<Example> If you dial extension number 1234.
1234 :Clear OK?
...
5. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
6
PROGRAM
or
6. Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset to exit from the
Station Programming mode.
Feature References
Call Log Lock, Incoming
4-142
DPT Features
4.3
C
Operator Service Features
Class of Service (COS) Switch
The operator can assign primary and secondary status to the extensions through the COS
switch.
Display Operation (— KX-T7235 only)
Primary switch
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
1
2. Press the Features (F4) button.
2
F4
Features
F5
3. Press the NEXT (S3) button.
3
NEXT
S1
S2
4. Press the NEXT (S3) button again.
S3
4
5. Press the COS Primary (F4) button.
NEXT
S1
S2
S3
5
F4
COS Primary
(Rext)
6. Dial the extension number.
• You hear a confirmation tone.
• The display shows:
xxxx : Primary
F5
S1
S2
S3
— (xxxx : extension number)
7. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
6
extension number
7
Secondary switch
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
DPT Features
4-143
C
4.3
Operator Service Features
2. Press the Features (F4) button.
2
Features
F4
F5
3. Press the NEXT (S3) button.
3
NEXT
S1
S2
4. Press the NEXT (S3) button again.
S3
4
5. Press the COS Secondary (F5) button.
NEXT
S1
S2
S3
5
F4
F5
COS Secondary
(Rext)
6. Dial the extension number.
• You hear a confirmation tone.
• The display shows:
xxxx : Secondary — (xxxx : extension number)
6
7. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
extension number
7
Standard Operation
Primary switch
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (791).
2
7
9
1
3
extension number
3. Dial the extension number.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
xxxx : Primary
— (xxxx : extension number)
4
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
4-144
DPT Features
4.3
E
Operator Service Features
Secondary switch
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (793).
2
7
9
3
3. Dial the extension number.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
3
extension number
xxxx : Secondary — (xxxx : extension number)
4
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Primary COS select, secondary COS select
[601] Class of Service
[991] COS Additional Information
External Sensor
When a device connected to the external sensor becomes active, the alarm tone is sent to the
operator 1.
If you hear the alarm tone;
• The display shows:
Ext. Sensor x
1
— (x : External Sensor number)
— If you are connected to the KX-TD1232, the display shows the
external sensor number 1 or 2.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
• You hear a special dial tone (Tone 3).
Conditions
• One external sensor can be connected per system.
• If you do not answer the alarm tone within 60 seconds, it will automatically stop ringing.
• If you go off-hook while the alarm is ringing, you will hear a special dial tone through the
handset.
• If Operator 1’s line is busy when the external sensor sends an alarm, the alarm will start
ringing when the line becomes free.
DPT Features
4-145
H
4.3
Operator Service Features
Hotel Application
Allows the operator to handle the front/operator services such as check-in/check-out, timed
reminder (wake-up call) with the KX-T7235. It is required to enable the hotel application by
System Programming.
Check-In/Check-Out
The check-in mode activates the change to primary COS and also clears the charge counter
automatically. The check-out mode activates the change to secondary COS and also prints
out the charge counter, minibar and other expenses. While changing the check-in mode, the
DSS button indicates the check-in room in stead of BLF.
Display Operation (— KX-T7235 only)
Check-In
1. Press the Hotel (F10) button.
1
F9
Hotel
F10
2. Press the Check-In (F1) button.
• DSS indicator in check-in mode turns red.
2
F1
Check in
Check out
3. Dial the extension number or press the DSS button that you want to
check-in.
3
or
4. Press the NEXT (S3) button.
• If the extension number is already in check-in mode, this will be
cancelled.
• If you want to exit, press END (S1) button.
extension number
4
Check in Room:
NEXT
END
S1
2345
S2
S3
5
Check in Room:
2345
Realy Check-in?
NO
YES
S1
4-146
S2
DPT Features
S3
5. Press the YES (S1) button or NO (S3) button.
– YES : The check-in extension’s charge counter is cleared and the
primary COS is activated. The display returns to the initial
display.
– NO : The display returns to step 3.
4.3
H
Operator Service Features
Check-Out
1. Press the Hotel (F10) button.
1
F9
F10
Hotel
2. Press the Check out (F2) button.
• DSS indicator in check-out mode turns red.
2
F1
3. Dial the extension number or press the DSS button that you want to
check-out.
Check out
F2
3
4. Press the NEXT (S3) button.
• The display shows the charge.
or
extension number
F1
F2
4
NEXT
END
S1
S2
S3
5
F3
F4
F5
Check out Room:2345
Telephone
00100.40
Minibar
00000.00
others
00000.00
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
END
PREV
PRINT
S1
S2
S3
• If you want to exit, press END (S1) button.
If you want to charge the minibar;
5. Enter the minibar charge.
minibar charge
6
F4
Others
If you want to charge Other expenses;
6. Press the Others (F4) button and enter the other charges
F5
and
If you want to change the charge;
• Press the appropriate button {(F2) through (F4)} and enter the
charge.
other charges
7
PRINT
S1
S2
If you want to print out the charge;
7. Press the PRINT (S3) button.
S3
8. Press the END (S1) button.
8
END
S1
S2
S3
9
Check out Room
2345
Realy check-in
NO
YES
S1
S2
9. Press the YES (S1) button or NO (S3) button.
– YES : The check-in extension’s charge counter is remained and the
secondary COS is activated. The display returns to the initial
display.
– NO : The display returns to step 3.
S3
DPT Features
4-147
H
4.3
Operator Service Features
Conditions
• You must assign the Hotel Application feature through System Programming.
• While an extension is in check-in mode, you cannot enter check-in mode again on the same
extension.
• The LCD displays the telephone including the margin. You can enter the margin through
System Programming.
• The entered Minibar charge and Sonstiges charge do not remain in the system after
completing check-out.
• A new page will be ready after each printout.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[010] Budget Management
[011] Charge Margin and Tax Rate
[123] Hotel Application
[990] System Additional Information, Field (40)
Timed Reminder, Notification for Unanswered Extension
(— KX-T7235 only)
If the guest does not answer the wake-up call, the Alert indicator will flash. Pressing the
Alert button informs you which extension did not answer their wake-up call.
1. Press the Alert button.
1
If you want to clear the notification;
2. Press the CLR (S2) button.
2
Room: 2345
Wake up no answer
MENU
CLR
NEXT
S1
S2
S3
If you want to go to the next unanswered extension;
3. Press the NEXT (S3) button.
3
Room: 2345
Wake up no answer
MENU
CLR
NEXT
S1
S2
S3
4
Room: 2345
Wake up no answer
4-148
MENU
CLR
NEXT
S1
S2
S3
DPT Features
If you want to exit;
4. Press the MENU (S1) button.
4.3
H
Operator Service Features
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment — Alert Button
(System Programming — [005] (Installation Manual) can be used for this assignment.)
Feature References
Hotel Application, Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call)
Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call)
The operator can remotely set/cancel the Timed Reminder of the desired extension.
Display Operation (— KX-T7235 only)
Setting
1. Press the Hotel (F10) button.
1
F9
Hotel
F10
2. Press the Wake up (F3) button.
2
F3
Check in
Check out
Wake up
3. Dial the extension number or press the desired DSS button to set
the wake-up reminder.
• If you want to exit, press the END (S1) button.
3
or
extension number
4
Wake up Room: 2345
NEXT
S1
S2
4. Press the NEXT (S3) button.
• If the wake-up reminder is already set, the current time is
displayed. If not, the time is blank.
5. Enter the hour (00 through 23) and minute (00 through 59).
S3
5
hour and minute
6
0
or
1
7
6. Dial 0 for one time alarm setting,*1 or dial 1 for a daily alarm
setting.*2
• Time Announce or a confirmation tone is audible.
*1 You will hear an alarm ringing at the preset time and then the setting is cleared.
*2 You will hear an alarm ringing at the preset time every day until the setting is
changed or cancelled.
Wake up Room: 2345
Time : 07:00
Daily: 0
END
CLR
PROG
S1
S2
S3
7. Press the PROG (S3) button.
DPT Features
4-149
H
4.3
Operator Service Features
Cancelling
1. Press the Hotel (F10) button.
1
F9
Hotel
F10
2. Press the Wake up (F3) button.
2
Check in
Check out
Wake up
F3
3. Dial the extension number or press the DSS button.
3
or
4. Press the NEXT (S3) button.
extension number
4
Wake up Room: 2345
5. Press the CLR (S2) button.
NEXT
S1
S2
S3
5
CLR
S1
S2
S3
Checking the setting time
1. Press the Hotel (F10) button.
1
F9
Hotel
F10
2. Press the Wake up (F3) button.
2
Check in
Check out
Wake up
F3
3. Dial the extension number or press the DSS button.
3
or
4. Press the NEXT (S3) button.
• The setting time is displayed.
extension number
4
Wake up Room: 2345
NEXT
S1
S2
S3
S2
S3
5
END
S1
4-150
DPT Features
5. Press the END (S1) button.
4.3
H
Operator Service Features
Standard Operation
Setting
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (7 ) and 1.
2
7
1
3. Dial the desired extension number or DSS button.
3
or
4. Enter the hour (00 through 23) and the minute (00 through 59).
extension number
4
5. Dial 0 for one time alarm setting,*1 or dial 1 for daily alarm setting.*2
• Time Announce or a confirmation tone is audible.
*1 You will hear an alarm ringing at the preset time and then the setting is cleared.
*2 You will hear an alarm ringing at the preset time every day until the setting is
hour and minute
5
0
or
changed or cancelled.
1
6
6. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Cancelling
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (7 ) and 0.
2
7
0
3
or
extension number
3. Dial the desired extension number or DSS button on which you
have set the Timed Reminder.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• The display shows:
Alarm Cancelled
4
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
DPT Features
4-151
H
4.3
Operator Service Features
Checking the setting time (with a display PT only)
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
1
2. Dial the feature number (7 ) and 2.
2
7
2
3
or
extension number
4
3. Dial the desired extension number or DSS button on which you
have set the Timed Reminder.
<Example>
If “10:10” has been set, the display shows:
Alarm
10:10
— only one time
10:10*
— everyday
or
Alarm
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
Conditions
• The system clock must be set beforehand.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Timed Reminder, Remote
Feature References
Timed Reminder
4-152
DPT Features
4.3
L
Operator Service Features
Live Call Screening Password Control†
Allows both operators to clear the password of Live Call Screening at any extension. If you
forget the pre-set password, you may ask either operator to clear the password for you.
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Dial 03.
• The display shows:
1
0
3
EXT NO?→
CLR
2
• To erase an incorrect entry, press the CLR (S2) button or the
TRANSFER (CLEAR) button.
(The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button while in programming
VM extension number or
mode.)
3
...
2. Enter the extension number or .
• To assign all extension numbers, press the
• The display shows (example):
EXT xxxx:Cancel?
key.
(xxxx : extension number)
3. Press STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Feature References
Live Call Screening (LCS)
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
DPT Features
4-153
R
4.3
Operator Service Features
Remote Station Lock Control
The operator can set/clear “Electronic Station Lockout” on any station.
Programming
1. Press the PROGRAM button.
1
PROGRAM
2
9
9
0
1
3
2. Dial 99.
• You enter the Station Programming mode.
• The display shows:
PT-PGM Mode
3. Dial 01.
4
extension number or
4. Dial the extension number or .
- extension number : to lock or unlock one extension
: to lock or unlock all extensions
5
1
or
2
6
...
7
PROGRAM
or
5. Dial 1 or 2.
- 1 : to unlock
- 2 : to lock
• The display shows:
<Example> If you dial extension number 1234 and then dial 2.
1234 : Locked
6. Press the STORE button.
• The STORE indicator light turns on.
7. Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset to exit the Station
Programming mode.
Conditions
• This feature supersedes the “Electronic Station Lockout” feature. If “Electronic Station
Lockout” has already been set by the extension user and this feature is set, the extension
user cannot cancel the lock. Only the operator can cancel the lock.
Feature References
Electronic Station Lockout
4-154
DPT Features
4.4
Special display Features (— for KX-T7235)
The KX-T7235 is provided with a large display that allows you to make calls or to access
system facilities with ease. The display prompts you with information related to the desired
feature. Examples of these special functions are:
1.) Call Log, Outgoing
2.) Extension Dialing
3.) Station Speed Dialing
4.) System Feature Access Menu*
5.) System Speed Dialing
* System Feature Access Menu provides a display of the system features available and
allows access to the desired features. The features available are:
1.) Absent Message Capability
2.) Answering, Paging — External
3.) Answering, Paging — Group
4.) Background Music — External (Operator only)
5.) Call Park (Operator only)
6.) Call Pickup, Group
7.) Class of Service (COS) Switch (Operator only)
8.) Message Waiting
9.) Night Service (Operator only)
10.) Paging — External
11.) Paging — Group
12.) Paralleled Telephone Connection
In addition to the above, on pressing the FWD/DND button after going off-hook, a new
display appears. From this display, the following additional System Features can be operated.
1.) Call Forwarding — All Calls, Busy, No Answer, Busy/No Answer, to CO Line,
Follow Me
2.) Do Not Disturb (DND)
About the Display and Buttons
The display shows information on various call activities.
Initial Display
F1 button
F2 button
F3 button
F4 button
F5 button
1 Jan 15:00
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Extension STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
RING
BGM
CONT
S1
S1 button
S2
S2 button
F8
F9
F10
F6 button
F7 button
F8 button
F9 button
F10 button
S3
S3 button
DPT Features
4-155
4.4
Special Display Features (— for KX-T7235)
There are three “Features” displays from the Initial
Display.
a) The first display
— Accessible by pressing the Features (F4)
button.
The KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD816
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
External Paging
Group Paging
Gropu Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
S2
0-2
0-8
F6
F7
1-2
F8
F9
F10
NEXT
There are two further displays to operate the “Call
Forwarding” and the “Do Not Disturb (DND)”
features.
a) The first display
— Accessible by pressing the FWD/DND button
after going off-hook.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F3
F4
F5
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
S2
0-4
0-8
F6
F7
1-4
F8
F9
F10
NEXT
S3
b) The second display
— Accessible by pressing the NEXT (S3) button.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
Parallel On/Off
Message On
Message Off
Absent MSG On
Absent MSG Off
PREV
MENU
S1
S2
F3
F4
F5
1/0
ext
ext
1-9
F8
F9
F10
NEXT
S2
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
S3
— To execute the “Call Pack” and the “Night
Service” feature using the display function keys,
refer to this section and for the others (BGMExternal and Class of Service (COS) Switch, refer
to the “Operator Service Features” (Section 4.3).
4-156
DPT Features
F8
F9
F10
S1
S2
S3
b) The second display
— Accessible by pressing the NEXT (S3) button.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
FWD-BSY/NA
FWD-CO Line
FWD-From
FWD-From Cancel
ext
dial
ext
ext
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
MENU
PREV
NEXT
S1
S2
S3
— To execute the “Call Forwarding” and the “Do
Not disturb (DND)” features, refer to the “DPT
Features” (Section 4.2).
S3
Call Park
0-9
Night Auto/On/Off
<0-2
Extrn BGM On/Off
COS Primary
ext
COS Secondary
ext
PREV
NEXT
MENU
S1
F6
F7
F6
F7
c) The third display (operator only)
— Accessible by pressing the NEXT (S3) button.
F1
F2
ext
ext
ext
ext
S3
The KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD1232
F1
F2
FWD/DND Cancel
Do Not Disturb
FWD-All Calls
FWD-Busy
FWD-No Answer
Helpful Information on Display Operation
Press CONT (S1) to adjust the display contrast.
Press RING (S2) to adjust the ringer volume.
Press BGM (S3) to turn on/off the BGM.
Press MENU (S1) to return to the initial display.
Press PREV (S2) to return to the previous list.
Press NEXT (S3) to advance to the next list.
Press ACCNT (S3) to enter an Account code.
4.4
Special display Features (— for KX-T7235)
Call Log, Outgoing
Extension Dialing
Allows you to redial one of your last CO calls.
Allows you to call another extension by selecting
their name.
1. Press the Call Log (F5) button.
1. Press the Extension (F3) button.
1 Jan 15:00
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
RING
BGM
CONT
S1
S2
F8
F9
F10
F1
F2
1 Jan 15:00
F6
F7
F3
F4
F5
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
BGM
RING
CONT
F8
F9
S3
S1
2. Press the desired Fx button which you want to
call.
<Example> To select 111, press the F2 button.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
1234567890
111
0987654
000111222333
100200300400500
CLR
MENU
S1
S2
F1
F2
F8
F9
F3
F4
F5
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
111
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
RING
BGM
CONT
S1
S2
S3
AB
C
DE
FG
HIJ
MENU
S1
S3
— After pressing Fx button;
F8
F9
F10
S3
2. Press the desired Fx button.
<Example> To select AB, press the F1 button.
F6
F7
F10
S2
F10
KL
MN
OPQR
S
T-Z
S2
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
S3
— After pressing Fx button;
3. Press the desired Fx button.
<Example> To select Billy Jane, press the F5
button.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
Agness
Bob
Alice
Carol
Ann Margly
Casey
Ben Johns
Ched Ely
Billy Jane
Chris
NEXT
MENU
PREV
S1
S2
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
S3
— After pressing Fx button;
222: Billy Jane
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
BGM
CONT
RING
S1
S2
F8
F9
F10
S3
DPT Features
4-157
4.4
Special Display Features (— for KX-T7235)
Station Speed Dialing
System Speed Dialing
Allows you to make an one-touch call by selecting
a name.
Allows you to make a CO call by selecting a name
stored with system speed dial numbers.
1. Press the STA Speed (F8) button.
1. Press the SYS Speed (F9) button.
1 Jan 15:00
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
BGM
CONT
RING
S2
S1
F6
F7
F1
F2
1 Jan 15:00
F6
F7
F8
F9
F3
F4
F5
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
BGM
RING
CONT
F8
F9
F10
S3
S1
2. Press the desired Fx button.
<Example> To select Panasonic, press the F7
button.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
Bob
Jim Kopp
Ronald
Zangril
Nancy
MENU
KME-soft
Panasonic
Police
Louisa
Home
NEXT
S2
S1
F1
F2
F8
F9
F3
F4
F5
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
0-123-4567
0111111
03333333
07777777
100
MENU
S1
0-987-6543
05555555
0-999
Not Stored
0-1000001
NEXT
S2
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
5555555
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
BGM
RING
CONT
S1
S2
S3
F8
F9
F10
F1
F2
DPT Features
S2
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
S3
F3
F4
F5
Harry
Jack
Henry
Janny
Hiroshi
Jimmy
Isaac
John
Ivy‘s shop
Johes
PREV
NEXT
MENU
S1
S2
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
S3
— After pressing Fx button;
Jack’s number dialed out ...
3333333
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
RING
BGM
CONT
S1
4-158
KL
MN
OPQR
S
T-Z
— After pressing Fx button;
3. Press the desired Fx button.
<Example> To select jack, press the F6 button.
S3
— After pressing Fx button with the name list on
display;
F1
F2
AB
C
DE
FG
HIJ
MENU
S1
S3
Press the NEXT (S3) button to
see the next screen of
programmed telephone numbers.
S3
— After pressing Fx button;
2. Press the desired Fx button.
<Example>To select HIJ, press the F5 button.
F6
F7
F10
S2
F10
S2
S3
F8
F9
F10
4.4
Special display Features (— for KX-T7235)
System Feature Access Menu
Absent Message Capability
Allows you to turn the selected Absent Message (1-9) on or off using the display function keys.
Setting (On)
Cancelling (Off)
1. Press the Features (F4) button.
1. Press the Features (F4) button.
F1
F2
1 Jan 15:00
F6
F7
F1
F2
1 Jan 15:00
F6
F7
F3
F4
F5
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
RING
BGM
CONT
F8
F9
F3
F4
F5
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
RING
BGM
CONT
F8
F9
S1
S2
F10
S3
S1
2. Press the NEXT (S3) button.
The KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD816
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
S2
F6
F7
F1
F2
1-2
F8
F9
F3
F4
F5
NEXT
S3
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
S2
F6
F7
F1
F2
1-4
F8
F9
F3
F4
F5
F10
F3
F4
F5
Parallel On/Off
Message On
Message Off
Absent MSG On
Absent MSG Off
PREV
MENU
NEXT
S3
S1
S2
1/0
ext
ext
1-9
F1
F2
F8
F9
F3
F4
F5
S3
4. Dial the message number (1 through 9).
5. Enter the parameters, if required.
6. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
1-2
F8
F9
F10
NEXT
S2
0-4
0-8
F6
F7
1-4
F8
F9
F10
NEXT
S3
3. Press the Absent MSG Off (F5) button.
F6
F7
F10
F6
F7
S3
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
NEXT
S2
0-2
0-8
The KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD1232
0-4
0-8
3. Press the Absent MSG On (F4) button.
F1
F2
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
The KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD1232
S3
2. Press the NEXT (S3) button.
The KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD816
0-2
0-8
F10
S2
F10
Parallel On/Off
Message On
Message Off
Absent MSG On
Absent MSG Off
PREV
MENU
S1
S2
1/0
Nst
Nst
1-9
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
NEXT
S3
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
DPT Features
4-159
4.4
Special Display Features (— for KX-T7235)
System Feature Access Menu (contd.)
Answering,
Paging — External
Answering,
Paging — Group
Allows you to answer an External page with the
display function keys.
Allows you to answer an Group page with the
display function keys.
1. Press the Features (F4) button.
1. Press the Features (F4) button.
F1
F2
1 Jan 15:00
F6
F7
F1
F2
1 Jan 15:00
F6
F7
F3
F4
F5
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
RING
BGM
CONT
F8
F9
F3
F4
F5
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
RING
BGM
CONT
F8
F9
S1
S2
F10
S1
S3
2. Press the Answer Ext-Page (F4) button.
The KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD816
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
S2
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
S2
F1
F2
1-2
F8
F9
F3
F4
F5
NEXT
S3
0-4
0-8
DPT Features
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
F1
F2
F8
F9
F3
F4
F5
F10
NEXT
S3
S2
0-2
0-8
F6
F7
1-2
F8
F9
F10
NEXT
S3
The KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD1232
F6
F7
3. Dial the external pager number (1 or 2) or
(1 through 4).
- 1 or 2 : the KX-T7235 connected to the
KX-TD816
- 1 through 4 : the KX-T7235 connected to the
KX-TD1232
4-160
The KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD816
F6
F7
The KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD1232
S3
2. Press the Answer GRP-Page (F5) button.
0-2
0-8
F10
S2
F10
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
S2
0-4
0-8
F6
F7
1-4
F8
F9
F10
NEXT
S3
4.4
Special display Features (— for KX-T7235)
System Feature Access Menu (contd.)
4. Dial the parking zone number (0 through 9).
Call Park (Operator only)
Allows the operator to execute the Call Park
feature with the display function keys.
<Example> If parking zone number (5) is not
available to park;
During a conversation;
1. Press the Features (F4) button.
F1
F2
1 Jan 15:00
F3
F4
F5
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
Hotel
BGM
RING
CONT
S1
S2
F1
F2
F6
F7
F8
F9
F3
F4
F5
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
S2
F6
F7
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
BGM
RING
CONT
S1
S2
F8
F9
F10
S3
F10
— In this case, try another parking zone number.
S3
2. Press the NEXT (S3) button twice.
The KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD816
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
Park at 5 N/A
0-2
0-8
F6
F7
1-2
F8
F9
Retrieving
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the Features (F4) button.
Press the NEXT (S3) button twice.
Press the Call Park (F1) button.
Dial the desired parking zone number.
F10
NEXT
S3
The KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD1232
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
S2
0-4
0-8
F6
F7
1-4
F8
F9
F10
NEXT
S3
3. Press the Call Park (F1) button.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
Call Park
0-9 F6
Night Auto/On/Off
>0-2 F7
Extrn BGM On/Off
F8
COS Primary
ext F9
COS Secondary
ext F10
PREV
NEXT
MENU
S1
S2
S3
DPT Features
4-161
4.4
Special Display Features (— for KX-T7235)
System Feature Access Menu (contd.)
Call Pickup, Group
Message Waiting
Allows you to execute the Call Pickup, Group
feature with the display function keys.
1. Press the Features (F4) button.
Setting (On)
F1
F2
1 Jan 15:00
F6
F7
F3
F4
F5
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
RING
BGM
CONT
F8
F9
S1
S2
F10
F3
F4
F5
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
S2
1. Press the Features (F4) button.
F1
F2
1 Jan 15:00
F6
F7
F3
F4
F5
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
RING
BGM
CONT
F8
F9
S3
2. Press the Group Pickup (F3) button.
The KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD816
F1
F2
Allows you to turn Message Waiting on or off with
the display function keys.
0-2
0-8
F6
F7
1-2
F8
F9
F10
NEXT
S1
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
S2
0-4
0-8
F6
F7
1-4
F8
F9
F10
NEXT
S3
2. Press the NEXT (S3) button.
The KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD816
S3
The KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD1232
S2
F10
S2
0-2
0-8
F6
F7
1-2
F8
F9
F10
NEXT
S3
The KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD1232
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
S3
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
S2
0-4
0-8
F6
F7
1-4
F8
F9
F10
NEXT
S3
3. Press the Message On (F2) button.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
Parallel On/Off
Message On
Message Off
Absent MSG On
Absent MSG Off
PREV
MENU
S1
S2
1/0
ext
ext
ext
1-9#
NEXT
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
S3
4. Dial the extension number.
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
4-162
DPT Features
4.4
Special display Features (— for KX-T7235)
System Feature Access menu (contd.)
Cancelling (Off)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the Features (F4) button.
Press the NEXT (S3) button.
Press the Message Off (F3) button.
Dial the extension number.
Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
Night Service (Operator only)
Allows the operator to execute the Night Service
feature with the display function keys.
1. Press the Features (F4) button.
F1
F2
1 Jan 15:00
F6
F7
F3
F4
F5
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
Hotel
BGM
RING
CONT
F8
F9
S1
S2
F10
S3
2. Press the NEXT (S3) button twice.
The KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD816
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
S2
0-2
0-8
F6
F7
1-2
F8
F9
F10
NEXT
S3
The KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD1232
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
S2
0-4
0-8
F6
F7
1-4
F8
F9
F10
NEXT
S3
3. Press the Night Auto/On/Off (F2) button.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
Call Park
0-9
Night Auto/On/Off
>0-2
Extrn BGM On/Off
COS Primary
ext
COS Secondary
ext
PREV
NEXT
MENU
S1
S2
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
S3
4. Dial 0, 1 or 2.
- 0 : for Auto mode
- 1 : for Manual Day mode
- 2 : for Manual Night mode
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
DPT Features
4-163
4.4
Special Display Features (— for KX-T7235)
System Feature Access Menu (contd.)
Paging — External
Paging — Group
Allows you to execute the Paging — External
feature with the display function keys.
Allows you to execute the Paging — Group
feature with the display function keys.
1. Press the Features (F4) button.
1. Press the Features (F4) button.
F1
F2
1 Jan 15:00
F6
F7
F1
F2
1 Jan 15:00
F6
F7
F3
F4
F5
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
RING
BGM
CONT
F8
F9
F3
F4
F5
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
RING
BGM
CONT
F8
F9
S1
S2
F10
S1
S3
2. Press the External Paging (F1) button.
The KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD816
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
S2
F6
F7
F1
F2
1-2
F8
F9
F3
F4
F5
NEXT
S3
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
S2
F6
F7
F1
F2
1-4
F8
F9
F3
F4
F5
F10
NEXT
S3
DPT Features
S2
0-2
0-8
F6
F7
1-2
F8
F9
F10
NEXT
S3
The KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD1232
0-4
0-8
3. Dial the external pager number (1 or 2) or
(1 through 4) or 0.
- 1 or 2 : to access a particular pager
(The KX-T7235 connected to the
KX-TD816)
- 1 through 4 : to access a particular pager
(The KX-T7235 connected to the
KX-TD1232)
0
: to access all external pagers
4-164
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
The KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD1232
S3
2. Press the Group Paging (F2) button.
The KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD816
0-2
0-8
F10
S2
F10
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
S2
0-4
0-8
F6
F7
1-4
F8
F9
F10
NEXT
S3
3. Dial the extension group number (1 through
8) or 0.
- 1 through 8 : to access a particular group of
extensions
0
: to access all groups
simultaneously
4.4
Special display Features (— for KX-T7235)
System Feature Access Menu (contd.)
4. Dial 1 or 0.
- 1 : for setting (On)
- 0 : for cancelling (Off)
Paralleled Telephone
Connection
Allows you to set Paralleled Telephone Connection
on or off with the display function keys.
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
1. Press the Features (F4) button.
F1
F2
1 Jan 15:00
F6
F7
F3
F4
F5
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
RING
BGM
CONT
F8
F9
S1
S2
F10
S3
2. Press the NEXT (S3) button.
The KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD816
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
S2
0-2
0-8
F6
F7
1-2
F8
F9
F10
NEXT
S3
The KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD1232
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
S2
0-4
0-8
F6
F7
1-4
F8
F9
F10
NEXT
S3
3. Press the Parallel On/Off (F1) button.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
Parallel On/Off
Message On
Message Off
Absent MSG On
Absent MSG Off
PREV
MENU
S1
S2
1/0
ext
ext
ext
1-9#
NEXT
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
S3
DPT Features
4-165
4-166
DPT Features
Section 5
DSS Console Features
(KX-T7240)
Contents
5.1
5.2
Configuration.......................................................................5-2
Location of Controls .............................................................5-2
DSS Console Features.........................................................5-3
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Buttons ................................5-3
PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons...................................5-5
<Note>
All illustrations of the DPT (paired telephone) used in these operating
instructions are KX-T7235’s.
5.2
DSS Console Features
With a Directed Station Selection (DSS) console, model KX-T7240, you can transfer calls
and access system features with the touch of a button. The DSS Console must be connected
to the Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System and paired with a DPT. System Programming
is required to designate the jack numbers of the paired DSS Console and DPT.
Conditions
• The KX-T7240 and the Digital Proprietary Telephone (DPT) should be placed side by side
on your desk.
• A single line telephone cannot be utilized in conjunction with the KX-T7240.
• For connection, please refer to the Installation Manual of the Digital Super Hybrid System.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[007] DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment
Location of Controls
The DSS Console provides two kinds of buttons: thirty-two Direct Station Selection (DSS)
buttons with Busy Lamp Field (BLF) and sixteen Programmable Feature (PF) buttons.
DSS Buttons with Busy Lamp Field (BLF):
To call an extension, simply press a DSS button.
The BLF indicates the busy/idle/Do Not Disturb
(DND) status of each extension in the system.
DIGIT
AL
PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons:
These buttons once programmed, let you access
various functions with a one-touch operation.
5-2
DSS Console Features
5.2
DSS Console Features
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Buttons
Provides direct selection access and busy/idle/Do Not Disturb (DND) status of up to thirtytwo extensions. Transferring a CO call by one-touch is also available (One-Touch Transfer).
Intercom Calling
An extension can be called and accessed, simply by pressing a DSS button. The BLF shows
the extension is engaged. Each DSS button has a default setting as follows:
DSS 01 - 32 : extension number 201 - 232.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button at the
paired telephone.
1
2. Press the desired DSS button on the console.
2
Call Transfer
A call can be transferred to an extension by using the DSS button. These are two operations,
depending on whether or not One-Touch Transfer* is set.
* One-Touch Transfer allows you to hold a CO call and transfer it to an extension with one key depression. This
feature provides automatic hold and transfer, without pressing the TRANSFER button. System Programming is
required to use this function.
“One-Touch Transfer” mode enabled:
1
During a conversation;
1. Press the desired DSS button on the console.
• The other party is placed on hold and the destination extension is
called immediately.
“One-Touch Transfer” mode disabled:
1
2
During a conversation;
1. Press the TRANSFER button on the paired telephone.
2. Press the desired DSS button on the console.
DSS Console Features
5-3
5.2
DSS Console Features
Conditions
• DSS buttons can be changed to any of the following function buttons by Station
Programming:
a) Account Button
b) Another DSS Button (Every DSS button can be assigned to another extension number.)
c) Conference (CONF) Button
d) FWD/DND Button
e) Live Call Screening (LCS) Button†
f) Live Call Screening (LCS) Cancel Button†
g) Message Waiting (MESSAGE) Button
h) One-Touch Dialing Button
i) SAVE Button
j) Terminate Button
k) Two-Way Record Button†
l) Two-Way Transfer Button†
m) Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment — Account Button, Conference (CONF) Button,
DSS Button, FWD/DND Button, Live Call Screening
(LCS) Button, Live Call Screening (LCS) Cancel Button,
Message Waiting (MESSAGE) Button, One-Touch
Dialing Button, SAVE Button, Terminate Button,
Two-Way Record Button, Two-Way Transfer Button,
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[007] DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment
[108] One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button
5-4
DSS Console Features
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System.
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
5.2
DSS Console Features
PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons
Offers you one-touch access to various functions. A system feature or a telephone number
can be activated with one-touch of a PF button after it is programmed.
One-Touch Dialing
The stored number is dialed automatically by pressing a programmed PF button. Up to
sixteen digits can be stored into each memory location.
Programming
<Example> To store outside phone numbers
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Press the desired PF button.
1
2. Dial 2.
2
2
3. Dial the line access code (0 or 81 through 88).
3
line access code
4
4. Enter the phone number.
• To erase an incorrect entry, press the CLR (S2) button or the
TRANSFER (CLEAR) button.
(The TRANSFER (
phone number
5
) button becomes the CLEAR button.)
5. Press the STORE button.
• Repeat steps 1 through 5, to program numbers on other PF button.
...
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Dialing
1
2
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITER button on the
paired telephone.
2. Press the desired PF button.
DSS Console Features
5-5
5.2
DSS Console Features
One-Touch Access for System Features
You can access system features by pressing a programmed PF button.
Programming
— Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] [9] [9].
1. Press the desired PF button.
1
2
2. Dial 2.
2
3. Enter the desired feature number.
<Example>
If you wish to gain access to the “Paging — All” feature, dial 630.
• To erase an incorrect entry, press the CLR (S2) button or the
TRANSFER (CLEAR) button.
3
feature number
4
4. Press the STORE button on the paired telephone.
• Repeat steps 1 through 4, to program numbers on other PF button.
...
— To exit the Station Programming mode: Press [PROGRAM] or lift the handset.
Dialing
1
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button on the
paired telephone.
2
2. Press the desired PF button.
■ To correct an error while programming
1. Press the CLR (S2) button or the TRANSFER (CLEAR) button on
the paired telephone and complete programming.
1
CLR
S1
S2
S3
or
5-6
DSS Console Features
5.2
DSS Console Features
■ To erase after programming
1
1. Press the PF button you wish to erase.
2
2. Press 2.
2
3
3. Press the STORE button on the paired telephone.
• The number is erased.
...
■ To confirm a stored number
1. Press the PF button.
• The stored number appears on the display.
1
Conditions
• PF buttons are provided with no default setting. The paired telephone user can program the
buttons for any of the following function buttons by Station Programming:
a) Account Button
b) Conference (CONF) Button
c) FWD/DND Button
d) One-Touch Dialing Button
e) SAVE Button
f) Terminate Button
g) Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button
Programming References
• Station Programming (Section 2)
Flexible Button Assignment — Account Button, Conference (CONF) Button,
FWD/DND Button, One-Touch Dialing Button,
SAVE Button, Terminate Button,
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button
DSS Console Features
5-7
5-8
DSS Console Features
Section 6
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Contents
6.1
6.2
6.3
Basic Operation ...................................................................6-2
Making Calls.........................................................................6-2
Receiving Calls .....................................................................6-3
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features (A - Z) .......................6-4
ISDN Telephone Features .................................................6-87
<Note>
If you use dial pulse (DP) type single line telephone:
It is not possible to have access to the features which have “ ” or “#” in
their feature numbers.
When the “Pickup Dialing (Hot Line)” feature is set on your telephone,
your dialing sequence should be done within a certain period of time
(Pickup Dial Waiting Time — default: 1 sec.) after lifting the handset.
To change the time, refer to the System Programming in the Installation
Manual.
In this manual, the default feature numbers are used to describe each
operation and illustration. Use newly programmed numbers if you have
changed the number by System Programming.
6.1
Basic Operation
Making Calls
Intercom Calling
Allows you to make a call to another extension.
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the extension number.
2
extension number
Outward Dialing
There are two types of line access methods to make a call to an outside party.
1.) Line Access, Automatic
2.) Line Access, CO Line Group
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the line access code (0 or 81 through 88).
- 0 : Line Access, Automatic
- 81-88 : Line Access, CO Line Group
2
3. Dial the phone number.
line access code
3
phone number
Feature References
Intercom Calling
Outward Dialing, Line Access
6-2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.1
Basic Operation
Receiving Calls
1
1. Lift the handset.
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-3
A
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Absent Message Capability
Once set this option, it provides a message on the display of the calling extension to show
the reason for your absence. Nine messages are available for every extension user. There are
six pre-programmed default messages. Setting or Cancelling a message can be done by
individual extension users but only callers with display telephones can receive the message.
If required, Message 7, 8 and 9 can be programmed through System Programming.
Message No.
Message
1
Will Return Soon
2
Gone Home
At Ext %%%
3
Extension number
Back at %%:%%
4
Minute
Hour
Out until %%/%%
5
Day (or Month)
Month (or Day)
6
In a Meeting
7
8
9
Note: % indicates the area where you enter the desired parameter.
Setting
Message 1. “Will Return Soon”
1
2
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the feature number (750) and 1.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3. Hang up.
3
6-4
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
A
Message 2. “Gone Home”
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (750) and 2.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
2
3. Hang up.
3
Message 3. “At Ext %%%” (extension number)
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (750) and 3.
2
3. Dial the extension number where you are.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3
4. Hang up.
extension number
4
Message 4. “Back at %% : %%” (time)
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (750) and 4.
2
3. Enter the hour (00 through 23) and the minute (00 through 59).
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3
hour and minute
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-5
A
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
4. Hang up.
4
Message 5. “Out until %% / %%” (month/day) or (day/month)
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (750) and 5.
2
3. Enter the month and the day.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3
4. Hang up.
month and day
4
Message 6. “In a Meeting”
1
2
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the feature number (750) and 6.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3. Hang up.
3
Message 7, 8, and 9. (User programmable)
1
6-6
1. Lift the handset.
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
A
2. Dial the feature number (750) and a desired message number (7
through 9).
2
(X: 7 through 9)
3
3. Enter the parameters, if required.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
4. Hang up.
parameters
4
Cancelling
1. Lift the handset.
1
2
2. Dial the feature number (750) and 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3
3. Hang up.
Conditions
• Only one message can be selected at a time.
• Regarding Message 3;
1) If the extension number you want to dial has four characters, refer to System
Programming to change the setting of the characters.
2) If the extension number you want to dial has less than three characters, dial “ ” or “#”
to make it up to three characters.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[008] Absent Messages
[100] Flexible Numbering, Absent message
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-7
A
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Account Code Entry
An Account Code is used to identify incoming and outgoing CO calls, for accounting and
billing purposes. The account code is appended to the “Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR)” call record. For incoming CO calls, account codes are optional. There are three
modes available for entering an account code during an outgoing call: Verified - All Calls
mode; and Verified - Toll Restriction Override mode; and Option mode. One mode is
selected for each extension on a “Class of Service*” basis.
Entering account codes
1. Lift the handset.
1
2
2. Dial the feature number (49).
• No tone is returned.
3
3. Dial the account code and #.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
4. Dial the line access code (0 or 81 through 88) and dial.
account code and #
4
line access code
Conditions
In “Verified - All Calls” mode
• You must always enter a pre-assigned account code when making any of the following calls
unless it has previously been stored in memory:
a) Call Forwarding — to CO Line
b) Manual Dialing (Selecting a CO line)
c) Pickup Dialing (Hot Line)
d) Redial, Last Number
e) Station Speed Dialing
f) System Speed Dialing
In “Verified - Toll Restriction Override” mode
• You can enter a pre-assigned account code only when you need to override toll restriction
(Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry).
6-8
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
A
In “Option” mode
• You can enter any account code if needed. It is possible to record a calling or called party’s
account code in the SMDR optionally, within fifteen seconds after the other party hangs up.
General
• It is not possible to enter an account code while having a conversation or hearing reorder
tone.
• There is no need for an account code entry when receiving incoming calls.
• Dialing “ ” while entering an account code allows you to clear the number and re-enter.
• Flashing the hookswitch while entering an account code cancels the entry.
• An account code can be up to five numeric digits (0 through 9). After entering an account
code, the delimiter “#” or “99” must be entered the entered account code should not be “99”
nor end with “9.”
• An account code can be stored into Memory Dialing (“Pickup Dialing (Hot Line),”
“System/Station Speed Dialing,” “Call Forwarding — to CO Line”). The sequence to enter
an account code into Memory Dialing is:
— [Feature Number] [Account Code] [#] [Line Access Code] [Phone Number]
or
— [Feature Number] [Account Code] [99] [Line Access Code] [Phone Number]
• If you use an account code which is for a private call, the phone number of the destination
is not recorded.
• If an entered account code does not match a stored account code,
1) When making an outside call, a reorder tone is returned.
2) While having a conversation, the code entry is accepted and the call is maintained
(=Option mode).
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[105] Account Codes
[508] Account Code Entry Mode
[601] Class of Service
Feature References
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) (→ see Installation Manual)
Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry
* Class of Service (COS) is used to define the features which are allowed for a group of extension.
Refer to the Installation Manual for programming and more details.
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-9
A
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Alternate Calling — Ring / Voice
Allows you to select ring or voice calling when making an intercom call. In Ring-Calling
mode, you can call the other party with a ring tone. While in Voice-Calling mode, you can
talk to the other party, immediately after a confirmation tone.
Alternating (to Voice-Calling mode)
If the called extension is set to Ring-Calling mode, you hear ringback tone.
1. Press within ten seconds.
• You hear a confirmation tone when it is changed to Voice-Calling
mode.
1
Alternating (to Ring-Calling mode)
If the called extension is set to Voice-Calling mode, you hear a
confirmation tone.
1. Press within ten seconds.
• You hear a ringback tone when it is changed to Ring-Calling
mode.
1
Conditions
• Default is Ring-Calling mode.
• You can switch the desired calling mode only once during a call.
• If party you are calling is using a single line telephone (SLT) only Ring-Calling mode is
available.
Feature References
Intercom Calling
6-10
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
A
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)
When the selected CO line or extension you have dialed is busy, dial the camp-on code and
hang up. Your telephone will ring when the called party is idle.
Setting
If you make a call and hear busy tone;
1. Dial 6.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a reorder tone.
1
2
2. Hang up.
• Wait until the telephone rings back.
Answering an intercom recall
If you hear the telephone ringing;
1. Lift the handset.
• You hear a ringback tone and the called extension rings
automatically.
1
Answering a CO recall
If you hear the telephone ringing;
1. Lift the handset.
• You hear dial tone.
1
2. Dial the phone number of the outside party.
2
phone number
Cancelling
1
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the feature number (46).
2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-11
B
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
3. Hang up.
3
Conditions
• If you do not answer before four callback ring signals (within 10 seconds), this feature will
be automatically cancelled.
• If the called party becomes busy again after the callback ringing starts, ringing stops but this
feature will be executed again when the extension becomes free.
Busy Station Signaling (BSS)
Allows you to inform a busy extension that you are waiting by sending three beeps.
If you make an intercom call and hear busy tone;
1. Dial 2.
• Wait for an answer and talk.
1
Conditions
• To receive the signal from the calling extension, refer to “Call Waiting” in this manual.
• This feature is available only for called extensions which have set “Call Waiting.”
Feature References
Call Waiting
6-12
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
C
Call Forwarding — SUMMARY
Automatically transfers incoming calls to another extension or to an external destination.
The following types are available:
Type
Description
Call Forwarding
— All Calls
All incoming calls are forwarded to another extension.
Call Forwarding
— Busy
All incoming calls are forwarded to another extension, when
your extension is busy.
Call Forwarding
— No Answer
All incoming calls are forwarded to another extension if you
don’t answer the call.
Call Forwarding
— Busy/No Answer
All incoming calls are forwarded to another extension if you
don’t answer or your extension is busy.
Call Forwarding
— to CO Line
Incoming intercom calls are forwarded to a CO line.
Call Forwarding
— Follow Me
Allows you to remotely set “Call Forwarding — All Calls”
from another extension.
Note: You can also set the Voice Mail or Radio Paging Systems to the forwarding
destination. Refer to “Voice Mail Integration” in this manual.
Conditions
• To cancel Call Forwarding features, refer to “Call Forwarding — CANCEL” in this manual.
• Changing of Call Forwarding is not possible. For example, if extension A has already
established Call Forwarding to extension B and extension B wants to activate Call
Forwarding to extension C, then extension B will receive reorder tone. Also if extension C
wants to activate Call Forwarding to extension A, then extension C will receive reorder
tone.
Ext. A
(Yes)
Ext. B
(No)
Ext. C
(No)
• A floating extension such as MODEM or external pager cannot be programmed as the
forwarding destination.
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-13
C
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
• The destination extension, which is a proprietary telephone (PT) which does not have the
associated CO button, is unable to receive calls.
• Confirmation tone 2 (two beeps) is sent when the previously programmed data is same as
the new data, if not, confirmation tone 1 (one beep) is sent. Refer to “Tone List” in the
Appendix (Section 8).
Feature References
Call Forwarding — CANCEL
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Voice Mail Integration
Call Forwarding — All Calls
This feature is used when you want your calls to be automatically re-directed to another
extension.
Setting
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (710) and 2.
2
3. Dial the extension number to which you wish to forward the call.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3
4. Hang up.
extension number
4
6-14
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
C
Call Forwarding — Busy
A call directed to your extension is forwarded to another extension if your telephone is busy.
Setting
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (710) and 3.
2
3. Dial the extension number to which you wish to forward the call.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3
4. Hang up.
extension number
4
Call Forwarding — No Answer
Calls to your extension are forwarded to another extension if you do not answer the call in a
pre-determined time.
Setting
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (710) and 4.
2
3. Dial the extension number to which you wish to forward the call.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3
4. Hang up.
extension number
4
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-15
C
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[202] Call Forwarding — No Answer Time
Call Forwarding — Busy / No Answer
Your calls are forwarded to another extension if your extension is busy or you do not answer
the call in a pre-determined time.
Setting
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (710) and 5.
2
3. Dial the extension number to which you wish to forward the call.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3
4. Hang up.
extension number
4
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[202] Call Forwarding — No Answer Time
6-16
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
C
Call Forwarding — to CO Line
Intercom calls directed to your extension will be sent to an external destination. The
telephone number must be pre-programmed.
Setting
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (710) and 6.
2
3. Dial the line access code (0 or 81 through 88).
3
4. Dial the phone number to which you wish to forward the call.
line access code
5. Dial #.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
4
phone number
6. Hang up.
5
6
Conditions
• Up to sixteen digits (line access code is included) can be programmed.
• “Class of Service” programming determines the extension that can perform this feature.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[504] Call Forwarding to CO Line
[601] Class of Service
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-17
C
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Call Forwarding — Follow Me
If you forget to set “Call Forwarding — All Calls” before you leave your desk, this allows
you to set the same function from the destination extension.
Setting
– at the destination extension;
1. Lift the handset.
1
2
2. Dial the feature number (710) and 7.
3
3. Dial your own extension number.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
4. Hang up.
your extension number
4
Conditions
• This feature can be cancelled at your extension or at the destination extension.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[991] COS Additional Information
6-18
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
C
Call Forwarding — CANCEL
There are two cancelling methods for “Call Forwarding” depending on its function type.
Follow the appropriate cancelling procedure described below.
Cancelling Call Forwarding at your (original) extension
1
1. Lift the handset.
2
2. Dial the feature number (710) and 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3. Hang up.
3
Cancelling Call Forwarding at the destination extension — “Follow Me (All Calls)” only
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (710) and 8.
2
3. Dial your extension number.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3
4. Hang up.
your extension number
4
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-19
C
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Call Hold
Allows you to place an intercom or a CO call on hold.
To place a call on hold
While having a conversation;
1. Press the Recall button.
1
R
2. Dial the feature number (50).
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• You may replace the handset.
2
Retrieving a call on hold
– at the holding extension;
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (50).
2
Conditions
• If a held call is not retrieved within the specific period of time (default: 60 sec.), “Hold
Recall” occurs.
• If a CO call is placed on hold and not retrieved in fifteen minutes, it is automatically
disconnected.
• Either one CO or intercom call can be placed on exclusive hold at the same time.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[200] Hold Recall Time
Feature References
Call Hold Retrieve
Hold Recall (→ see Installation Manual)
6-20
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
C
Call Hold Retrieve
Allows you to retrieve a call that has been placed on hold by another extension.
Retrieving a CO call on hold
– at another extension;
1. Lift the handset.
1
2
2. Dial the feature number (53).
3
3. Dial the held CO line number (01 through 08) or (01 through 24).
- 01 through 08 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 01 through 24 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
held CO line number
Retrieving an intercom call on hold
– at another extension;
1. Lift the handset.
1
2
2. Dial the feature number (51).
3
3. Dial the holding extension number.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
holding extension number
Conditions
• “Call Park” cannot be retrieved by this feature.
• Confirmation tone is audible when the call is retrieved. Eliminating the tone is
programmable.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References
Call Hold
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-21
C
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Call Park
Allows you to place a held call into a system parking area. This releases you from the parked
call to perform other operations. The parked call can be retrieved by any extension user.
1
R
While having a conversation;
1. Press the Recall button.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
2
2. Dial the feature number (52).
3
3. Dial a parking zone number (0 through 9).
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone when the call is
parked.
• If you hear a busy tone, that indicates the specified parking zone
is unavailable.
• It is not necessary to redial the feature number to change the
parking zone. Just enter the parking zone number while hearing
busy tone.
parking zone number
Retrieving a parked call
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (52).
2
3. Dial the parking zone number (0 through 9) at which the call is
parked.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional) and then you can talk to
the party.
• You hear a reorder tone if there is no held call.
3
parking zone number
Conditions
• Up to ten calls can be parked.
• If a parked call is not retrieved within Transfer Recall time, “Call Park Recall” occurs. If a
parked call is a CO call, it is possible to select whether the “Call Park Recall” will go to the
initiating extension or to the operator through System Programming. If a parked call is an
intercom call, the “Call Park Recall” will return to the initiating extension.
6-22
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
C
• If a “Call Park Recall” is not retrieved within fifteen minutes, it is automatically
disconnected.
• Confirmation tone is audible when the parked call is retrieved. Eliminating the tone is
programmable.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[201] Transfer Recall Time
[990] System Additional Information, Fields (11), (16)
Call Pickup, CO Line
Allows you to answer an incoming CO call that is ringing at another’s telephone.
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (4 ).
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• You can talk to the caller.
2
Conditions
• It is not possible to answer Call Waiting calls.
• Confirmation tone is audible when the call is picked up. Eliminating the tone is
programmable.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References
Call Pickup Deny
Call Waiting
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-23
C
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Call Pickup, Directed
Allows you to answer an incoming call ringing at any other extension.
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (41).
2
3. Dial the extension number at which a call is ringing.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• You can talk to the caller.
3
extension number
Conditions
• Doorphone calls can be picked up from extensions that are not programmed to answer
doorphone calls.
• A confirmation tone is audible when the call is picked up. Eliminating the tone is
programmable.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References
Call Pickup Deny
6-24
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
C
Call Pickup, Group
Allows you to answer a call that is ringing at another telephone within your extension group.
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (40).
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• You can talk to the caller.
2
Conditions
• You can pick up an incoming CO, intercom or doorphone call.
• It is not possible to answer Call Waiting calls.
• A confirmation tone is audible when the call is picked up. Eliminating the tone is
programmable.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[602] Extension Group Assignment
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References
Call Pickup Deny
Call Waiting
Extension Group (→ see Installation Manual)
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-25
C
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Call Pickup Deny
Allows you to prohibit another extension from picking up your calls with the “Call Pickup”
features.
Setting
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (720) and 1.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
2
3. Hang up.
3
Cancelling
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (720) and 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
2
3. Hang up.
3
Feature References
Call Pickup, CO Line
Call Pickup, Directed
Call Pickup, Group
6-26
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
C
Call Splitting
Allows you to alternate between two callers. Placing the current call on hold allows
conversation with the other party.
1
R
While having a conversation;
1. Press the Recall button.
• The other party is placed on hold.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
2
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
• You hear a ringback tone.
extension number
3. Wait for the answer and announce.
3
4. Press the Recall button.
• The first held call is released.
• Flashing this switch alternates between the callers.
4
R
Conditions
• This feature does not work during doorphone call or paging.
Feature References
Call Hold
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-27
C
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Call Transfer — to Extension
Allows you to perform a Screened or Unscreened Call Transfer to another extension.
Screened Call Transfer
1
R
While having a conversation;
1. Press the Recall button.
• The other party is placed on hold.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
2
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
• You hear a ringback tone.
extension number
3
3. Wait for the answer and announce.
4
4. Hang up.
• The call is transferred.
Unscreened Call Transfer
1
R
While having a conversation;
1. Press the Recall button.
• The other party is placed on hold.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
2
extension number
3
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
• You hear a ringback tone.
• Ringing starts at the extension you dialed.
3. Hang up.
Conditions
• If you want to return to the held call, press the Recall button before the destination
extension answers.
6-28
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
C
• If the destination extension does not answer the call within twelve rings (default), the
“Transfer Recall” occurs. If the transferred call is a CO call, it is possible to select whether
the Transfer Recall will go to the initiating extension or to the operator through System
Programming.
• If the “Transfer Recall” returns to you and you do not answer it for thirty minutes, the line
will be disconnected.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[201] Transfer Recall Time
[990] System Additional Information, Field (11)
Feature References
Transfer Recall (→ see Installation Manual)
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-29
C
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Call Waiting
While in conversation, a Call Waiting tone informs you that there is a call waiting. You can
answer the third call by disconnecting or placing the current call on hold.
Setting
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (731) and 1.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
2
3. Hang up.
3
Cancelling
1
2
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the feature number (731) and 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3. Hang up.
3
To talk to the new caller by terminating the current call
1
2
6-30
While hearing Call Waiting tone;
1. Hang up.
• The current call is disconnected.
2. Lift the handset.
• You can talk to the new caller.
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
C
To talk to the new caller by holding the current call
While hearing Call Waiting tone;
1. Press the Recall button.
1
R
2
2. Dial the feature number (50).
• The current call is placed on hold.
• You hear a dial tone.
3
3. Hang up.
4. Lift the handset.
• You can talk to the new caller.
4
Conditions
• Call Waiting tone is generated at the extension in the following conditions:
1) When a CO call comes in.
2) When a Doorphone call comes in.
3) When another extension executes the “Busy Station Signaling (BSS)” feature.
• Setting “Data Line Security” temporarily cancels this feature.
Feature References
Busy Station Signaling (BSS)
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-31
C
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
Allows you to restrict the presentation of your number to the called party when you make a
call. You can set the called party to see your number on the display once or in succession.
To restrict the presentation of your number to the called party
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (57) and 2.
2
3. Hang up.
3
To present your number to the called party
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (57) and 0.
2
3. Hang up.
3
To change the current setting at just time you make a call
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (57) and 1.
2
3. Dial the line access code (0 or 81 through 88).
3
line access code
6-32
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
C
4. Dial the phone number.
4
phone number
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, CLIR continue/once/cancel
[419] Subscriber Number Assignment
[516] Calling Line Identification Restriction
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-33
C
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)
Allows you to restrict the presentation of your number to the calling party when you receive
the incoming call. You can set the calling party not to see your number on the display.
To restrict the presentation of your number to the calling party
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (58) and 1.
2
3. Hang up.
3
To present your number to the calling party
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (58) and 0.
2
3. Hang up.
3
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, COLR set/cancel
[419] Subscriber Number Assignment
[517] Connected Line Identification Restriction
6-34
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
C
Conference
During a two-party conversation, you can add a third party to make a three-party conference.
The members of a conference on the line may be three extensions, one extension and two
CO lines, or two extensions and one CO line.
To establish a conference
1
R
While having a two-party conversation;
1. Press the Recall button.
• The other party is placed on hold.
2. Dial the phone number of the third party.
2
phone number
3. Press the Recall button after the third party answers.
3
R
4
4. Dial 3.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• A three-party conference is now established.
To leave the conference
1. Hang up.
• The other two parties may continue their conversation.
• If the other two parties are both CO lines, they will be
disconnected.
1
To talk to the first caller while keeping the second call on hold
1
R
1. Press the Recall button.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• You can talk to the original party.
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-35
C
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Conditions
• When you dial the telephone number of an outside party, you must dial the line access code
(0 or 81 through 88) as the leading digit.
• You can return to the original party before the third party answers by pressing the Recall
button.
• Up to six conference calls are allowed simultaneously.
• A conference call is also established by “Executive Busy Override.”
• When a two-party call is changed to a three-party call and vice versa, a confirmation tone is
sent to all three parties. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[990] System Additional Information, Field (13)
Feature References
Executive Busy Override — Extension
6-36
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
D
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Allows you to refuse an incoming intercom call or to transfer an incoming CO call to the
backup station.
Setting
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (710) and 1.
2
3. Dial the extension number or 0 (to operator) for backup station.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3
4. Hang up.
extension number
4
Cancelling
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (710) and 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
2
3. Hang up.
3
Conditions
• When this feature is set, an incoming CO call will be automatically transferred to the
backup station (pre-assigned extension). An incoming intercom call will send the DND tone
to your extension.
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-37
D
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
• When this feature is set, “Call Forwarding” and “Do Not Disturb for Direct Dial In Calls”
feature will be cancelled.
• If your extension is already set as the destination of the “Call Forwarding” feature, “Do Not
Disturb (DND)” feature and “Do Not Disturb for Direct Dial In Calls” feature, you can not
set this feature and when you set this feature, you hear a reorder tone.
• While the operator is set as the destination of the “Do Not Disturb (DND)” feature, even if
the operator is different from Day mode and Night mode, an incoming call will be
transferred to an operator. If the operator is not assigned, an incoming call will be
transferred to the IRNA.
Feature References
Call Forwarding
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override
Do Not Disturb for Direct Dial In Calls
6-38
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
D
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override
Allows you to call an extension even though the “Do Not Disturb (DND)” feature is set.
System Programming is necessary to use this feature.
If you make an intercom call and hear Do Not Disturb (DND) tone;
1. Dial 2.
• Wait for an answer.
1
Conditions
• If you hear a reorder tone after dialing 2, this means the “Do Not Disturb (DND) Override”
feature is not set at your extension.
• You must dial 2 within ten seconds after hearing Do Not Disturb (DND) tone.
• “Class of Service” programming determines the extensions that can perform this feature.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[507] Do Not Disturb Override
[601] Class of Service
Feature References
Do Not Disturb (DND)
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-39
D
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Do Not Disturb for Direct Dial In Calls
Allows you to set “Do Not Disturb (DND)” feature for Direct Dial In (DDI) calls. Direct
Dial In calls will be transferred to the operator. The operator cannot set this feature.
Setting
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (56) and 1.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
2
3. Hang up.
3
Cancelling
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (56) and 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
2
3. Hang up.
3
Conditions
• When this feature is set, an incoming call (directed by Intercept Routing or DIL 1:1, DIL
1:N) can be answered.
• Even if this feature is set, your extension doesn’t deny Direct Dial In calls the following
cases:
1) The destination of Direct Dial In calls is UCD group.
2) The destination of Direct Dial In calls is the Hunting group number that is set this
feature.
6-40
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
D
• When you set this feature, “Call Forwarding” and “Do Not Disturb (DND)” features will be
cancelled.
• While you set this feature, if you go off-hook, you hear a special dial tone.
Feature References
Call Forwarding
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override
Direct Dial In (→ See Installation Manual)
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-41
D
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Doorphone Call
Allows you to have a conversation with a visitor at your doorphone. You can also unlock the
door from your telephone.
Calling an extension from a doorphone
1. Press the Doorphone button.
• The visitor hears a beep.
• Wait for an answer and talk.
1
Answering a doorphone call
When you hear the doorphone ring tone at the extension;
1. Lift the handset.
1
Calling a doorphone
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (68).
2
3
or
3. Dial a doorphone number (1) or (1 – 2).
- 1 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 1 – 2 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
• You can talk after you hear a confirmation tone.
To unlock the door from an assigned extension
1
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the feature number (55).
2
6-42
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
3
or
4
D
3. Dial a door opener number (1) or (1 – 2).
- 1 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 1 – 2 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
• You hear a confirmation tone.
• The door is left unlocked for 5 seconds.
4. Hang up.
To unlock the door while talking to the doorphone from any extension
1. Press the Recall button.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
1
R
2. Dial 5.
• You hear a confirmation tone.
• The door is left unlocked for 5 seconds.
2
3. Hang up.
3
Conditions
• You must dial 5 within ten seconds after pressing the Recall button.
• If you do not answer an incoming doorphone call within thirty seconds, the call is cancelled.
• You must program the extensions that can receive calls from each doorphone for day and
night mode.
• It is possible for any extension users to originate a call to a doorphone.
• The door opener 1 and 2 can be unlocked using the feature number, while the doors which
are paired with the doorphone 1 or 2 can be unlocked while talking to the doorphone.
• The door opener 1 and the doorphone 1 are the master cabinet, the door opener 2 and the
doorphone 2 are the slave cabinet.
• “Class of Service” programming determines the extension that can unlock the door.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[511] Door Opener Access
[607]–[608] Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day/Night
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-43
E
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Electronic Station Lockout
Allows you to lock your extension so that other users cannot make outgoing CO calls at your
extension.
Locking
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (77).
2
3. Dial the lock code (000 through 999).
3
lock code
4. Dial the same lock code again.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
4
5. Hang up.
lock code
5
Unlocking
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (77).
2
3. Dial the same lock code as you used to lock the extension.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3
4. Hang up.
lock code
4
6-44
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
E
Conditions
• An attempt to dial to a CO line from a locked extension receives reorder tone.
• The extension assigned as an operator can set and cancel this function for another extension
(Remote Station Lock Control).
• “Remote Station Lock Control” overrides this feature. If the operator sets Remote Station
Lock on the extension you have already locked, you cannot unlock it.
Feature References
Remote Station Lock Control (3.3/Operator Service Features)
Emergency Call
Allows you to make an emergency CO call automatically. There are maximum eight
emergency calls. “117,” “118,” and “144” are the default settings and the others can be
stored through System Programming.
Dialing
1. Lift the handset.
• You hear a dial tone.
1
2. Dial the desired emergency number.
• This feature automatically chooses an idle CO line.
2
emergency number
Conditions
• The emergency call will override the toll restriction level, the “Electric Station Lockout”
feature, and the account code mode, “Verified — All Calls” or “Verified — Toll Restriction
Override.”
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[009] Emergency Dial Number Set
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-45
E
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Executive Busy Override — Extension
Allows you to enter into an existing intercom (extension) conversation.
If you make an intercom call and hear busy tone;
1. Dial 3.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• A three-party conference is now established.
1
To leave the conference
1. Hang up.
• The other two parties continue their conversation.
1
Conditions
• You must dial 3 within ten seconds of hearing busy tone.
• This feature does not work when “Data Line Security” or “Executive Busy Override Deny”
has been set at either or both of the other parties.
• “Class of Service” programming determines the extensions that can perform this feature.
• When a two-party call is changed to a three-party call and vice versa, a confirmation tone is
sent to all three parties. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[505] Executive Busy Override
[601] Class of Service
[612] Data Line Security
[990] System Additional Information, Field (13)
Feature References
Conference
Executive Busy Override Deny
6-46
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
E
Executive Busy Override Deny
Allows you to prohibit other extension users from intruding into your conversation.
Setting
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (733) and 1.
• You hear a confirmation tone.
2
3. Hang up.
3
Cancelling
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (733) and 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone.
2
3. Hang up.
3
Conditions
• “Class of Service” programming determines the extensions that can perform this feature.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[506] Executive Busy Override Deny
Feature References
Executive Busy Override — Extension
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-47
E
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
External Relay Control
A pre-assigned extension can switch on the relay connected to the system.
Relay on
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (67).
2
3
or
3. Dial the relay number (1) or (1 – 2).
- 1 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 1 – 2 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
(1 = Master, 2 = Slave)
4
4. Hang up.
Conditions
• “Class of Service” programming determines the extensions that can perform this feature.
• You can assign the duration time that the relay is on, after entering the relay number. If you
assign the duration time zero, the relay is on while you are in off-hook status.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, External relay on
[213] External Relay Connecting Time
[512] External Relay Access
6-48
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
E
External Ringer
Allows incoming calls (CO line, extension) to activate external ringer. You can answer the
ringer from any extension.
Setting
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (730).
2
3
or
4
3. Dial the external ringer number (1) or (1 – 2).
- 1 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 1 – 2 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
• You hear a confirmation tone.
4. Hang up.
Cancelling
1
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the feature number (730) and 0.
2
3. Hang up.
3
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-49
E
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Answering
When hearing a tone from the external ringer;
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (47).
2
3
or
3. Dial the external ringer number (1) or (1 – 2).
- 1 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 1 – 2 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• The line is connected and you can start talking.
Conditions
• The external ringer can be assigned as a destination of the following feature:
a) CO Line — DIL, Direct Dialing In
b) Extension — All incoming call
c) TAFAS
• You can assign to enable/disable the external ringer per extension/CO line.
• One ringer can be connected per system.
• The ringer can be assigned a floating number.*
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering External ringer, External ringer answer
[418] External Ringer Assignment
[813] Floating Number Assignment
* Floating Number (FN) is a virtual extension number for resources to make it appear to be an extension.
Refer to the Installation Manual.
6-50
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
H
Hotel Application
Room Management
Allows you to print out the information of a guest room (e.g. cleaning status of the room and
the total of the minibar charge) with a telephone in each room. The Messages No.6-No.9 can
be printed out.
<Example> Message 7: “Cleaned-up”
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (750) and 7.
2
3. Hang up.
3
<Example> Message 8: “Minibar FR %%%.%”
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (750) and 8.
2
3. Enter the minibar charge.
3
4. Hang up.
minibar charge
4
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-51
H
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Data similar to below is printed out.
Date
Time
Ext
Department Code
CO
Dial Number
Duration
24.03.95 14:09
221
Cleaned-up
24.03.95 10:23
230
Minibar FR 535.5
Charge
Code CD
Conditions
• System Programming is required to program the messages.
• This operation is the same as the Absent Message feature.
• It is necessary to assign [990] “System Additional Information, Field (41)” through System
Programming beforehand.
Programming References
• User Programming (Manager Programming) (Section 3)
[008] Absent Messages
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[008] Absent Messages
[990] System Additional Information, Field (41)
6-52
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
IL
Intercom Calling
Allows you to make a call to another extension.
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the extension number.
2
3. Start talking.
extension number
3
4. Hang up after completion of the conversation.
4
Conditions
• After dialing an extension number, you will hear one of the following tones:
Ringback tone: Indicates that the destination extension is being called.
Confirmation tone: Indicates that you can perform voice calling.
Busy tone: Indicates that the destination extension is busy.
Do Not Disturb (DND) tone: Indicates that the destination extension has been set the
“Do Not Disturb (DND)” feature.
Programming References
• User Programming (Manager Programming) (Section 3)
[003] Extension Number Set
[004] Extension Name Set
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[003] Extension Number Set
[004] Extension Name Set
Lockout
If one party in a conversation goes on-hook, they are both disconnected from the speech path
automatically. Reorder tone is sent to the off-hook party before it is disconnected. No
operation is necessary.
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-53
L
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Log-In / Log-Out
Allows you to assign the log-in mode or log-out mode within the hunting or UCD group.
When in the log-out mode, you can leave the group temporarily, preventing the hunting calls
being sent to your extension.
Log-In
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (45) and 1.
• You hear a confirmation tone.
2
3. Hang up.
3
Log-Out
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (45) and 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone.
2
3. Hang up.
3
Conditions
• Default is “Log-In” mode.
• There should be at least one extension that is in log-in mode. Only one log-in extension
cannot be set in log-out mode.
Feature References
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Station Hunting (→ see Installation Manual)
6-54
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
M
Message Waiting
Allows you to leave a message for another extension. If the destination extension is provided
with a message waiting lamp, it will be lit. Even if a lamp is not provided, the extension will
provide a special ringing and dial tone (dial tone 4*) to indicate that a message has been
received.
Setting
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (70) and 1.
2
3. Dial the extension number of the person who you wish to leave a
message.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3
4. Hang up.
extension number
4
1
2
If the called extension is busy;
1. Dial 4.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
• You must dial 4 within 5 seconds after dialing extension number.
2. Hang up.
Cancelling
1
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the feature number (70) and 0.
2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-55
M
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
3. Dial the extension number where you left a message.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3
extension number
4 Hang up.
4
Calling back the message sender
1. Lift the handset and if necessary, dial the feature number (70) and
2.*1
• If you have more than one message at your extension, the line is
connected to the first message sender.
1
2
2. Start talking.
• The message is cleared after the conversation.
Clearing all messages by the message receiver
1. Lift the handset.
• You hear dial tone 4.*2
1
2. Dial the feature number (70) and 0.
2
3 Dial your (message receiver’s) extension number.
• All messages are cleared.
3
your extension number
Conditions
• If multiple messages are left at your extension, calling back is executed in the receiving
order.
• The system supports a maximum of 128 simultaneous messages. If you try to set the 129th
message, you hear reorder tone.
• The special ringing tone rings three times at 5 second intervals after which there is an
interval of programmable length. The length of this programmable interval can be set by
System Programming.
6-56
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
N
• If you set the length of the interval to zero, the special ringing tone doesn’t ring.
*1 System Programming is required to make the operation available.
*2 One of the dial tones. Refer to “Tone List” in the Appendix (Section 8).
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[214] Message Waiting Ring Internal Time
[990] System Additional Information, Field (9), (38)
Night Service
This system supports both the Night and Day modes of operation. System operation for
originating and receiving calls can be different in day and night modes. Toll restriction calls
can be programmed to prevent unauthorized toll calls at night. Day/Night mode can be
switched either automatically at a pre-assigned time or manually at anytime desired.
Automatic Night Service: your system will switch the Day/Night mode at the
programmed time each day.
Manual Night Service: you can switch the Day/Night mode at anytime desired.
Automatic Night Service
1
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the feature number (78).
2
3
3. Dial 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone.
4. Hang up.
4
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-57
N
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Manual Night Service
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (78).
2
3
or
4
3. Dial 1 or 2.
- 1 : from Night mode to Day mode
- 2 : from Day mode to Night mode
• You hear a confirmation tone.
4. Hang up.
Conditions
• The following items have separate day and night programming:
1) Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment
2) Direct In Lines (DIL)
3) Doorphone Ringing Assignment
4) Intercept Routing
5) Ringing, Delayed
6) Toll Restriction Level
7) Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing
8) Operator Assignment
• “Class of Service” programming determines the extensions that can perform this feature.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[102] Day/Night Service Starting Time
[601] Class of Service
Feature References
CO Line Connection Assignment — Outgoing (→ see Installation Manual)
Direct In Lines (DIL) (→ see Installation Manual)
Doorphone Call
Intercept Routing (→ see Installation Manual)
Ringing, Delayed (→ see Installation Manual)
Toll Restriction (→ see Installation Manual)
6-58
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
O
Operator Call
Allows you to call an operator within the system. There can be up to two extensions
assigned as Operator 1 and 2. If there is only one operator or if you do not specify the
operator, you should generate the General call. If you want to specify the operator, you
should generate the Specific call.
General call
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (9).
2
Specific call
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (61) for Operator 1, or (62) for Operator 2.
2
or
Conditions
• If you generate the General call for two operators, Operator 2 will receive your call if
Operator 1 is busy.
• If no operator is assigned, this feature is rejected with a reorder tone.
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-59
O
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Outward Dialing, Line Access — SUMMARY
A CO line can be accessed in the following ways:
Line Access, Automatic
Dial the feature number (0).
Line Access, CO Line group
Dial the feature number (8) and
a CO line group number (1-8).
Conditions
• After dialing the feature number, you will hear one of the following tones:
Dial tone: Indicates that an idle line is captured.
Busy tone: Indicates that the selected CO line is busy.
Reorder tone:
1) Indicates that the CO line you have attempted to access is not assigned.
2) Indicates that access to CO lines is denied.
• If you hear a reorder tone, the call is restricted by one of the following:
— The extension has been locked by the owner (Electronic Station Lockout) or the operator
(Remote Station Lock Control).
— The extension may be restricted by the account code mode, “Verified - All Calls” or
“Verified - Toll Restriction Override.”
— The extension may be restricted from making toll calls (Toll Restriction).
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[103] Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment
— (Used for “Line Access, Automatic” only.)
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Group Assignment — Day/Night
Feature References
Account Code Entry
Electronic Station Lockout
Remote Station Lock Control (4.3/Operator Service Features)
Toll Restriction (→ see Installation Manual)
6-60
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
O
Line Access, Automatic
Allows you to select an available CO line automatically.
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (0).
• You hear a dial tone.
2
3. Dial the phone number.
3
4. Start talking.
phone number
4
5. Hang up after completion of the conversation.
5
Line Access, CO Line Group
Allows you to select an idle CO line within the designated CO line group. Through
programming, CO lines can be divided into eight line groups.
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (8).
2
3. Dial a CO line group number (1 through 8).
• You hear a dial tone.
3
CO line group number
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-61
O
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
4. Dial the phone number.
4
5. Start talking.
phone number
5
6. Hang up after completion of the conversation.
6
6-62
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
P
Paging — SUMMARY
Paging allows you to make a voice announcement to multiple persons at the same time. Your
message is announced over built-in speakers of proprietary telephones (PT) and/or external
speakers (External Pagers). The paged person can answer your page from a nearby
telephone. You cannot be paged at a single line telephone (SLT), but you can answer the
page, which is announced over a nearby PT or external pagers, from your SLT. There are
three types of paging as shown below. You can select the appropriate type according to your
needs.
Type
Paging — All
Paging — External
Description
Paging through both the built-in speakers
and external pagers.
Paging through all the external pagers
simultaneously.
Paging to a specific external pager.
Paging to all groups (all extensions)
simultaneously.
Paging — Group
Paging to a particular group of extensions
using the built-in speakers.
Conditions
• To answer the page, refer to “Paging — ANSWER.”
• The paged extension users hear confirmation tone before the voice announcement.
• Confirmation tone from external pagers (External Pager Confirmation Tone) is audible at
the paged side, before the voice announcement. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
• Confirmation tone is audible before making the voice announcement. Eliminating the tone
is programmable.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering/Paging — external, Paging — external answer
[602] Extension Group Assignment — (Used for “Paging — Group” only.)
[805] External Pager Confirmation Tone
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References
Paging — ANSWER
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-63
P
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Paging — All
Allows you to make a voice announcement to all extensions. Your message is announced
from the built-in speakers of the proprietary telephones (PT) and from the external pagers.
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (63 or 64) and .
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
2
3. Make the announcement.
or
4. Wait for an answer and talk.
3
4
Paging — External
Allows you to make a voice announcement over external pagers.
To access all external pagers
1
1. Lift the handset.
2
2. Dial the feature number (64) and 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
3. Make the announcement.
3
6-64
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
P
4. Wait for an answer and talk.
4
To access a particular pager only
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (64).
2
3. Dial the external pager number (1 – 2) or (1 – 4) you wish to use.
- 1 – 2 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 1 – 4 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
3
external pager number
4. Make the announcement.
4
5. Wait for an answer and talk.
5
Conditions
• If the designated pager is being used, busy tone is heard.
• The paging priorities are as follows:
1) TAFAS (Trunk (CO Line) Answer From Any Station)
2) Paging — External
3) Background Music (BGM) — External
If a higher priority page is requested when a lower priority page is active, the higher priority
overrides the lower one.
Feature References
Background Music (BGM) — External (4.3/Operator Service Features)
Trunk (CO Line) Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-65
P
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Paging — Group
Allows you to select an extension group and make a voice announcement. Paging all groups
(8 groups) simultaneously is also available. The announcement can be heard through the
built-in speakers of the extensions only.
To access all groups simultaneously
1
1. Lift the handset.
2
2. Dial the feature number (63) and 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
3. Make the announcement.
3
4. Wait for an answer and talk.
4
To access a particular group of extensions
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (63).
2
3. Dial the extension group number (1 through 8).
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
3
4. Make the announcement.
extension group number
4
6-66
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
P
5. Wait for an answer and talk.
5
Conditions
• There is a maximum of eight extension groups. “Paging — Group” to different groups can
be performed simultaneously.
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-67
P
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Paging — ANSWER
A page sent to the built-in speakers of the proprietary telephones or the external pagers can
be answered by any extension in the system.
Answering a page sent to the built-in speaker
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (43).
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• You can start talking.
2
Answering a page sent to a particular external pager
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (44).
2
3. Dial the corresponding external pager number (1 – 2) or (1 – 4).
- 1 – 2 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 1 – 4 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• You can start talking.
3
external pager number
Conditions
• Only extensions within the paged group can answer “Paging — Group.”
• Confirmation tone is audible when the page is answered. Eliminating the tone is
programmable.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
6-68
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
P
Paging and Transfer
You can transfer a call using the paging function (Paging — All, Paging — External, or
Paging — Group).
Using Paging — All
1
R
2
or
While having a conversation;
1. Press the Recall button.
• You hear a dial tone.
• The other party is placed on hold.
2. Dial the feature number (63 or 64) and .
• The feature number can be the one for either group or external
paging.
3. Make the announcement after hearing confirmation tone (optional).
3
4. Wait for the other party to answer.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
4
5. Hang up.
• The held party and the paged extension are connected and can
start conversation.
5
Using Paging — External: to all external pagers
1
R
While having a conversation;
1. Press the Recall button.
• You hear a dial tone.
• The other party is placed on hold.
2
2. Dial the feature number (64) and 0.
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-69
P
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
3. Make the announcement after hearing confirmation tone (optional).
3
4. Wait for the other party to answer.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
4
5. Hang up.
• The held party and the paged extension are connected and can
start conversation.
5
Using Paging — External: to a particular external pager
1
R
While having a conversation;
1. Press the Recall button.
• You hear a dial tone.
• The other party is placed on hold.
2
2. Dial the feature number (64).
3
external pager number
4
4. Make the announcement after hearing a confirmation tone
(optional).
5
5. Wait for the other party to answer.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
6
6-70
3. Dial an external pager number (1 – 2) or (1 – 4).
- 1 – 2 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 1 – 4 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
6. Hang up.
• The held party and the paged extension are connected and can
start conversation.
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
P
Using Paging — Group: to all extension groups
1
R
2
While having a conversation;
1. Press the Recall button.
• You hear a dial tone.
• The other party is placed on hold.
2. Dial the feature number (63) and 0.
3
3. Make the announcement after hearing a confirmation tone
(optional).
4
4. Wait for the other party to answer.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
5
5. Hang up.
• The held party and the paged extension are connected and can
start conversation.
Using Paging — Group: to a particular extension group
1
R
2
While having a conversation;
1. Press the Recall button.
• You hear a dial tone.
• The other party is placed on hold.
2. Dial the feature number (63).
3
3. Dial a paging group number (1 through 8).
paging group number
4
4. Make the announcement after hearing a confirmation tone
(optional).
5
5. Wait for the other party to answer.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
6
6. Hang up.
• The held party and the paged extension are connected and can
start conversation.
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-71
P
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Conditions
• A confirmation tone is audible when the page is answered. Eliminating the tone is
programmable.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Paralleled Telephone Connection
A proprietary telephone (PT) can be connected in parallel with a single line telephone (SLT).
When a parallel connection is made, either telephone can be used. The SLT can be disabled
by the PT user.
Conditions
• Default is “Parallel Off.”
• When receiving a call:
— If SLT ringing is enabled, then both the PT and the SLT ring except when the PT is in
“Handsfree Answerback” mode or Voice-Calling mode with the “Alternate Calling —
Ring/Voice” feature.
— If SLT ringing is disabled, then the PT rings but the SLT does not. However the SLT can
answer the call.
• If you go off-hook while your paralleled telephone is in use, the call will switch over to
your telephone, and vice versa.
• “XDP*” feature is available. Refer to the Installation Manual.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Parallel telephone mode
Feature References
Alternate Calling — Ring/Voice (4.2/DPT Features)
EXtra Device Port (XDP) (→ see Installation Manual)
Handsfree Answerback (4.2/DPT Features)
* XDP (eXtra Device Port) expands the number of telephones available in the system by allowing an extension
port to contain two telephones.
6-72
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
P
Pickup Dialing (Hot Line)
Allows you to make an outgoing call by lifting the handset.
Programming the phone number
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (74) and 2.
2
3. Dial the phone number and #.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3
4. Hang up.
phone number and #
4
Setting
1
1. Lift the handset.
2
2. Dial the feature number (74) and 1.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3. Hang up.
3
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-73
P
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Cancelling
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (74) and 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
2
3. Hang up.
3
Dialing
1. Lift the handset.
• Wait for the answer and talk.
1
Conditions
• This feature does not work if you answer an incoming call or retrieve a call on hold.
• Up to sixteen digits, consisting of “0 through 9” and “ ,” can be stored. “#” cannot be
stored.
• During the waiting time after lifting the handset, you can dial another party, overriding this
feature. The waiting time is programmable.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Pickup dialing program
[204] Pickup Dial Waiting Time
6-74
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
R
Redial, Last Number
Automatically saves the last CO call number you dialed and allows you to make the same
outgoing call again.
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial #.
2
Conditions
• Up to twenty-four digits can be stored and redialed, not counting the CO line access code.
• “ ” and “#” are counted as one digit.
• The memorized telephone number is replaced by a new one if at least one digit to be sent to
a CO line is dialed. Dialing a CO line access code alone does not change the memorized
number.
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-75
S
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Station Feature Clear
Allows you to reset the following station features to the default settings.
a) Absent Message Capability
b) Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)
c) Call Forwarding
d) Call Pickup Deny
e) Call Waiting
f) Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
g) Connected Line Identification Restriction (COIR)
h) Do Not Disturb (DND)
i) Executive Busy Override Deny
j) External Ringer
k) Log-In
l) Message Waiting – (All messages will be removed)
m) Paralleled Telephone Connection
n) Pickup Dialing (Hot Line) – (The stored telephone number will be removed)
o) Timed Reminder
Clearing current feature setting
1
2
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the feature number (790).
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3. Hang up.
3
6-76
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
S
Station Speed Dialing
Allows you to store up to ten speed dial numbers which are only available to that extension
user.
Storing the phone number
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (60).
2
3. Dial the Station Speed Dial number (0 through 9).
3
4. Dial the desired number and #.
• You hear a confirmation tone.
Station Speed Dial number
4
5. Hang up.
desired number and #
5
Dialing
1
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the feature number (6 ).
2
3. Dial the Station Speed Dial number (0 through 9).
3
Station Speed Dial number
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-77
S
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Conditions
• You can store an extension number, a telephone number, or a feature number of up to
sixteen digits.
• To store the telephone number of an outside party, the line access code (0 or 81 through 88)
must be stored as the leading digit.
• Valid digits are “0 through 9” and “ .”
• “Station Speed Dialing” can be followed by manual dialing to supplement the dialed digits.
System Speed Dialing
Allows you to make CO calls using speed dial numbers previously programmed. This
system supports five hundred speed dial numbers which are available to all extension users.
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial .
• You hear no tone.
2
3. Dial the System Speed Dial number (000 through 499).
3
System Speed Dial number
Conditions
• System Speed Dial numbers must be stored either through Manager or System Programming.
• “System Speed Dialing” can be followed by manual dialing to supplement the dialed digits.
• “Class of Service” programming determines the extensions that can perform this feature.
Programming References
• User Programming (Manager Programming) (Section 3)
[001] System Speed Dialing Number Set
[002] System Speed Dialing Name Set
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[001] System Speed Dialing Number Set
[002] System Speed Dialing Name Set
[006] Operation/Manager Extension Assignment
[601] Class of Service
Feature References
Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry
6-78
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
T
Timed Reminder
Each extension can be set to generate an alarm ringing at a preset time as a wake up or a
reminder. You can set to be activated once or every day at the preset time. If you go off-hook
during the alarm ringing, Time announce or the dial tone 3 is audible.
Setting
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (76) and 1.
2
3. Enter the hour (00 through 23) and the minute (00 through 59).
3
hour and minute
4
or
5
4. Dial 0 for a one time alarm setting,*1 or dial 1 for a daily alarm
setting.*2
• Time announce or a confirmation tone is audible.
*1 You will hear an alarm ringing at the preset time and then the setting is cleared.
*2 You will hear the alarm ringing at the preset time every day until the setting is
changed or cancelled.
5. Hang up.
Cancelling
1
2
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the feature number (76) and 0.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
3. Hang up.
3
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-79
T
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Stopping the alarm ringing
1. Lift the handset.
• Time announce or the dial tone 3 is audible.
1
Conditions
• The system clock must be set beforehand.
• The alarm ringing continues for thirty seconds.
• If you are receiving an incoming call during the alarm, ringing starts after the alarm stops
sounding.
• When the preset time comes while receiving a call, the alarm starts after the conversation.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Timed reminder set/cancel/confirm
Feature References
Hotel Application — Timed Reminder, Remote (4.3/Operator Service Features)
6-80
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
T
Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry
Allows you to override toll restriction temporarily to make a toll call (including a call
originated by “System Speed Dialing”) from a toll-restricted telephone. You can carry out
this feature by entering an appropriate account code before dialing a telephone number. For
operation procedure, refer to “Account Code Entry.”
Conditions
• This feature changes the toll restriction level to level 2. This can be used by extension users
assigned restriction levels from 3 through 8. Levels 1 and 2 are not changed.
• A “Class of Service” which is assigned “Account Code Entry — Verified - Toll Restriction
Override” mode permits the class members to override their toll restrictions.
• Up to forty account codes can be programmed for Verified mode.
• If you enter no account code or an invalid account code, standard toll restriction is done.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Account code entry
[105] Account Codes
[500]–[501] Toll Restriction Level — Day/Night
[508] Account Code Entry Mode
[509]–[510] Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing — Day/Night
[601] Class of Service
Feature References
Account Code Entry
System Speed Dialing
Toll Restriction (→ see Installation Manual)
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-81
T
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Trunk (CO Line) Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
Ringing from the external speaker or external ringer indicates an incoming CO call. TAFAS
allows this call to be answered from any extension.
Answering a tone from the external pager;
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (44).
2
3. Dial the external pager number (1 – 2) or (1 – 4).
- 1 – 2 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 1 – 4 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• The line is connected and you can start talking.
3
external pager number
Answering a ring from the external ringer;
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the feature number (47).
2
3
or
3. Dial the external ringer number (1) or (1 – 2).
- 1 : if you are connected to the KX-TD816.
- 1 – 2 : if you are connected to the KX-TD1232.
• You hear a confirmation tone (optional).
• The line is connected and you can start talking.
Conditions
• This feature can be used in the following cases:
a) The floating number* of an external device is assigned as the DIL 1:1 destination.
In this case, all the incoming calls on the specified line will be signaled.
b) The floating number* of an external device is dialed as the Direct Dialing In (DDI)
destination.
c) The floating number* of an external device is assigned as the Intercept Routing
destination. In this case, incoming calls redirected to the destination will be signaled.
6-82
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
T
• Confirmation tone is audible before being connected to the caller. Eliminating the tone is
programmable.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, Paging
[407]–[408] DIL 1:1 Extension — Day/Night
[409]–[410] Intercept Extension — Day/Night
[813] Floating Number Assignment
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References
Floating Station (→ see Installation Manual)
* Floating Number (FN) is a virtual extension number for resources to make it appear to be an extension.
Refer to the Installation Manual.
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-83
U
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Allows incoming calls (CO line, extension) to be distributed uniformly to a specific group of
extensions called a UCD group. Calls to a UCD group queue up, and the head of the queue
searches for an idle station.
Conditions
• UCD can be used in the following cases:
a) The floating number* of UCD is assigned as the DIL 1:1 destination
b) The floating number* of UCD is assigned as the Intercept Routing destination
c) The floating number* of UCD is dialed from the extension
d) The floating number* of UCD is dialed as the DDI destination
• The floating number* can be assigned on UCD group basis and UCD group is based on the
extension group.
• UCD call can arrive at the extension in log-in status within the UCD group, and can not
arrive at the extensions in log-out status.
• You can assign the log-in or log-out on the extensions.
• The last extension in log-in status can not assign the log-out status.
Programming References
• System Programming — Installation Manual
[100] Flexible Numbering, UCD log-in/log-out
[106] Station Hunting Type
[813] Floating Number Assignment
Feature Reference
Log-In / Log-Out
* Floating Number (FN) is a virtual extension number for resources to make it appear to be an extension.
Refer to the Installation Manual.
6-84
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
V
Voice Mail Integration
When you are busy or do not answer, your calls can be forwarded to a mailbox of the Voice
Processing System.
Setting Call Forwarding destination to Voice Mail
1. Lift the handset.
1
2
(X: 2 through 5)
3
VM extension number
2. Dial the feature number (710) and the Call Forwarding number
(2 through 5).
• Each Call Forwarding number corresponds to the following
services:
- 2 : Call Forwarding — All Calls
- 3 : Call Forwarding — Busy
- 4 : Call Forwarding — No Answer
- 5 : Call Forwarding — Busy/No Answer
3. Dial the extension number of the Voice Mail.
• You hear a confirmation tone and then a dial tone.
4
4. Hang up.
• Calls directed to you are automatically forwarded to your
mailbox.
• Callers can leave their messages in the mailbox, according to the
Voice Mail guidance.
Listening to a stored message
You can listen to the messages stored in your mailbox with ease.
1. Lift the handset.
1
2. Dial the extension number of the Voice Mail.
• You can listen to the stored message by following the Voice Mail
guidance.
2
VM extension number
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-85
V
6.2
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Conditions
• CO callers can leave their messages in your mailbox. When an incoming CO call arrives,
the operator answers the call and forwards it to your extension. And...
— If you set a “Call Forwarding” function and set the destination to the Voice Mail;
The call will be forwarded to the Voice Mail automatically.
— If you do not set a “Call Forwarding” function;
The call will return to the operator. Then the operator transfers the call to the Voice Mail.
• A Voice Mail can be assigned as the destination of the following features:
a) Call Forwarding — All Calls
b) Call Forwarding — Busy
c) Call Forwarding — No Answer
d) Call Forwarding — Busy/No Answer
e) Intercept Routing
Feature References
Call Forwarding — All Calls, Busy, Busy/No Answer, No Answer
Intercept Routing (→ see Installation Manual)
Voice Mail Transfer
6-86
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6.3
ISDN Telephone Features
The KX-TD1232 users can use ISDN telephones in addition to proprietary telephones and
single line telephones. The features are almost the same as ones of the single line telephone.
There are, however, some features that are unavailable for ISDN telephones as shown below.
As for available features, see Chapter 6.2 SLT and ISDN telephone Features.
Features unavailable for ISDN telephones
• Account Code Entry
Dialing “99” instead of “#” as the delimiter makes this feature available.
• Alternate Calling — Ring/Voice
• Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)
• Call Forwarding
• Call Hold
• Call Pickup, Group
• Call Waiting
• Conference
• Do Not Disturb (DND)
• Do Not Disturb (DND) Override
• Doorphone Call
- To unlock the door while talking to the doorphone
• Executive Busy Override — Extension
• Executive Busy Override Deny
• Log-In / Log-Out
• Message Waiting
• Paging — ANSWER
- Answering a page sent to the built-in speaker
• Paralleled Telephone Connection
• Pickup Dialing (Hot Line)
• Station Speed Dialing
• Timed Reminder
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
6-87
6-88
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
Section 7
Quick Reference
Contents
Basic Operation .............................................................................7-2
Station Programming .....................................................................7-2
User Programming (Manager Programming)...............................7-7
DPT Features .................................................................................7-8
Operator Service Features...........................................................7-21
Special Display Features .............................................................7-24
DSS Console Features..................................................................7-27
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features..............................................7-28
7
Quick Reference
This list is divided into the following seven sections. Refer to each section as needed.
1.) Basic Operation
2.) Station Programming
3.) User Programming (Manager Programming)
4.) DPT Features
5.) Operator Service Features
6.) Special Display Features (— for KX-T7235 users)
7.) DSS Console Features
8.) SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
• When setting “Idle Line Preference — Outgoing,” “No Line Preference — Outgoing,” or “Prime (CO
Line) Preference,” press the INTERCOM button after going off-hook to activate the following
operations. (Pressing the INTERCOM button directly without going off-hook is also available.)
1
Basic Operation
<Note>
Off-hook: Lift the handset or press the
SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
On-hook: Hang up or press the
SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.
Station Programming
2
●
Press: PROGRAM
●
❐ Making Calls
To enter programming mode
(Be sure the telephone is idle and on-hook.)
9
9
To exit programming mode
Press: PROGRAM or lift the handset
— Intercom Calling
• Off-hook.
• Dial the extension number, or press a DSS
button.
— Outward Dialing
• Off-hook.
• Dial 0 or 81 through 88, or press a CO button.
- 0
: Line Access, Automatic
- 81 – 88 : Line Access, CO Line Group
- CO : Line Access, Individual
• Dial the phone number.
❐ Receiving Calls
• Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.
OR
- When using the KX-T7230 or KX-T7235;
• Press a flashing CO button directly
(Answering, Direct CO Line), or a flashing
INTERCOM button directly.
7-2
Quick Reference
❐ Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment
• Enter programming mode.
• Dial 5.
• Dial 1 or 2.
- 1 : Call Waiting Tone 1
- 2 : Call Waiting Tone 2
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
❐ Charge Display
— Extension Charge Fee Reference
• Enter programming mode.
• Dial 9.
• Enter ID Code.
• Dial 1.
• Dial the extension number.
• Press SEL (S1) button.
• Press PREV button or END button.
• Exit programming mode.
7
Quick Reference
— Extension Charge Fee Meter Clear
• Enter programming mode.
• Dial 9.
• Enter ID Code.
• Dial 1.
• Dial the extension number.
• Press CLR (S2) button.
• Press STORE button.
• Press PREV button or END button.
• Exit programming mode.
— CO Charge Fee Reference
• Enter programming mode.
• Dial 9.
• Enter ID Code.
• Dial 2.
• Dial the CO line number (01 through 08) or
(01 through 24).
- 01 through 08 : if connected to the KX-TD816
- 01 through 24 : if connected to the KX-TD1232
• Press SEL (S1) button.
• Press PREV button or END button.
• Exit programming mode.
— Total Charge Fee Reference
• Enter programming mode.
• Dial 9.
• Enter ID Code.
• Dial 3.
• Press SEL (S2) button.
• Press PREV button or END button.
• Exit programming mode.
— Account Code Charge Fee Reference
• Enter programming mode.
• Dial 9.
• Enter ID Code.
• Dial 4.
• Dial the account table number (01 through 40).
• Press SEL (S1) button.
• Press PREV button or END button.
• Exit programming mode.
— Account Code Charge Fee Meter Clear
• Enter programming mode.
• Dial 9.
• Enter ID Code.
• Dial 4.
• Dial the account table number (01 through 40).
• Press CLR (S2) button.
• Press STORE button.
• Press PREV button or END button.
• Exit programming mode.
— New Rate Set
• Enter programming mode.
• Dial 9.
• Enter ID Code.
• Dial 5.
• Enter the new rate.
• Press STORE button.
• Press PREV button or END button.
• Exit programming mode.
— All Clear
• Enter programming mode.
• Dial 9.
• Enter ID Code.
• Dial 6.
• Press NEXT (S3) button or CLR (S2) button.
• Press STORE button.
• Press PREV button or END button.
• Exit programming mode.
— Print the Charge
• Enter programming mode.
• Dial 9.
• Enter ID Code.
• Dial 7.
• Dial 1 or 2 or 3 + extension number.
- 1 : for printing total telephone charge.
- 2 : for printing all extension charge.
- 3 + extension number : for printing each
extension charge.
• Press PREV button or END button.
• Exit programming mode.
— Account Code Set
• Enter programming mode.
• Dial 9.
• Enter ID Code.
• Dial 8.
Quick Reference
7-3
7
Quick Reference
• Dial the account table number (01 through 40).
• Press CLR (S2) button.
• Enter the new account code.
• Press STORE button.
• Press PREV button or END button.
• Exit programming mode.
— Department Code Charge Fee Reference
• Enter programming mode.
• Dial 9.
• Enter ID Code.
• Dial 9.
• Dial the department code.
• Press SEL (S1) button.
• Press PREV button or END button.
• Exit programming mode.
— Department Code Charge Fee Meter Clear
• Enter programming mode.
• Dial 9.
• Enter ID Code.
• Dial 9.
• Dial the department code.
• Press CLR (S2) button.
• Press STORE button.
• Press PREV button or END button.
• Exit programming mode.
❐ Flexible Button Assignment
— Account Button
• Enter programming mode.
• Press the desired Flexible button.
• Dial 6.
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
— Alert Button
• Dial 7.
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
— DSS Button
• Enter programming mode.
• Press the desired CO or DSS button.
• Dial 1 + extension number.
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
— FWD/DND Button
• Enter programming mode.
• Press the desired Flexible button.
• Dial 4.
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
— Group-CO (G-CO) Button
• Enter programming mode.
• Press the desired CO button.
• Dial # + CO line group number (1 through 8).
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
— Hurry up Button
• Enter programming mode.
• Press the desired CO button.
• Dial 81 + extension number.
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
— Live Call Screening (LCS) Button†
• Enter programming mode.
• Press the desired CO or DSS button.
• Dial 85.
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
— Live Call Screening (LSC) Cancel Button†
• Enter programming mode.
• Press the desired CO button.
• Dial 87.
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
• Enter programming mode.
• Press the desired CO or DSS button.
• Dial 86.
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
— Conference (CONF) Button
• Enter programming mode.
• Press the desired Flexible button.
7-4
Quick Reference
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
7
Quick Reference
— Log-in/Log-Out Button
• Enter programming mode.
• Press the desired CO button.
• Dial 80 + extension number.
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
— Loop-CO (L-CO) Button
• Enter programming mode.
• Press the desired CO button.
• Dial .
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
— Message Waiting (MESSAGE) Button
• Enter programming mode.
• Press the desired CO or DSS button.
• Dial 3.
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
— One-Touch Dialing Button
• Enter programming mode.
• Press the desired Flexible button.
• Dial 2 + desired number.
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
— SAVE Button
• Enter programming mode.
• Press the desired Flexible button.
• Dial 5.
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
— Single-CO (S-CO) Button
• Enter programming mode.
• Press the desired CO button.
• Dial 0.
• Dial CO line number (01 through 08) or (01
through 24).
- 01 through 08 : if connected to the KX-TD816
- 01 through 24 : if connected to the KX-TD1232
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
— Terminate Button
• Enter programming mode.
• Press the desired Flexible button.
• Dial 9.
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
— Two-Way Record Button†
• Enter programming mode.
• Press the desired CO or DSS button.
• Dial 83 + extension number of the Voice Mail.
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
— Two-Way Transfer Button†
• Enter programming mode.
• Press the desired CO or DSS button.
• Dial 84 + extension number of the Voice Mail.
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
— Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button
• Enter programming mode.
• Press the desired Flexible button.
• Dial 82 + extension number of the Voice Mail.
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
❐ Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment
• Enter programming mode.
• Dial 3.
• Dial 1 or 2.
- 1 : Off mode
- 2 : On mode
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
❐ Handset / Headset Selection
• Enter programming mode.
• Dial 8.
• Dial 1 or 2.
- 1 : Handset mode
- 2 : Handset mode
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
Quick Reference
7-5
7
Quick Reference
❐ Intercom Altering Assignment
• Enter programming mode.
• Dial 4.
• Dial 1 or 2.
- 1 : Ring-Calling (Tone Call) mode
- 2 : Voice-Calling mode
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
❐ Key Click Tone On/Off Assignment
(KX-T7230 and KX-T7235 only)
• Enter programming mode.
• Dial 7.
• Dial 1 or 2.
- 1 : Off mode
- 2 : On mode
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
• Enter programming mode.
• Dial 1.
• Dial 1 or 2.
- 1 : for selecting Hands-free mode
- 2 : for selecting Private mode
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
❐ Preferred Live Assignment
— Incoming
• Enter programming mode.
• Dial 2.
• Dial 1, 2, or 3 + CO line number.
- 1 : No Line Preference
- 2 : Ringing Line Preference
- 3 + CO line number
: Prime Line (CO Line) Preference
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
Quick Reference
— Outgoing
• Enter programming mode.
• Dial 1.
• Dial 1, 2, 3 + CO line number, or press
INTERCOM button.
- 1 : No Line Preference
- 2 : Idle Line Preference
- 3 + CO line number
: Prime Line (CO Line) Preference
- INTERCOM
: Prime Line (INTERCOM) Preference
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
❐ Ringing Tone Selection for CO
Buttons
❐ Live Call Screening Mode Setting†
7-6
❐ Preferred Line Assignment
• Enter programming mode.
• Press the desired CO button.
• Press the same CO button again.
• Dial the tone type number (1 through 8).
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
❐ Self-Extension Number Confirmation
• Enter programming mode.
• Dial 6.
• Press HOLD (END) button.
• Exit programming mode.
❐ Station Programming Data Default
Set
• Enter programming mode.
• Dial #.
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
7
Quick Reference
❐ Station Speed Dialing Number /
Name Assignment (KX-T7235 only)
• Enter programming mode.
• Press a Function button (F1 through F10).
• Dial the desired number.
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
— To store a name
• Enter programming mode.
• Press a Function button (F1 through F10).
• Press NEXT (S3) button.
• Enter the name.
— See Combination Table for information on
how to enter each character.
• Press STORE button.
• Exit programming mode.
<Example for entering characters>
To enter the letter “K,”
Press: [5] + [SELECT] [SELECT] [SELECT]
OR
Press: [5] + [S2]
SHIFT
+
S1
S2
SHIFT
+
S2
S3
SHIFT
+
S3
1
Q
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
2
q
a
d
g
j
m
p
t
w
.
3
Z
B
E
H
K
N
R
U
X
,
4
z
b
e
h
k
n
r
u
x
’
5
!
C
F
I
L
O
S
V
Y
:
6
?
c
f
i
l
o
s
v
y
;
ä
$
/
%
ö
&
+
=
ü
(
–
)
S1
Pressing
SELECT
(Times)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
#
Keys
User Programming (Manage Programming)
●
— To store a number
SHIFT & Soft
Combination
3
To enter programming mode
(Be sure the telephone is idle and on-hook.)
Press: PROGRAM
●
0
0
To exit programming mode
Press: PROGRAM or lift the handset
❑ 000 Date and Time Set
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Enter 000.
Press NEXT.
Enter the day.
Press →.
Press SELECT until the desired selection
is displayed.
Press →.
Enter the year.
Press →.
Press SELECT until the desired selection
is displayed.
Press STORE.
Press NEXT.
Enter the hour.
Press →.
Enter the minute.
Press STORE.
Press END.
❑ 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Enter 001.
Press NEXT.
Enter a speed dial number.
Enter a telephone number.
Press STORE.
Press NEXT, PREV, or SELECT and
desired speed dial number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
Combination Table
Quick Reference
7-7
7
Quick Reference
❐ 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Enter 002.
Press NEXT.
Enter a speed dial number.
Enter a name.
Press STORE.
Press NEXT, PREV, or SELECT and
desired speed dial number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
❑ 003 Extension Number Set
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Enter 003.
Press NEXT.
Enter a jack number.
Enter an extension number.
Press STORE.
Press NEXT, PREV, or SELECT and
desired jack number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
❑ 004 Extension Name Set
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Enter 004.
Press NEXT.
Enter a jack number.
Enter a name.
Press STORE.
Press NEXT, PREV, or SELECT and
desired speed dial number.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Press END.
4
DPT Features
❑ Absent Message Capability
Setting
Message 1. “Will Return Soon”
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7501.
• On-hook.
Message 2. “Gone Home”
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7502.
• On-hook.
Message 3. “At Ext extension number”
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7503 + extension number.
• On-hook.
Message 4. “Back at time”
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7504.
• Enter hour (00 through 23).
• Enter minute (00 through 59).
• On-hook.
Message 5. “Out until date”
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7505.
• Enter month.
• Enter day.
• On-hook.
Message 6. “In a Meeting”
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7506.
• On-hook.
Message 7, 8, and 9. (User programmable)
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7507 through 7509.
- 7507 : for Message 7
- 7508 : for Message 8
- 7509 : for Message 9
• Enter parameters (if required).
• On-hook.
7-8
Quick Reference
7
Quick Reference
❐ Alternate Calling — Ring/Voice
Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7500.
• On-hook.
Alternating
— If the called extension is set to RingCalling mode;
OR
- When using the KX-T7235;
Setting
• Press Features (F4) button.
• Press NEXT (S3) button to go to the next list.
• Press Absent MSG On (F4) button.
• Dial the message number (1 through 9).
• Enter parameters (if required).
• On-hook.
Cancelling
• Press Features (F4) button.
• Press NEXT (S3) button to go to the next list.
• Press Absent MSG Off (F5) button.
• On-hook.
❐ Account Code Entry
— Entering before dialing
• Off-hook.
• Dial 49 (or press Account button) + account
code (up to nine digits) + #.
OR
- When using the KX-T7230 or KX-T7235;
• Off-hook.
• Press ACCNT (S3) button.
• Enter account code + #.
— Entering during or after a conversation
While having a conversation or hearing a reorder
tone after the other party hangs up;
• Press Account button.
• Enter account code + #.
OR
- When using the KX-T7230 or KX-T7235;
• Press ACCNT (S3) button.
• Enter account code + #.
• Dial , when hearing a ringback tone.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
(Voice-Calling mode is active.)
OR
- When using the KX-T7230 or KX-T7235;
• Press Voice (S3) button, after hearing a
ringback tone.
— If the called extension is set to VoiceCalling mode;
• Dial , when hearing a confirmation tone.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
(Ring-Calling mode is active.)
OR
- When using the KX-T7230 or KX-T7235;
• Press Tone (S2) button, after hearing a
confirmation tone.
❐ Answering, Direct CO Line
• Press CO button (flashing red rapidly).
❐ Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)
Setting
While hearing a busy tone;
• Dial 6.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
OR
- When using the KX-T7230 or KX-T7235;
• Press C.BCK (S3) button while hearing a busy
tone.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
Answering an intercom recall
• Off-hook.
Quick Reference
7-9
7
Quick Reference
Answering a CO recall
• Off-hook.
• Dial the phone number.
— Busy / No Answer
Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Press FWD/DND button.
• Dial 5 + extension number.
• On-hook.
• Off-hook.
• Dial 46.
• On-hook.
❐ Background Music (BGM)
Setting / Cancelling
- Be sure the telephone is on-hook.
• Press HOLD button.
OR
- When using the KX-T7230 or KX-T7235;
• Press BGM (S3) button.
❐ Busy Station Signaling (BSS)
While hearing a busy tone;
• Dial 2.
• Wait for an answer.
OR
- When using the KX-T7230 or KX-T7235;
• Press BSS (S1) button while hearing a busy
tone.
❐ Call Forwarding
Setting
— All Calls
• Off-hook.
• Press FWD/DND button.
• Dial 2 + extension number.
• On-hook.
— Busy
• Off-hook.
• Press FWD/DND button.
• Dial 3 + extension number.
• On-hook.
— No Answer
• On-hook.
7-10
• Press FWD/DND button.
• Dial 4 + extension number.
• On-hook.
Quick Reference
— to CO Line
• Off-hook.
• Press FWD/DND button.
• Dial 6 + line access code (0 or 81 through 88)
+ phone number + #.
• On-hook.
— Follow Me
- at the destination extension;
• Off-hook.
• Press FWD/DND button.
• Dial 7 + your extension number.
• On-hook.
Cancelling
— At the original extension
• Off-hook.
• Press FWD/DND button.
• Dial 0.
• On-hook.
— At the destination extension — “Follow
Me (All Calls)” only
• Off-hook.
• Press FWD/DND button.
• Dial 8 + your extension number.
• On-hook.
OR
- When using the KX-T7235;
Setting
— All Calls
• Off-hook.
• Press FWD/DND button.
• Press FWD-All Calls (F3) button.
• Dial the extension number.
• On-hook.
7
Quick Reference
— Busy
• Off-hook.
• Press FWD/DND button.
• Press FWD-Busy (F4) button.
• Dial the extension number.
• On-hook.
— No Answer
• Off-hook.
• Press FWD/DND button.
• Press FWD-No Answer (F5) button.
• Dial the extension number.
• On-hook.
— Busy / No Answer
• Off-hook.
• Press FWD/DND button.
• Press NEXT (S3) button.
• Press FWD-BSY/NA (F1) button.
• Dial the extension number.
• On-hook.
— to CO Line
• Off-hook.
• Press FWD/DND button.
• Press NEXT (S3) button.
• Press FWD-CO Line (F2) button.
• Dial the line access code (0 or 81 through 88)
+ phone number + #.
• On-hook.
— Follow Me
- at the destination extension;
• Off-hook.
• Press FWD/DND button.
• Press NEXT (S3) button.
• Press FWD-From (F3) button.
• Dial your extension number.
• On-hook.
Cancelling
— At the original extension
• Off-hook.
• Press FWD/DND button.
• Press FWD/DND Cancel (F1) button.
• On-hook.
— At the destination extension — “Follow
Me (All Calls)” only
• Off-hook.
• Press FWD/DND button.
• Press NEXT (S3) button.
• Press FWD-From Cancel (F4) button.
• Dial your extension number.
• On-hook.
❐ Call Hold
While having a conversation;
• Press HOLD button + HOLD button.
Retrieving a call on hold
- at the holding extension;
• Press CO or INTERCOM button (flashing
green slowly).
❐ Call Hold, Exclusive
While having a conversation;
• Press HOLD button.
Retrieving
— At the holding extension only
• Press CO or INTERCOM button (flashing
green moderately).
❐ Call Hold Retrieve
Retrieving a CO call on hold
- at another extension;
• Press CO button (flashing red slowly).
Retrieving an intercom call on hold
- at another extension;
• Off-hook.
• Dial 51 + holding extension number.
❐ Call Log, Incoming (KX-T7230 and
KX-T7235 only)
Setting / Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 54.
Quick Reference
7-11
7
Quick Reference
• Dial 1 or 0.
- 1 : for setting
- 0 : for cancelling
• On-hook.
Calling Back
- When using the KX-T7235;
• Press OLD (S1) or NEW (S2) button.
• Search for desired party by pressing NEXT
(S3) button.
• Off-hook.
• Press CALL (S1) button.
- When using the KX-T7230;
• Press OLD (S1) or NEW (S2) button.
• Search for desired party by pressing NEXT
(S3) button or INFO (S1) button.
• Press CALL (S1) button.
❐ Call Log Lock, Incoming (KX-T7230
and KX-T7235 only)
Locking
Retrieving
• Off-hook.
• Dial 52 + parking zone number.
OR
- When using the KX-T7235 (Operator only);
• Press Features (F4) button.
• Press NEXT (S3) button twice to go to the
exclusive list.
• Press Call Park (F1) button.
• Dial the desired parking zone number.
❐ Call Pickup
— CO Line
• Off-hook.
• Dial 59 + lock code (000 through 999).
• Dial the same lock code again.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
Unlocking
• Off-hook.
• Dial 59 + lock code.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
• Off-hook.
• Dial 4 .
— Directed
• Off-hook.
• Dial 41 + extension number.
— Group
• Off-hook.
• Dial 40.
OR
- When using the KX-T7235;
• Press Features (F4) button.
• Press Group Pickup (F3) button.
❐ Call Park
Setting
While having a conversation;
• Press TRANSFER button.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• Dial 52 + parking zone number (0 through 9).
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• Hang-up or press the SP-PHONE button.
OR
7-12
- When using the KX-T7235 (Operator only);
While having a conversation;
• Press Features (F4) button.
• Press NEXT (S3) button twice to go to the
exclusive list.
• Press Call Park (F1) button.
• Dial the parking zone number.
Quick Reference
❐ Call Pickup Deny
Setting / Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 720.
• Dial 1 or 0.
- 1 : for setting
- 0 : for cancelling
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
7
Quick Reference
❐ Call Splitting
— Having a conversation while having
another call on hold
• Press CO or INTERCOM button.
(flashing red moderately).
(Pressing this button alternates between the callers.)
— Having a conversation with an intercom
call while having another intercom call
on hold
• Press HOLD button.
(Pressing this button alternates between the callers.)
❐ Call Transfer — to CO Line
— Screened Call Transfer
While having a conversation;
• Press TRANSFER button.
• Press CO button.
• Dial the phone number.
• Wait for an answer and announce.
• Hang-up or press the SP-PHONE button.
❐ Call Transfer — to Extension
— Screened Call Transfer
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
❐ Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR)
To restrict the presentation of your
number to the called party
• Off-hook.
• Dial 572.
• On-hook.
To present your number to the called party
• Off-hook.
• Dial 570.
• On-hook.
To change the current setting at just time
you make a call
• Off-hook.
• Dial 571.
• Dial 0 or 81 through 88.
• Dial the phone number.
❐ Connected Line Identification
Restriction (CLOR)
While having a conversation;
• Press TRANSFER button.
• Dial the extension number.
• Wait for an answer and announce.
• Hang-up or press the SP-PHONE button.
To restrict the presentation of your number
to the calling party
— Unscreened Call Transfer
To present your number to the calling party
While having a conversation;
• Press TRANSFER button.
• Dial the extension number.
• Hang-up or press the SP-PHONE button.
❐ Call Waiting
Setting / Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 731.
• Dial 1 or 0.
- 1 : for setting
- 0 : for cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 581.
• On-hook.
• Off-hook.
• Dial 580.
• On-hook.
❐ Conference
While having a conversation;
• Press CONF button.
• Dial the third party.
• Talk to the third party.
• Press CONF button.
Quick Reference
7-13
7
Quick Reference
❐ Conference, Unattended
While having a conversation with two outside
parties;
• Press CONF button.
❐ Display Call Information
— Alternating the display (the meter, the
phone number, the phone charge)
• Press CO button.
❐ Do Not Disturb (DND)
Setting / Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Press FWD/DND button.
• Dial 1 + extension number or 0.
- 1 + extension number : for setting
- 0 : for cancelling
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
OR
- When using the KX-T7235;
Setting
• Off-hook.
• Press FWD/DND button.
• Press Do Not Disturb (F2) button.
• Dial extension number.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Press FWD/DND button.
• Press FWD/DND Cancel (F1) button.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
❐ Do Not Disturb Override
• Dial 2 while hearing Do Not Disturb tone.
OR
- When using the KX-T7230 or KX-T7235;
• Press Over (S2) button.
7-14
Quick Reference
❐ Do Not Disturb for Direct Dial In
Calls
Setting / Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 56.
• Dial 1 or 0.
- 1 : for setting
- 0 : for cancelling
• On-hook.
❐ Doorphone Call
Answering a doorphone call
• Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.
Calling a doorphone
• Off-hook.
• Dial 68.
• Dial doorphone number (1) or (1 – 2).
- 1 : if connected to the KX-TD816
- 1 – 2 : if connected to the KX-TD1232
To unlock the door (programmed extensions
only)
• Off-hook.
• Dial 55.
• Dial door opener number (1) or (1 – 2).
- 1 : if connected to the KX-TD816
- 1 – 2 : if connected to the KX-TD1232
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
To unlock the door while talking to the
doorphone
• Dial 5.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
❐ Electronic Station Lockout
Locking
• Off-hook.
• Dial 77 + lock code (000 through 999).
• Dial the same lock code again.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
7
Quick Reference
❐ External Ringer
Unlocking
• Off-hook.
• Dial 77 + lock code.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
❐ Emergency Call
• Off-hook.
• Dial the desired emergency number.
❐ Executive Busy Override
— CO Line
• Press corresponding CO button while hearing
a busy tone.
— Extension
• Dial 2 while hearing a busy tone.
OR
- When using the KX-T7230 or KX-T7235;
• Press Over (S2) button while hearing a busy
tone.
Setting / Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 730.
• Dial (1), (1 – 2) or 0.
- 1 : if connected to the KX-TD816
- 1 – 2 : if connected to the KX-TD1232
- 0 : for cancelling
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
Answering
• Off-hook.
• Dial 47.
• Dial (1) or (1 or 2).
- 1 : if connected to the KX-TD816
- 1 – 2 : if connected to the KX-TD1232
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• Talk.
❐ Full One-Touch Dialing
• Press a One-Touch Dialing, DSS, REDIAL, or
SAVE button.
❐ Executive Busy Override Deny
Setting / Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 733.
• Dial 1 or 0.
- 1 : for setting
- 0 : for cancelling
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
❐ External Relay Control
Relay on
• Off-hook.
• Dial 67.
• Dial (1) or (1 – 2).
- 1 : if connected to the KX-TD816
- 1 – 2 : if connected to the KX-TD1232
• On-hook.
❐ Handsfree Answerback (KX-T7230
and KX-T7235 only)
Setting / Cancelling
- Be sure the telephone is on-hook.
• Press AUTO ANSWER/MUTE button.
❐ Hotel Application
Room Management
<Example> Message 7: “Cleaned-up”
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7507.
• On-hook.
<Example> Message 8: “Minibar and
charge”
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7508.
• Enter minibar charge.
• On-hook.
Quick Reference
7-15
7
Quick Reference
❐ Intercom Calling
While having a conversation with another
party;
• Off-hook.
• Dial the extension number.
If you want to terminate the current call
Monitoring
• Off-hook.
• On-hook.
❐ Live Call Screening†
Setting the password
• Off-hook.
• Dial 799.
• Enter the password.
• Enter the same password again.
• On-hook.
Cancelling the password
• Off-hook.
• Dial 799.
• Enter the password.
• On-hook.
• Press flashing LCS button.
If you want to hold the current call
Monitoring
• Press HOLD button.
• On-hook.
• Off-hook.
Having a conversation with the party
• Press flashing LCS button.
❐ Log-In / Log-Out
Setting Live Call Screening
• Press LCS button.
• Enter the password.
Setting
Using Log-In/Log-Out button
Cancelling Live Call Screening
• Press LCS button.
In the Hands-free mode;
Having a conversation with the party
• Off-hook or press LCS button.
Stopping monitoring
• Press FLASH button or LCS Cancel button.
In the Private mode;
Stopping the alert tone
• Press FLASH button or LCS Cancel button.
Monitoring the recording message
• Off-hook, or press LCS button or INTERCOM
button.
Having a conversation with the party
• Off-hook.
• Press flashing LCS button.
Having a conversation with the party
• Off-hook.
• Press Log-In/Log-Out button.
- Log-In : the indicator light is off.
- Log-Out : the indicator light is red.
- Calls in the UCD queue : the indicator is
flashing red.
• On-hook.
Using the feature number
• Off-hook.
• Dial 45.
• Dial 1 or 0.
- 1 : for Log-In
- 0 : for Log-Out
• On-hook.
❐ Message Waiting
Setting
• Off-hook.
• Dial 701 + extension number.
• On-hook.
OR
7-16
Quick Reference
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
7
Quick Reference
- When using the KX-T7235;
• Press Features (F4) button.
• Press NEXT (S3) button to go to the next list.
• Press Message On (F2) button.
• Dial the extension number.
— If the extension is busy;
• Press MESSAGE button or dial 4.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
❐ Night Service
Setting / Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 78.
• Dial 0, 1 or 2.
- 0 : for Auto mode
- 1 : for Manual Day mode
- 2 : for Manual Night mode
• On-hook.
Cancelling
OR
• Off-hook.
• Dial 700 + extension number.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
OR
- When using the KX-T7235;
• Press Features (F4) button.
• Press NEXT (S3) button to go to the next list.
• Press Message Off (F3) button.
• Dial the extension number.
Checking and Selecting a message by the
receiver
• Press MESSAGE button repeatedly until the
desired message appears.
Calling back the message sender
• Off-hook.
• Press MESSAGE button, or dial 702.
Clearing all messages by the message
receiver
• Off-hook.
• Dial 700 + your extension number.
- When using the KX-T7235 (Operator only);
• Press Features (F4) button.
• Press NEXT (S3) button twice to go to the
exclusive list.
• Press Night Auto/On/Off (F2) button.
• Dial 0, 1 or 2.
- 0 : for Auto mode
- 1 : for Manual Day mode
- 2 : for Manual Night mode
• On-hook.
Confirming the current mode
- Be sure the telephone is idle and on-hook.
• Press #.
❐ Notebook Function
Storing
While having a conversation or in on-hook status;
• Press AUTO DIAL/STORE button.
• Press AUTO DIAL/STORE button again.
• Dial the desired phone number.
• Press SAVE button.
Dialing
❐ Microphone Mute (KX-T7230 and
KX-T7235 only)
Setting / Cancelling
While having a conversation in handsfree mode;
• Press AUTO ANSWER/MUTE button.
• Off-hook.
• Press SAVE button.
❐ Off-Hook Monitor (KX-T7230 and
KX-T7235 only)
Setting / Cancelling
While having a conversation with the handset;
• Press SP-PHONE button.
Quick Reference
7-17
7
Quick Reference
❐ One-Touch Dialing
• Off-hook.
• Press a One-Touch Dialing button.
❐ Operator Call
General Call
To access all external pagers
• Off-hook.
• Dial 640.
— A confirmation tone is audible (optional).
• Announce.
OR
• Off-hook.
• Dial 9.
Specific Call
• Off-hook.
• Dial 61 or 62.
- 61 : Operator 1
- 62 : Operator 2
❐ Outward Dialing
— Line Access, Automatic
• Off-hook.
• Dial 0 + phone number.
— Line Access, CO Line Group
• Off-hook.
• Dial 8 + CO line group number (1 through 8).
• Dial the phone number.
— Line Access, Individual
• Off-hook.
• Press a CO button.
• Dial the phone number.
❐ Paging
— All
• Off-hook.
• Dial 63 (or 64) + .
— A confirmation tone is audible (optional).
• Announce.
OR
- When using the KX-T7235;
• Press Features (F4) button.
• Press External Paging (F1) or Group Paging
(F2) button.
• Dial .
7-18
— External
Quick Reference
- When using the KX-T7235;
• Press Features (F4) button.
• Press External Paging (F1) button.
• Dial 0.
To access a particular pager only
• Off-hook.
• Dial 64.
• Dial external pager number (1 – 2) or (1 – 4).
- 1 – 2 : if connected to the KX-TD816
- 1 – 4 : if connected to the KX-TD1232
— A confirmation tone is audible (optional).
• Announce.
OR
- When using the KX-T7235;
• Press Features (F4) button.
• Press External Paging (F1) button.
• Dial the external pager number.
— Group
To access all groups simultaneously
• Off-hook.
• Dial 630.
— A confirmation tone is audible (optional).
• Announce.
OR
- When using the KX-T7235;
• Press Features (F4) button.
• Press Group Paging (F2) button.
• Dial 0.
To access a particular group of extensions
• Off-hook.
• Dial 63 + extension group number
(1 through 8).
— A confirmation tone is audible (optional).
• Announce.
7
Quick Reference
OR
- When using the KX-T7235;
• Press Features (F4) button.
• Press Group Paging (F2) button.
• Dial the extension group number.
❐ Paging – ANSWER
• Dial 44 + external pager number, or 43.
- 44 : To answer a page sent to the external
pager/TAFAS
- 43 : To answer a page sent to the built-in
speaker
OR
- When using the KX-T7235;
To answer “Paging — External”
• Press Features (F4) button.
• Press Answer Ext-Page (F4) button + external
pager number.
To answer “Paging — Group”
• Press Features (F4) button.
• Press Answer GRP-Page (F5) button.
❐ Paging – DENY
Setting / Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 721.
• Dial 1 or 0.
- 1 : for setting
- 0 : for cancelling
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
❐ Paralleled Telephone Connection
Setting / Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 69.
• Dial 1 or 0.
- 1 : for setting
- 0 : for cancelling
— A confirmation tone is audible.
OR
- When using the KX-T7235;
• Press Features (F4) button.
• Press NEXT (S3) button to go to the next list.
• Press Parallel On/Off (F1) button.
• Dial 1 or 0.
- 1 : for setting
- 0 : for cancelling
❐ Pickup Dialing (Hot Line)
Programming the phone number
• Off-hook.
• Dial 742 + phone number + #.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
Setting / Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 74.
• Dial 1 or 0.
- 1 : for setting
- 0 : for cancelling
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
Dialing
❐ Paging and Transfer
To transfer
• Press TRANSFER button before dialing the
paging feature number (63 or 64).
— Check the feature number you wish to use in
the “Paging” section.
• Off-hook.
❐ Predial Preparation
- When using the KX-T7230 or KX-T7235;
• Dial the phone number.
— To change the current entry;
• Dial and re-dial.
• Off-hook.
Quick Reference
7-19
7
Quick Reference
❐ Redial
❐ System Speed Dialing
— Automatic
• Off-hook with SP-PHONE button.
• Press REDIAL button.
— Last Number
• Off-hook.
• Press REDIAL button.
— Saved Number
Storing
While having a conversation or hearing a busy
tone;
• Press AUTO DIAL/STORE button.
• Press SAVE button.
Dialing
• Off-hook.
• Press SAVE button.
❐ Station Feature Clear
• Off-hook.
• Dial 790.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
❐ Station Speed Dialing
Storing the phone number
• Off-hook.
• Dial 60 + station speed dial number (0 through
9) + phone number + #.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
Dialing
• Off-hook.
• Dial 6 + station speed dial number.
OR
- When using the KX-T7235;
• Press STA Speed (F8) button.
• Press the desired Function button
(F1 through F10).
7-20
Quick Reference
• Off-hook.
• Press AUTO DIAL/STORE button.
• Dial the system speed dial number (000
through 499).
OR
- When using the KX-T7235;
• Press SYS Speed (F9) button.
• Press the desired Function button (F1 through
F10).
❐ System Working Report
• Off-hook.
• Dial 794.
• Dial 1 or 0.
- 1 : print out the data
- 0 : clear the data
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
❐ Terminate
While hearing any tone, dialing, or talking;
• Press Terminate button.
— Dial tone is audible.
• Dial the phone number.
OR
- When using the KX-T7230 or KX-T7235;
• Press TRM (S2) button while having a
conversation.
— Dial tone is audible.
• Dial 0 or 81 through 88, or press CO button.
• Dial the phone number.
7
Quick Reference
❐ Timed Reminder
Setting
• Off-hook.
• Dial 761.
• Enter hour (00 through 23).
• Enter minute (00 through 59).
• Dial 0 or 1.
- 0 : for a one time setting
- 1 : for a daily setting
— Time Announce or a confirmation tone is
audible.
• On-hook.
Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 760.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
Checking the setting time
• Off-hook.
• Dial 762.
❐ Trunk (CO Line) Answer From Any
Station (TAFAS)
Answering the external pager
• Off-hook.
• Dial 44 + external pager number (1 – 2) or (1
– 4).
- 1 – 2 : if connected to the KX-TD816
- 1 – 4 : if connected to the KX-TD1232
Answering the external ringer
• Off-hook.
• Dial 47.
• Dial (1) or (1 – 2).
- 1 : if connected to the KX-TD816
- 1 – 2 : if connected to the KX-TD1232
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• Talk.
❐ Two-Way Recording into the Voice
Mail†
Recording into your mailbox
• Press Two-Way Record button.
Stopping recording
• Press Two-Way Record button.
Recording into another mailbox
• Press Two-Way Transfer button.
• Enter extension number or press the desired
DSS button.
Stopping recording
• Press Two-Way Transfer button.
❐ Voice Mail Integration
Setting Call Forwarding destination to
Voice Mail
• Off-hook.
• Press FWD/DND button.
• Dial the Call Forwarding number (2 through
5).
- 2 : Call Forwarding – All Calls
- 3 : Call Forwarding – Busy
- 4 : Call Forwarding – No Answer
- 5 : Call Forwarding – Busy/No Answer
• Dial the extension number of the Voice Mail.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
Listening to a stored message
• Off-hook.
• Press MESSAGE button or dial the extension
number of the Voice Mail.
❐ Voice Mail Transfer
If the call returned to you;
• Press Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button.
• Dial the extension number.
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
Quick Reference
7-21
7
Quick Reference
5
Operator Service Features
The following features can be performed by the
extension assigned as an operator.
❐ Automatic Over Flow and Hurry-Up
Transfer
While having a conversation;
• Press Hurry-Up button.
❐ Background Music (BGM) – External
Setting / Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 65.
• Dial extension number.
• On-hook.
Secondary switch
• Off-hook.
• Dial 793 + extension number.
• On-hook.
OR
- When using the KX-T7235;
• Press Features (F4) button.
• Press NEXT (S3) button twice to go to the
exclusive list.
• Press COS Secondary (F5) button.
• Dial extension number.
• On-hook.
OR
- When using the KX-T7235;
• Press Features (F4) button.
• Press NEXT (S3) button twice to go to the
exclusive list.
• Press External BGM On/Off (F3) button.
• On-hook.
❐ Call Log Lock Control, Incoming
• Press PROGRAM button + 99.
• Dial 02.
• Dial extension number or .
- extension number : to clear one extension
: to clear all extension
• Press STORE button.
• Press PROGRAM button.
❐ Class of Service (COS) Switch
Primary switch
• Off-hook.
• Dial 791 + extension number.
• On-hook.
OR
- When using the KX-T7235;
• Press Features (F4) button.
• Press NEXT (S3) button twice to go to the
exclusive list.
• Press COS Primary (F4) button.
7-22
Quick Reference
❐ External Sensor
- If you hear the alarm tone;
• Off-hook.
— Special dial tone is audible.
❐ Hotel Application
- When using the KX-T7235;
Check-In
• Press Hotel (F10) button.
• Press Check-In (F1) button.
• Dial extension number or DSS button.
• Press NEXT (S3) button.
• Press YES (S1) or NO (S3) button.
Check-Out
• Press Hotel (F10) button.
• Press Check-Out (F2) button.
• Dial extension number or DSS button.
• Press NEXT (S3) button.
• Enter minibar charge.
• Press Others (F4) and enter charge.
• Press PRINT (S3) button.
• Press END (S1) button.
• Press YES (S1) or NO (S3) button.
7
Quick Reference
❐ Timed Reminder, Notification for
Unanswered Extension (KX-T7235 only)
• Press Alert button.
If you want to clear the notification;
• Press CLR (S2) button.
If you want to go to the next unanswered
extension;
• Press NEXT (S3) button.
If you want to exit;
• Press MENU (S1) button.
❐ Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up
Call)
Setting
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7 1.
• Dial desired extension number or DSS button.
• Enter hour (00 through 23).
• Enter minute (00 through 59).
• Dial 0 or 1.
- 0 : for one time setting
- 1 : for daily setting
— Time Announce or a confirmation tone is
audible.
• On-hook.
Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7 0.
• Dial desired extension number or DSS button.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
Checking the setting time (KX-T7230 and
KX-T7235 only)
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7 2.
• Dial desired extension number or DSS button.
• On-hook.
- When using the KX-T7235;
Setting
• Press Hotel (F10) button.
• Press Wake up (F3) button.
• Dial the desired extension number or DSS
button.
• Press NEXT (S3) button.
• Enter hour and minute.
• Dial 0 or 1.
- 0 : for one time setting
- 1 : for daily setting
• Press PROG (S3) button.
Cancelling
• Press Hotel (F10) button.
• Press Wake up (F3) button.
• Dial the extension number or DSS button.
• Press NEXT (S3) button.
• Press CLR (S2) button.
Checking the setting time
• Press Hotel (F10) button.
• Press Wake up (F3) button.
• Dial the extension number or DSS button.
• Press NEXT (S3) button.
• Press END (S1) button.
❐ Live Call Screening Password
Control†
• Press PROGRAM button + 99.
• Dial 03.
• Dial extension number and or .
- extension number : to assign one extension
: to assign all extension
• Press STORE.
• Press PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
❐ Remote Station Lock Control
• Press PROGRAM button + 99.
• Dial 01.
• Dial extension number or .
- extension number : to lock or unlock one
extension
: to lock or unlock all
extension
• Dial 1 or 2.
- 1 : to unlock
- 2 : to lock
• Press STORE button.
• Press PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
Quick Reference
7-23
7
Quick Reference
Special Display Features
6
Special Features — KX-T7235
— Call Log / Extension Dialing / Station
Speed Dialing / System Speed Dialing /
System Feature Access Menu / Hotel
(Operator only)
Press the desired button according to the
messages on the display.
● The operation is performed by following the
messages on the display.
●
• System Feature Access Menu provides a
display of the system features available and
allows access to the following features:
1) Absent Message Capability
2) Paging — External (Access/Answer)
3) Paging — Group (Access/Answer)
4) Background Music (BGM) — External
(Operator only)
5) Call Park (Operator only)
6) Call Pickup, Group
7) Class of Service (COS) Switch (Operator
only)
8) Message Waiting
9) Night Service (Operator only)
10) Paging — External
11) Paging — Group
12) Paralleled Telephone Connection
By pressing the FWD/DND button after going
off-hook, a new display appears. From this
display, the following additional System
Feature can be operated.
1) Call Forwarding
2) Do Not Disturb (DND)
— Refer to Section 4.4, “Special Display
Features.”
— For “BGM — External” and “Class of
Service (COS) Switch” features, refer to
Section 4.3, “Operator Service Features.”
— For “Call Forwarding” and “Do Not Disturb
(DND)” features, refer to Section 4.2, “DPT
Features.”
7-24
Quick Reference
7
Quick Reference
❐ Call Log
❐ Extension Dialing
1. Press Call Log [F5].
1 Jan 15:00
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
1. Press Extension [F3].
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
RING
BGM
CONT
S1
S2
F6
F7
F1
F2
1 Jan 15:00
F6
F7
F8
F9
F3
F4
F5
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
BGM
RING
CONT
F8
F9
F10
S3
2. Press the desired [Fx] button which you want to
call.
<Example>To select 111, press [F2].
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
1234567890
111
0987654
000111222333
100200300400500
CLR
MENU
S1
S2
F6
F7
F8
F9
F3
F4
F5
F3
F4
F5
AB
C
DE
FG
HIJ
MENU
S1
KL
MN
OPQR
S
T-Z
S2
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
S3
3. Press the desired [Fx] button.
<Example> To select Billy Jane, press [F5].
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
RING
BGM
CONT
S2
F1
F2
S3
111
S1
S3
2. Press the desired [Fx] button.
<Example> To select AB, press [F1].
F10
— After pressing [Fx] button:
F1
F2
S2
S1
F10
F6
F7
F1
F2
F8
F9
F3
F4
F5
F10
S3
Agness
Bob
Alice
Carol
Ann Margly
Casey
Ben Johns
Ched Ely
Billy Jane
Chris
NEXT
MENU
PREV
S1
S2
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
S3
— After pressing [Fx] button:
222: Billy Jane
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
BGM
CONT
RING
S1
S2
F8
F9
F10
S3
Quick Reference
7-25
7
Quick Reference
❐ Station Speed Dialing
❐ System Speed Dialing
1. Press STA Speed [F8].
1. Press SYS Speed [F9].
1 Jan 15:00
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
BGM
CONT
RING
S1
S2
F6
F7
F1
F2
1 Jan 15:00
F6
F7
F8
F9
F3
F4
F5
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
BGM
RING
CONT
F8
F9
F10
S1
S3
2. Press the desired [Fx] button.
<Example> To select Panasonic, press the [F7].
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
Bob
Jim Kopp
Ronald
Zangril
Nancy
MENU
S1
↕
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
KME-soft
Panasonic
Police
Louisa
Home
NEXT
S2
F6
F7
F8
F9
S1
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
AB
C
DE
FG
HIJ
MENU
S1
0-987-6543
05555555
0-999
Not Stored
0-1000001
NEXT
S2
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
5555555
7-26
F6
F7
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
BGM
RING
CONT
S1
Quick Reference
S2
S2
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
S3
3. Press the desired [Fx] button.
<Example> To select Jack, press [F6].
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
S3
— After pressing [Fx] button with the name list on
display:
F3
F4
F5
KL
MN
OPQR
S
T-Z
S3
Harry
Jack
Henry
Janny
Hiroshi
Jimmy
Isaac
John
Ivy‘s shop
Johes
PREV
NEXT
MENU
S1
F1
F2
S3
2. Press the desired [Fx] button.
<Example> To select HIJ, press [F5].
F10
Press [S3] to see the next screen.
0-123-4567
0111111
03333333
07777777
100
MENU
S2
F10
S3
F8
F9
F10
S2
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
S3
— After pressing [Fx] button:
Jack’s number is dialed out.
3333333
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
RING
BGM
CONT
S1
S2
S3
F8
F9
F10
7
Quick Reference
❐ System Feature Access Menu
7
1. Press Features [F4].
F1
F2
1 Jan 15:00
F6
F7
F3
F4
F5
Extension
STA Speed
Features
SYS Speed
Call Log
RING
BGM
CONT
F8
F9
S1
S2
F10
F3
F4
F5
S1
S2
0-2
0-8
F6
F7
1-2
F8
F9
F10
NEXT
F3
F4
F5
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
S1
S2
• Off-hook at the paired telephone.
• Press the DSS button on the console.
— Call Transfer
While having a conversation;
• Press the DSS button on the console.
• Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
While having a conversation;
• Press TRANSFER button + DSS button.
❐ PF (Programmable Feature) Button
Programming
— One-Touch Dialing
S3
KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD1232
F1
F2
❐ DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button
OR
KX-T7235 connected to the KX-TD816
External Paging
Group Paging
Group Pickup
Answer Ext-Page
Answer GRP-Page
PREV
MENU
The DSS Console must always be paired with a PT
for proper operation. System programming is
required. See the Installation Manual for
programming instructions.
— Intercom Calling
S3
2. Press the desired [Fx] button.
<Example> To select External Paging, press [F1]
and dial additional number (0 – 2) or (0 – 4).
- 0 – 2 : if connected to the KX-TD816
- 0 – 4 : if connected to the KX-TD1232
F1
F2
DSS Console Features
0-4
0-8
F6
F7
1-4
F8
F9
F10
NEXT
S3
<Example> To store outside phone number,
• Press PROGRAM button + dial 99.
• Press the desired PF button.
• Dial 2.
• Dial the line access code (0 or 81 through 88)
+ phone number.
• Press STORE button.
• Press PROGRAM button.
— One-Touch Access for System Features
— If pressing [Fx] and dialing 0:
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
Extrnl Page All
Extension
Features
Call Log
F6
F7
STA Speed
SYS Speed
F8
F9
F10
• Press PROGRAM button + dial 99.
• Press the desired PF button.
• Dial 2.
• Dial the desired feature number.
• Press STORE button.
• Press PROGRAM button.
To correct an error while programming
S1
S2
S3
• Press CLR (S2) button or TRANSFER
(CLEAR) button and complete programming.
Quick Reference
7-27
7
Quick Reference
To erase after programming
• Press the PF button you wish to erase.
• Press 2 + STORE button.
Dialing
• Off-hook at the paired telephone.
• Press the desired PF button on the console.
Message 5. “Out Until date”
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7505.
• Enter month.
• Enter day.
• On-hook.
Message 6. “In a Meeting”
8
SLT and ISDN Telephone Features
If the “Pickup Dialing (Hot Line)” feature is
enabled, any dialing must be done prior to the
Pickup Dial Waiting Time (default: 1 sec.).
To change the time, refer to the System
Programming in the Installation Manual.
Some of the features are unavailable for ISDN
telephones. As for unavailable features, refer to
Section 6.3 “ISDN Telephone Features.”
❐ Absent Message Capability
Setting
Message 1. “Will Return Soon”
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7501.
• On-hook.
Message 2. “Gone Home”
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7502.
• On-hook.
Message 3. “At Ext extension number”
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7503 + extension number.
• On-hook.
Message 4. “Back at time”
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7504.
• Enter hour (00 through 23).
• Enter minute (00 through 59).
• On-hook.
7-28
Quick Reference
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7506.
• On-hook.
Message 7, 8, and 9. (User programmable)
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7507 through 7509.
- 7507 : for Message 7
- 7508 : for Message 8
- 7509 : for Message 9
• Enter parameters (if required).
• On-hook.
Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7500.
• On-hook.
❐ Account Code Entry
• Off-hook.
• Dial 49 + account code (up to nine digits) +
#.
❐ Alternate Calling — Ring / Voice
Alternating
— If the called extension is set to RingCalling mode;
• Dial , when hearing a ringback tone.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
(Voice-Calling mode is active.)
— If the called extension is set to VoiceCalling mode;
• Dial , when hearing a confirmation tone.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
(Ring-Calling mode is active.)
7
Quick Reference
❐ Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)
While hearing a busy tone;
• Dial 6.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
Answering an intercom recall
• Off-hook.
Answering a CO recall
• Off-hook.
• Dial the telephone number.
Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 46.
• On-hook.
❐ Busy Station Signaling (BSS)
While hearing a busy tone;
• Dial 2.
• Wait for an answer.
❐ Call Forwarding
Setting
— All Calls
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7102 + extension number.
• On-hook.
— Busy
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7103 + extension number.
• On-hook.
— to CO Line
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7106 + line access code (0 or 81 through
88) + phone number + #.
• On-hook.
— Follow Me
- at the destination extension;
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7107 + your extension number.
• On-hook.
Cancelling
— At the original extension
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7100.
• On-hook.
— At the destination extension — “Follow
Me (All Calls)” only
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7108 + your extension number.
• On-hook.
❐ Call Hold
While having a conversation;
• Press the Recall button.
• Dial 50.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
Retrieving
- at the holding extension;
• Off-hook.
• Dial 50.
— No Answer
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7104 + extension number.
• On-hook.
— Busy / No Answer
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7105 + extension number.
• On-hook.
❐ Call Hold Retrieve
Retrieving a CO call on hold
- at another extension;
• Off-hook.
• Dial 53 + held CO line number.
Retrieving a CO call on hold
- at another extension;
• Off-hook.
• Dial 51 + holding extension number.
Quick Reference
7-29
7
Quick Reference
❐ Call Park
❐ Call Transfer – to Extension
Setting
— Screened Call Transfer
While having a conversation;
• Press the Recall button.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• Dial 52 + parking zone number (0 through 9).
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
While having a conversation;
• Press the Recall button.
• Dial the extension number.
• Wait for an answer and announce.
• On-hook.
Retrieving
While having a conversation;
• Press the Recall button.
• Dial the extension number.
• On-hook.
• Off-hook.
• Dial 52 + parking zone number.
❐ Call Pickup
— CO Line
• Off-hook.
• Dial 4 .
— Directed
• Off-hook.
• Dial 41 + extension number.
— Group
• Off-hook.
• Dial 40.
❐ Call Pickup Deny
Setting / Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 720.
• Dial 1 or 0.
- 1 : for setting
- 0 : for cancelling
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
❐ Call Splitting
Having a conversation while having another
call on hold temporarily
• Press the Recall button repeatedly to alternate
between the callers.
7-30
Quick Reference
— Unscreened Call Transfer
❐ Call Waiting
Setting / Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 731.
• Dial 1 or 0.
- 1 : for setting
- 0 : for cancelling
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
❐ Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR)
To restrict the presentation of your number
to the called party
• Off-hook.
• Dial 572.
• On-hook.
To present your number to the called party
• Off-hook.
• Dial 570.
• On-hook.
To change the current setting at just time
you make a call
• Off-hook.
• Dial 571.
• Dial 0 or 81 through 88.
• Dial the phone number.
7
Quick Reference
❐ Connected Line Identification
Restriction (CLOR)
To restrict the presentation of your number
to the calling party
• Off-hook.
• Dial 581.
• On-hook.
To present your number to the calling party
• Off-hook.
• Dial 580.
• On-hook.
❐ Conference
While having a conversation;
• Press the Recall button.
• Dial the third party.
• Talk to the third party.
• Press the Recall button.
• Dial 3.
❐ Do Not Disturb (DND)
Setting / Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 710.
• Dial 1 + extension number or 0.
- 1 + extension number : for setting
- 0 : for cancelling
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
❐ Do Not Disturb Override
• Dial 2 while hearing Do Not Disturb tone.
❐ Doorphone Call
Answering a doorphone call
• Off-hook.
Calling a doorphone
• Off-hook.
• Dial 68.
• Dial doorphone number (1) or (1 – 2).
- 1 : if connected to the KX-TD816
- 1 – 2 : if connected to the KX-TD1232
To unlock the door (programmed extensions
only)
• Off-hook.
• Dial 55.
• Dial door opener number (1) or (1 – 2).
- 1 : if connected to the KX-TD816
- 1 – 2 : if connected to the KX-TD1232
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
To unlock the door while talking to the
doorphone
• Press the Recall button.
• Dial 5.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
❐ Electronic Station Lockout
Locking
• Off-hook.
• Dial 77 + lock code (000 through 999).
• Dial the same lock code again.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
Unlocking
❐ Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialing In
Calls
Setting / Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 56.
• Dial 1 or 0.
- 1 : for setting
- 0 : for cancelling
• On-hook.
• Off-hook.
• Dial 77 + lock code.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
❐ Emergency Call
• Off-hook.
• Dial the desired emergency number.
Quick Reference
7-31
7
Quick Reference
❐ Executive Busy Override – Extension
While hearing a busy tone;
• Dial 3.
❐ Executive Busy Override Deny
Setting / Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 733.
• Dial 1 or 0.
- 1 : for setting
- 0 : for cancelling
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
❐ External Relay Control
Relay on
• Off-hook.
• Dial 67.
• Dial (1) or (1 or 2).
- 1 : if connected to the KX-TD816
- 1 – 2 : if connected to the KX-TD1232
• On-hook.
❐ External Ringer
Setting / Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 730.
• Dial (1), (1 – 2) or 0.
- 1 : if connected to the KX-TD816
- 1 – 2 : if connected to the KX-TD1232
- 0 : for cancelling
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
Answering
• Off-hook.
• Dial 47.
• Dial (1) or (1 – 2).
- 1 : if connected to the KX-TD816
- 1 – 2 : if connected to the KX-TD1232
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• Talk.
7-32
Quick Reference
❐ Hotel Application
Room Management
<Example> Message 7: “Cleaned-up”
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7507.
• On-hook.
<Example> Message 8: “Minibar and
charge”
• Off-hook.
• Dial 7508.
• Enter minibar charge.
• On-hook.
❐ Intercom Calling
• Off-hook.
• Dial the extension number.
❐ Log-In / Log-Out
Setting
• Off-hook.
• Dial 45.
• Dial 1 or 0.
- 1 : for Log-In
- 0 : for Log-Out
• On-hook.
❐ Message Waiting
Setting / Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 70.
• Dial 1 or 0.
- 1 : for setting
- 0 : for cancelling
• Dial the extension number.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
If the extension is busy;
• Dial 4.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
7
Quick Reference
Calling back the message sender
• Off-hook.
• If necessary, dial 702.
Clearing all messages by the message
receiver
• Off-hook.
• Dial 700 + your extension number.
❐ Night Service
Setting / Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 78.
• Dial 0, 1 or 2.
- 0 : for Auto mode
- 1 : for Manual Day mode
- 2 : for Manual Night mode
• On-hook.
❐ Operator Call
General
• Off-hook.
• Dial 9.
Specific call
• Off-hook.
• Dial 61 or 62.
- 61 : Operator 1
- 62 : Operator 2
❐ Outward Dialing
— Line Access, Automatic
• Off-hook.
• Dial 9 + phone number.
— Line Access, CO Line Group
• Off-hook.
• Dial 8 + CO line group number (1 through 8).
• Dial the phone number.
❐ Paging
— All
• Off-hook.
• Dial 63 (or 64) + .
— A confirmation tone is audible (optional).
• Announce.
— External
To access all external pagers
• Off-hook.
• Dial 640.
— A confirmation tone is audible (optional).
• Announce.
To access a particular pager only
• Off-hook.
• Dial 64 + external pager number (1 – 2) or
(1 – 4).
- 1 – 2 : if connected to the KX-TD816
- 1 – 4 : if connected to the KX-TD1232
— A confirmation tone is audible (optional).
• Announce.
— Group
To access all groups simultaneously
• Off-hook.
• Dial 630.
— A confirmation tone is audible (optional).
• Announce.
To access a particular group of extensions
• Off-hook.
• Dial 63 + extension group number (1 through
8).
— A confirmation tone is audible (optional).
• Announce.
❐ Paging – ANSWER
• Off-hook.
• Dial 44 + external pager number, or 43.
- 44 : To answer a page sent to the external
pager/TAFAS
- 43 : To answer a page sent to the built-in
speaker
Quick Reference
7-33
7
Quick Reference
❐ Paging and Transfer
To transfer
• Press the Recall button before dialing the
paging feature number (63 or 64).
— Check the feature number you wish to use in
the “Paging” section.
❐ Pickup Dialing (Hot Line)
Programming the phone number
• Off-hook.
• Dial 742 + phone number + #.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
Setting / Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 74.
• Dial 1 or 0.
- 1 : for setting
- 0 : for cancelling
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
Dialing
• Off-hook.
❐ Redial
Dialing
• Off-hook.
• Dial 6 + station speed dial number.
❐ System Speed Dialing
• Off-hook.
• Dial + system speed dial number (000
through 499).
❐ Timed Reminder
Setting
• Off-hook.
• Dial 761.
• Enter hour (00 through 23).
• Enter minute (00 through 59).
• Dial 0 or 1.
- 0 : for one time setting
- 1 : for daily setting
— Time Announce or confirmation tone is
audible.
• On-hook.
Cancelling
• Off-hook.
• Dial 760.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
— Last Number
• Off-hook.
• Dial #.
❐ Station Feature Clear
• Off-hook.
• Dial 790.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
❐ Station Speed Dialing
Storing the phone number
• Off-hook.
• Dial 60 + station speed dial number (0 through
9) + phone number + #.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
7-34
Quick Reference
❐ Trunk (CO Line) Answer From Any
Station (TAFAS)
Answering the external pager
• Off-hook.
• Dial 44.
• Dial external pager number (1 – 2) or (1 – 4).
- 1 – 2 : if connected to the KX-TD816
- 1 – 4 : if connected to the KX-TD1232
Answering the external ringer
• Off-hook.
• Dial 47.
• Dial external pager number (1) or (1 – 2).
- 1 : if connected to the KX-TD816
- 1 – 2 : if connected to the KX-TD1232
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• Talk.
7
Quick Reference
❐ Voice Mail Integration
Setting Call Forwarding destination to
Voice Mail
• Off-hook.
• Dial 710 + Call Forwarding number (2
through 5).
- 2 : Call Forwarding – All calls
- 3 : Call Forwarding – Busy
- 4 : Call Forwarding – No Answer
- 5 : Call Forwarding – Busy/No Answer
• Dial the extension number of the Voice Mail.
— A confirmation tone is audible.
• On-hook.
Listening to a stored message
• Off-hook.
• Dial the extension number of the Voice Mail.
Quick Reference
7-35
7-36
Quick Reference
Section 8
Appendix
Contents
Display Examples ..........................................................................8-2
Feature Number List...................................................................8-13
LED Indication............................................................................8-16
Tone List ......................................................................................8-17
Troubleshooting...........................................................................8-19
8
Appendix
Display Examples
Examples
(1)
(2)
Day/Time Set
<Blinking>
1.Jan 0:00
• Factory setting.
— Shown on the manager’s display only.
• The current date and time is not set (default).
(3)
1 Jan. 1994 SAT
• The current date and time is not set (default).
— Pressing “ ” while on-hook allows you to alternate the
display with Example (2).
(4)
1234:
• Make or receive an intercom call, name is not assigned.
(5)
1234:Tony Viola
• Make or receive an intercom call, name is assigned.
• Confirm key programming on the DSS or MESSAGE button.
(6)
2345:
Busy
• Destination extension is busy.
(7)
4567
DND
• Destination extension is set “Do Not Disturb (DND).”
(8)
5678:
(9)
3457:MDM Access
• Destination is modem for remote access.
(10)
1234567890
• Called by a CO line, with Caller ID*-number.
• Called by the ISDN line with the CLIP* feature (phone number).
(11)
Panasonic
• Called by a CO line, with Caller ID*-name.
• Called by the ISDN line with the CLIP* feature (name).
(12)
950-1001PP12345&
• Confirm key programming on the REDIAL, SAVE, or OneTouch Dialing button.
(13)
→1234:Tony Viola
• Make or receive an intercom call, name is assigned, after the call
is transferred.
8-2
Appendix
Free
• Called by “Camp-On” (intercom recall).
8
Appendix
(14)
1233 & 1235
• Conference with two extensions.
(15)
No Held Call
• There is no held call.
— When retrieving call on hold or parked call.
• There is no incoming call.
— When trying to picking up the call.
• Not complete to set “Message Waiting.”
(16)
1234 & CO 01
• Conference with an extension and CO line.
(17)
CO 01
• Idle CO line is captured.
• Called by a CO line, without Caller ID.*
(18)
CO 01 :00001
• CO line meter.
(19)
CO 01 :0000.23FR
• CO line charge of FR.
(20)
CO 01
• Duration time of incoming CO call.
(21)
CO 03: Free
• Called by “Camp-On” (CO recall).
(22)
→ CO 02
• Called by a CO line, without Caller ID* and the ISDN line with
the CLIP* feature, after a call is transferred.
0:01’15
* Caller ID and CLIP
Provides you with a caller’s information, such as his/her name and
telephone number, on the CO line assigned to receive Caller ID or ISDN
service call. It requires a subscription to caller identification services.
Refer to the Installation Manual.
(23)
CO busy
• The desired CO line is busy.
(24)
Transfer to CO
• The destination extension is set “Call Forwarding — to CO
Line.”
(25)
Call Waiting Off
• Cancel “Call Waiting.”
Appendix
8-3
8
Appendix
(26)
Call Waiting ON
• Complete to set “Call Waiting.”
(27)
DND Operator
• Complete to set “Do Not Disturb (DND).”
• Confirm key programming on the FWD/DND button.
• The destination extension of DND is set the operator.
(28)
DND Ext.1232
• The destination extension of DND is set the desired extension.
(29)
Busy Ovrde Allow
• Cancel “Executive Busy Override Deny.”
(30)
Busy Ovrde Deny
• Complete to set “Executive Busy Override Deny.”
(31)
MW Cancel:E1234
• Cancel “Message Waiting” of desired extension.
(32)
Auto Mode
• Complete to set Auto mode.
— “Night Service”
(33)
Gone Home
• Absent Message 2.
(34)
Busy
(35)
At Ext %%%
• Resource is busy.
• Absent Message 3.
(36)
CLIR OFF
• Cancel “Calling Line Identification Restriction.”
(37)
CLIR ON
• Complete to set “Calling Line Identification Restriction.”
(38)
COLR OFF
• Cancel “Connected Line Identification Restriction.”
(39)
COLR ON
• Complete to set “Connected Line Identification Restriction.”
(40)
Check Printer
• Alert indication “Check Printer.”
8-4
Appendix
8
Appendix
(41)
Paging Deny Off
• Cancel “Paging — DENY.”
(42)
Paging Deny On
• Complete to set “Paging —DENY.”
(43)
MW Cancelled
• Cancel one’s own “Message Waiting.”
(44)
Unlocked
• Cancel “Electronic Station Lockout.”
(45)
Extrnl Page 2
• Access to “Paging — External” (- to a specific external pager).
(46)
Extrnl Page All
• Access to “Paging — External” (- to all external pagers).
(47)
External BGM Off
• Stop BGM through external pager.
— “Background Music (BGM) — External”
(48)
External BGM On
• Start BGM through external pager.
— “Background Music (BGM) — External”
(49)
Relay Control
• Relay on number (Master) is assigned.
(50)
External Sensor 1
• Access to “External Sensor” (- to Operator 1).
(51)
Call Parked at 1
• Complete to set “Call Park.”
(52)
Will Return Soon
• Absent Message 1.
(53)
Group Page 3
• Access to “Paging — Group” (- to a particular extension group).
(54)
Group Page All
• Access to “Paging — Group” (- to all extensions).
(55)
BGM Off
• Stop BGM.
Appendix
8-5
8
Appendix
(56)
BGM On
• Start BGM.
(57)
Handset:2
• Volume Control — Handset on handset mode.
(58)
MW at Ext 1234
• Complete to set “Message Waiting.”
(59)
In a Meeting
(60)
OVER YOUR BUDGET
• Extension budget amount to restriction limit.
(61)
Contrast: 3
• Display Contrast — Adjustment
(62)
Cont RNGOFF BGM
• Ringer Volume is off.
(63)
Incoming Log Off
• Cancel “Call Log, Incoming.”
(64)
Incoming Log On
• Complete to set “Call Log, Incoming.”
(65)
Log—in
• Log-In mode.
(66)
Log—out
• Log-Out mode.
(67)
SP:5
• Volume Control — Speaker on handsfree mode.
(68)
Message Cancel
• Cancel Absent Message.
(69)
Night Mode
• Manual Night mode status.
• Complete to set Manual Night mode.
— “Night Service”
(70)
Night (Auto)
• Automatic Night mode status.
— “Night Service”
8-6
Appendix
• Absent Message 6.
8
Appendix
(71)
Restricted
• An outgoing call is restricted.
(72)
CO Not Assigned
• The desired CO line is restricted (not assigned).
(73)
Ext Data Clear
• Execute “Station Feature Clear.”
(74)
Parallel Off
• Cancel “Paralleled Telephone Connection.”
(75)
Parallel On
• Complete to set “Paralleled Telephone Connection.”
(76)
Park at 1 N/A
• Not complete to set “Call Park.”
(77)
1234 : Primary
• Primary Status.
(78)
ACCOUNT
• Confirm key programming on the Account button.
(79)
Enter ACCNT Code
• Pressing Account button.
— “Account Code Entry”
(80)
C.Pickup Allow
• Cancel “Call Pickup Deny.”
(81)
RCL
• Called by transfer recall, with name.
— “Call Transfer”
(82)
C.Pickup Deny
• Complete to set “Call Pickup Deny.”
(83)
Callback Ext1234
• Complete to set “Camp-On.”
(84)
CallBack CO *
• Complete to set “Camp-On.”
— When there is no idle CO line.
(85)
CallBack CO 01
• Complete to set “Camp-On.”
Appendix
8-7
8
Appendix
(86)
Callback TRG 1
• Complete to set “Camp-On.”
(87)
FWD(CO) 91201431
• Complete to set “Call Forwarding — to CO Line.”
• Confirm key programming on the FWD/DND button.
(88)
FWD/DND Cancel
• Cancel “Call Forwarding” or “Do Not Disturb (DND).”
(89)
FWD(B/NA)Ext1234
• Complete to set “Call Forwarding — Busy/No Answer.”
• Confirm key programming on the FWD/DND button.
(90)
FWD(BSY)Ext1234
• Complete to set “Call Forwarding — Busy.”
• Confirm key programming on the FWD/DND button.
(91)
FWD Cancel E1234
• Cancel “Call Forwarding — Follow Me (All Calls)” at another
extension.
(92)
FWD(NA) Ext1234
• Complete to set “Call Forwarding — No Answer.”
• Confirm key programming on the FWD/DND button.
(93)
FWD(All) Ext1234
• Complete to set “Call Forwarding — All Calls.”
• Confirm key programming on the FWD/DND button.
(94)
FWD(From) Ext1234
• Complete to set “Call Forwarding — Follow Me.”
(95)
System Data Err1
• Alert indication “System Data Error.”
(96)
All Call Page
• Access to “Paging — All.”
(97)
1234 : Secondary
• Secondary status.
(98)
Locked No.:123
• Complete to set “Electronic Station Lockout.”
(99)
System Link Down
• Alert indication “System Link Down.”
* Available only for KX-TD1232.
(100) Day(Auto)
8-8
Appendix
• Automatic Day mode status.
— “Night Service”
8
Appendix
(101) Day Mode
• Manual Day mode status.
• Complete to set Manual Day mode.
— “Night Service”
(102) Alarm
10:15
• Complete to set or called by “Timed Reminder.”
(one-time mode)
• Confirm “Timed Reminder” programming.
(103) Alarm
10:15*
• Complete to set or called by “Timed Reminder.”
(everyday mode)
• Confirm “Timed Reminder” programming.
(104) Alarm Cancelled
• Cancel “Timed Reminder.”
(105) Alarm Not Stored
• Confirm “Timed Reminder” programming, when not stored.
(106) Ringer: 3
• Volume Control — Ringer on idle status.
(107) Door 1 Open
• Complete to open the door.
(108) Door Phone 1
• Make or receive a doorphone call.
(109)
• Illegal operation.
Not Valid
(110)
RCL: Ext 1234
• Called by transfer recall, without name.
— “Call Transfer”
(111)
Out Until %%/%%
• Absent Message 5.
(112)
Back at %%:%%
• Absent Message 4.
Appendix
8-9
8
Appendix
Examples — in Station Programming mode
(1)
CO-01
• Single-CO (S-CO) button is assigned.
(2)
TRK GRP-3
• Group-CO (G-CO) button is assigned.
(3)
CO No.?→
• Select CO number.
(4)
EXT CHG Print
• Execute all extension charge print.
(5)
Total CHG Print
• Execute “Total charge print.”
(6)
Loop-CO
• Loop-CO (L-CO) button is assigned.
(7)
Message Waiting
• Message Waiting (MESSAGE) button is assigned.
(8)
Jack02<=>EXT202
• Confirm jack number and extension number.
(9)
C.W. Tone 1
• Select Call Waiting tone.
(10)
Hands-free:Off
• Disable “Full One-Touch Dialing” mode.
(11)
Hands-free:Off
• Enable “Full One-Touch Dialing” mode.
(12)
Hurry up to-1234
• Hurry up button is assigned.
(13)
Print Mode?R
• Select “Print Mode.”
(14)
Click Tone on
• Key Click Tone on is assigned.
8-10
Appendix
8
Appendix
(15)
Rate:
(16)
1234: Unlocked
• An extension is not locked.
(17)
Charge Meter
• Select charge meter.
(18)
ID Code?
• Enter ID Code.
(19)
Conference
• Conference (CONF) button is assigned.
(20)
Login/Logout
• Login/Logout button is assigned.
(21)
Clear Ready?
• Available to clear Station Programming data.
(22)
Not Stored
• No programming is assigned.
(23)
EXT
• All extensions are not locked.
(24)
EXT-1234
• DSS button is assigned.
(25)
EXT NO.?→
• Select extension number.
(26)
Meter EXT Clear?
• Available to clear Extension Clear.
(27)
Account
• Account button is assigned.
(28)
Enter ACCNT Code
• Select account code.
(29)
Tone Type-2
• Select ringing tone for a CO button.
0.23
:
• Enter new rate.
Appendix
8-11
8
Appendix
(30)
FWD/DND
• FWD/DND button is assigned.
(31)
Save
• SAVE button is assigned.
(32)
EXT123:Locked
• Execute “Remote Station Lock Control.”
(33)
Voice Call
• Select Voice-Calling mode.
(34)
Tone Call
• Select Ring-Calling (Tone Call) mode.
(35)
Terminate
• Terminate button is assigned.
(36)
VTR-1234
• Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button is assigned.
(37)
Pref.In:CO 01
• Select “Prime Line (CO Line) Preference — Incoming.”
(38)
Pref.In:NO
• Select “No Line Preference — Incoming.”
(39)
Pref.In:Ring
• Select “Ring Line Preference — Incoming.”
(40)
Pref.In:CO-01
• Select “Prime Line (CO Line) Preference — Outgoing.”
(41)
Pref.Out:NO
• Select “No Line Preference — Outgoing.”
(42)
Pref.Out:Idle
• Select “Idle Line Preference —Outgoing.”
(43)
Pref.Out:ICM
• Select “Prime Line (INTERCOM) Preference — Outgoing.”
(44)
Meter Sum Clear?
• Available to clear CO, Total or Account Code Charge Fee.
8-12
Appendix
8
Appendix
(45)
1234:CHG Print
• Execute selected extension charge print.
(46)
092-555-2111
• One-Touch Dialing button is assigned.
Conditions
• If the displayed characters exceed sixteen digits, “&” is shown at the right-hand edge.
• The duration time display is shown only when you make or receive a CO call. Count starting
time for outgoing calls can be programmed as desired.
• When you confirm key programming, be sure to press a button while on-hook. If the “Full
One-Touch Dialing” feature is set, dialing mode will start when pressing PF (Programmable
Feature), DSS, SAVE or REDIAL button.
Appendix
8-13
8
Appendix
Feature Number List
Numbers listed below are the initial factory setting (default value). There are the flexible
feature numbers and the fixed feature numbers. To change the flexible feature numbers, follow
the procedure described in the “System Programming” section in the Installation Manual.
Flexible Feature Numbers
Feature
1st hundred extension block
2nd hundred extension block
3rd through 16th hundred extension block
Absent Message Capability set/cancel
Account Code Entry
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On) cancel
Background Music (BGM) — External on/off
Call Forwarding set/cancel
Call Forwarding — Follow Me set/cancel
Call Hold
Call Hold, Retrieve CO call/intercom call
Call Park/Call Park Retrieve
Call Pickup, CO Line
Call Pickup, Directed
Call Pickup, Group
Call Pickup Deny set/cancel
Call Waiting set/cancel
Call Log — Incoming set/cancel
Call Log Lock — incoming set/
cancel
Class of Service (COS) Switch — Primary
Class of Service (COS) Switch — Secondary
CLIR once/continue/cancel
COLR set/cancel
Do Not Disturb (DND) set/cancel
Do Not Disturb for Direct Dial In set/cancel
Doorphone Call calling/door open
Electronic Station Lockout set/
cancel
Emergency Call
Executive Busy Override Deny set/cancel
External Relay Control on
8-14
Appendix
Default
Required Additional Digits
2
3
—
750
49
46
65
710
710
50
53 / 51
52
4
41
40
720
731
54
59
59
791
793
57
58
710
56
68 / 55
77
77
110, 112
733
67
0 through 9, 00 through 99
0 through 9, 00 through 99
0 through 9, 00 through 99
1-9/0
Account code + # (99)
2-6 + EXTN. (extension number) / 0
7 + EXTN. / 8 + EXTN.
CO number / EXTN.
0-9
EXTN.
1/0
1/0
1/0
lock code (000 - 999) twice
lock code (000 - 999)
EXTN.
EXTN.
1/2/0
1/0
1 + EXTN. / 0
1/0
1 / 1 or 2
lock code (000 - 999) twice
lock code (000 - 999)
1/0
1-2
8
Appendix
Feature
External Ringer set/cancel
External Ringer Answer/TAFAS Answer
Live Call Screening Password set/
cancel
Log-In/Log-Out
Message Waiting set/cancel/callback
Night Service manual/auto
Operator Call — General call
Operator Call — Specific call
Outward Dialing,
— Line Access, Automatic
— Line Access, CO Line Group
Paging — All
Paging — External
Paging — External Answer/TAFAS Answer
Paging — Group
Paging — Group Answer
Paging — Deny
Paralleled Telephone Connection set/cancel
Pickup Dialing (Hot Line) store/set/cancel
Redial, Last Number (— for SLT)
Station Feature Clear
Station Speed Dialing
Station Speed Dialing store
System Speed Dialing (— for SLT)
System Working Report print out the data/
clear the data
Timed Reminder set/
cancel/confirm
Timed Reminder, Remote set/
cancel/confirm
Default
Required Additional Digits
730
47
799
1 or 2 / 0
1-2
password (000 - 999) twice/
password (000 - 999)
1/0
1 + EXTN. / 0 + EXTN. / 2
1 or 2 / 0
45
70
78
9
61 or 62
0
8
64 or 63
64
44
63
43
721
69
74
#
790
6
60
794
76
76
7
7
1-8
0/1/1-2/1-4
1/1-2/1-4
0/1-8
1/0
1/0
2 + phone number + # / 1 / 0
0-9
(0 - 9) + phone number + #
000 - 499
1/0
1 + hhmm* + (0 / 1)
0/2
1 + EXTN. + hhmm* + (0 / 1)
0 / 2 + EXTN.
* hhmm
hh: hour (01-12)
mm: minute (00-59)
Appendix
8-15
8
Appendix
Fixed Feature Numbers
Feature
Default
While busy tone is heard
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)
Busy Station Signaling (BSS)
Executive Busy Override
Message Waiting on
6
2
3
4
While Do Not Disturb tone is heard
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override
2
While calling or talking
Account Code Delimiter
Alternate Calling — Ring/Voice
Conference
Door open
Pulse to Tone Conversion
When the telephone is on-hook
Day/Night mode display
Time display/date display switching
#/99
3
5
#
#
Conditions
• Extension numbers can be two to four digits in length. Any number can be set as the
leading first or second digit. To assign the extension number, please refer to the
Installation Manual.
• Flexible feature numbers can only be dialed during dial tone.
• When “ ” or “#” are included in a feature number, it will not be possible for users of
dial pulse (DP) telephones to access the feature.
Programming References
System Programming — Installation Manual
[003] Extension Number Set
[100] Flexible Numbering
8-16
Appendix
8
Appendix
LED Indication
The LED (Light Emitting Diode) indicators of the buttons inform the line conditions with a
variety of lighting patterns: lights on/off, flashing, etc. This allows you to check which lines
are idle or in use at a glance.
Flashing light patterns
Slow flash
(60 flash/min.)
Moderate flash
(120 flash/min.)
Rapid flash
(240 flash/min.)
1 sec.
LED Indication on INTERCOM Button
The table below shows the lighting patterns and the intercom line conditions.
INTERCOM button
Off
Green On
Green slow flash
Green moderate flash
Green rapid flash
Intercom Line Condition
Idle
Intercom call / Conference established
Intercom call hold
Consultation hold
Incoming intercom/doorphone call
LED Indication on CO Button
The table below shows the lighting patterns and the CO line conditions.
CO Button
Off
Green On
Green slow flash
Green rapid flash
Red On
Red slow flash
CO Line Condition
Idle
I-use
I-hold
Hold Recall / Incoming call
Other-use
Other-hold*
— Item with * is available at Single-CO button only.
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) on DSS Button
BLF indicates the status of corresponding extension by lighting patterns: Red On/Off.
BLF lights red when the corresponding extension is busy, is set the “Do Not Disturb (DND)”
feature, or while in the check-in mode of the “Hotel Application.” And BLF lights off when it
is idle. This is available for DSS buttons of DSS consoles and for flexible CO buttons assigned
as DSS buttons on proprietary telephones.
Appendix
8-17
8
Appendix
Tone List
<TONE>
Confirmation Tone 1
Confirmation Tone 2
Confirmation Tone 3
Confirmation Tone 4
Dial Tone 1
Dial Tone 2
Dial Tone 3
Dial Tone 4
Busy Tone
Reorder Tone
Ringback Tone 1
Ringback Tone 2
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Tone
Warning Tone
8-18
Appendix
1 sec
8
Appendix
<TONE>
15 sec
Call Waiting
Hold Recall
<RING TONE>
1 sec
CO Calls /
CO Hold Recall
Intercom Calls /
Intercom Hold Recall
Doorphone Calls /
Timed Reminder
Callback Ringing
(Camp-on Recall)
5 sec
Message Waiting
5 sec
External Sensor
Appendix
8-19
8
Appendix
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible Solution
Nothing is heard in handsfree
mode.
“Headset” mode is selected.
When the headset is not used,
set the mode to “Handset.”
Refer to “Handset/Headset
Selection” in Station
Programming (Section 2), or
“Initial Setting” (Section 1.1).
The unit does not ring.
Ringer Volume is set to
“OFF.”
Set the Ringer Volume to a
higher value. Refer to “Initial
Setting” (Section 1.1).
The display blinks with the
following message:
System internal clock does
not work properly.
Consult with an authorized
Panasonic Factory Service
Center.
Day/Time Set
1 Jan 12:00
1 Jan 1994 SAT
8-20
Probable Cause
Appendix
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
Central P.O. Box 288, Osaka 530-91, Japan
Printed in Japan
PSQX1071ZA
KW0196NS0
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising